Si4460 revC2A Command/Property API Documentation

Interface Version: 1.0

Document Version: 2.0.5

Generated: 2015-03-18T10:15:42-05:00

Introduction

This document provides API descriptions for the commands and properties used to control and configure the part. The interface version tracks any functional changes to the API (command, property, field, enumeration, etc.). The documentation version tracks any text changes to the summary or description text of the API components.

The commands are listed in a summary table with links to command details. The properties are listed in a summary table with links to property details. The feature available column in the summary tables lists the firmware revision which first implemented the command or property.

An entry in the summary table will link to a details section, which contains a register view with fields. Clicking a field in the register view will auto-expand the corresponding field details. An up button in the field detail links back to the register view. Each register view title links back to the summary table entry. These hyper-links provide two-click access from top to bottom.

Command Summary

	BOOT_COMMANDS
	Number	Name	Summary	Feature Available
	0x02	POWER_UP	Command to power-up the device and select the operational mode and functionality.

COMMON_COMMANDS
Number	Name	Summary	Feature Available
0x00	NOP	No Operation command.
0x01	PART_INFO	Reports basic information about the device.
0x10	FUNC_INFO	Returns the Function revision information of the device.
0x11	SET_PROPERTY	Sets the value of one or more properties.
0x12	GET_PROPERTY	Retrieves the value of one or more properties
0x13	GPIO_PIN_CFG	Configures the GPIO pins.
0x15	FIFO_INFO	Access the current byte counts in the TX and RX FIFOs, and provide for resetting the FIFOs.
0x20	GET_INT_STATUS	Returns the interrupt status of ALL the possible interrupt events (both STATUS and PENDING). Optionally, it may be used to clear latched (PENDING) interrupt events.
0x33	REQUEST_DEVICE_STATE	Request current device state and channel.
0x34	CHANGE_STATE	Manually switch the chip to a desired operating state.
0x44	READ_CMD_BUFF	Used to read CTS and the command response.
0x50	FRR_A_READ	Reads the fast response registers (FRR) starting with FRR_A.
0x51	FRR_B_READ	Reads the fast response registers (FRR) starting with FRR_B.
0x53	FRR_C_READ	Reads the fast response registers (FRR) starting with FRR_C.
0x57	FRR_D_READ	Reads the fast response registers (FRR) starting with FRR_D.

IR_CAL_COMMANDS
Number	Name	Summary	Feature Available
0x17	IRCAL	Image rejection calibration.
0x1a	IRCAL_MANUAL	Image rejection calibration.

TX_COMMANDS
Number	Name	Summary	Feature Available
0x31	START_TX	Switches to TX state and starts transmission of a packet.
0x37	TX_HOP	Hop to a new frequency while in TX.
0x66	WRITE_TX_FIFO	Writes data byte(s) to the TX FIFO.

RX_COMMANDS
Number	Name	Summary	Feature Available
0x16	PACKET_INFO	Returns information about the length of the variable field in the last packet received, and (optionally) overrides field length.
0x22	GET_MODEM_STATUS	Returns the interrupt status of the Modem Interrupt Group (both STATUS and PENDING). Optionally, it may be used to clear latched (PENDING) interrupt events.
0x32	START_RX	Switches to RX state and starts reception of a packet.
0x36	RX_HOP	Manually hop to a new frequency while in RX mode.
0x77	READ_RX_FIFO	Reads data byte(s) from the RX FIFO.

ADVANCED_COMMANDS
Number	Name	Summary	Feature Available
0x14	GET_ADC_READING	Performs conversions using the Auxiliary ADC and returns the results of those conversions.
0x21	GET_PH_STATUS	Returns the interrupt status of the Packet Handler Interrupt Group (both STATUS and PENDING). Optionally, it may be used to clear latched (PENDING) interrupt events.
0x23	GET_CHIP_STATUS	Returns the interrupt status of the Chip Interrupt Group (both STATUS and PENDING). Optionally, it may be used to clear latched (PENDING) interrupt events.

Property Summary

GLOBAL (0x00)
Group	Number	Name	Default	Summary	Feature Available
0x00	0x00	GLOBAL_XO_TUNE	0x40	Configure the internal capacitor frequency tuning bank for the crystal oscillator.
0x00	0x01	GLOBAL_CLK_CFG	0x00	Clock configuration options.
0x00	0x02	GLOBAL_LOW_BATT_THRESH	0x18	Configures the threshold voltage for low-battery detection.
0x00	0x03	GLOBAL_CONFIG	0x20	Global configuration settings.
0x00	0x04	GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG	0x00	General Wakeup Timer feature configuration.
0x00	0x05 0x06	GLOBAL_WUT_M	0x00 0x01	Configure the mantissa of the Wake-Up Timer (WUT) value.
0x00	0x07	GLOBAL_WUT_R	0x60	Configure the exponent of the Wake-Up Timer (WUT) value.
0x00	0x08	GLOBAL_WUT_LDC	0x00	Configures the period of time the chip remains active after automatic wake-up in LDC mode.
0x00	0x09	GLOBAL_WUT_CAL	0x00	Controls if calibration of the 32K R-C Oscillator will be performed on intervals of the WUT.

INT_CTL (0x01)
Group	Number	Name	Default	Summary	Feature Available
0x01	0x00	INT_CTL_ENABLE	0x04	This property provides for global enabling of the three interrupt groups (Chip, Modem and Packet Handler) in order to generate HW interrupts at the NIRQ pin.
0x01	0x01	INT_CTL_PH_ENABLE	0x00	Enable individual interrupt sources within the Packet Handler Interrupt Group to generate a HW interrupt on the NIRQ output pin.
0x01	0x02	INT_CTL_MODEM_ENABLE	0x00	Enable individual interrupt sources within the Modem Interrupt Group to generate a HW interrupt on the NIRQ output pin.
0x01	0x03	INT_CTL_CHIP_ENABLE	0x04	Enable individual interrupt sources within the Chip Interrupt Group to generate a HW interrupt on the NIRQ output pin.

FRR_CTL (0x02)
Group	Number	Name	Default	Summary	Feature Available
0x02	0x00	FRR_CTL_A_MODE	0x01	Fast Response Register A Configuration.
0x02	0x01	FRR_CTL_B_MODE	0x02	Fast Response Register B Configuration.
0x02	0x02	FRR_CTL_C_MODE	0x09	Fast Response Register C Configuration.
0x02	0x03	FRR_CTL_D_MODE	0x00	Fast Response Register D Configuration.

PREAMBLE (0x10)
Group	Number	Name	Default	Summary	Feature Available
0x10	0x00	PREAMBLE_TX_LENGTH	0x08	Configure length of TX Preamble.
0x10	0x01	PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_1	0x14	Configuration of reception of a packet with a Standard Preamble pattern.
0x10	0x02	PREAMBLE_CONFIG_NSTD	0x00	Configuration of transmission/reception of a packet with a Non-Standard Preamble pattern.
0x10	0x03	PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_2	0x0f	Configuration of timeout periods during reception of a packet with Standard Preamble pattern.
0x10	0x04	PREAMBLE_CONFIG	0x21	General configuration bits for the Preamble field.
0x10	0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08	PREAMBLE_PATTERN	0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00	Configuration of the bit values describing a Non-Standard Preamble pattern.
0x10	0x09	PREAMBLE_POSTAMBLE_CONFIG	0x00	Configuration of Postamble functionality and the Postamble pattern bits.
0x10	0x0a 0x0b 0x0c 0x0d	PREAMBLE_POSTAMBLE_PATTERN	0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00	Defines the Postamble pattern.

SYNC (0x11)
Group	Number	Name	Default	Summary	Feature Available
0x11	0x00	SYNC_CONFIG	0x01	Sync Word configuration bits.
0x11	0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04	SYNC_BITS	0x2d 0xd4 0x2d 0xd4	Sync word.
0x11	0x05	SYNC_CONFIG2	0x00	Sync Word configuration bits.

PKT (0x12)
Group	Number	Name	Default	Summary	Feature Available
0x12	0x00	PKT_CRC_CONFIG	0x00	Select a CRC polynomial and seed.
0x12	0x01 0x02	PKT_WHT_POLY	0x01 0x08	16-bit polynomial value for the PN Generator (e.g., for Data Whitening)
0x12	0x03 0x04	PKT_WHT_SEED	0xff 0xff	16-bit seed value for the PN Generator (e.g., for Data Whitening)
0x12	0x05	PKT_WHT_BIT_NUM	0x00	Selects which bit of the LFSR (used to generate the PN / data whitening sequence) is used as the output bit for data scrambling.
0x12	0x06	PKT_CONFIG1	0x00	General configuration bits for transmission or reception of a packet.
0x12	0x07	PKT_CONFIG2	0x00	General packet configuration bits.
0x12	0x08	PKT_LEN	0x00	Configuration bits for reception of a variable length packet.
0x12	0x09	PKT_LEN_FIELD_SOURCE	0x00	Field number containing the received packet length byte(s).
0x12	0x0a	PKT_LEN_ADJUST	0x00	Provides for adjustment/offset of the received packet length value (in order to accommodate a variety of methods of defining total packet length).
0x12	0x0b	PKT_TX_THRESHOLD	0x30	TX FIFO almost empty threshold.
0x12	0x0c	PKT_RX_THRESHOLD	0x30	RX FIFO Almost Full threshold.
0x12	0x0d 0x0e	PKT_FIELD_1_LENGTH	0x00 0x00	Unsigned 13-bit Field 1 length value.
0x12	0x0f	PKT_FIELD_1_CONFIG	0x00	General data processing and packet configuration bits for Field 1.
0x12	0x10	PKT_FIELD_1_CRC_CONFIG	0x00	Configuration of CRC control bits across Field 1.
0x12	0x11 0x12	PKT_FIELD_2_LENGTH	0x00 0x00	Unsigned 13-bit Field 2 length value.
0x12	0x13	PKT_FIELD_2_CONFIG	0x00	General data processing and packet configuration bits for Field 2.
0x12	0x14	PKT_FIELD_2_CRC_CONFIG	0x00	Configuration of CRC control bits across Field 2.
0x12	0x15 0x16	PKT_FIELD_3_LENGTH	0x00 0x00	Unsigned 13-bit Field 3 length value.
0x12	0x17	PKT_FIELD_3_CONFIG	0x00	General data processing and packet configuration bits for Field 3.
0x12	0x18	PKT_FIELD_3_CRC_CONFIG	0x00	Configuration of CRC control bits across Field 3.
0x12	0x19 0x1a	PKT_FIELD_4_LENGTH	0x00 0x00	Unsigned 13-bit Field 4 length value.
0x12	0x1b	PKT_FIELD_4_CONFIG	0x00	General data processing and packet configuration bits for Field 4.
0x12	0x1c	PKT_FIELD_4_CRC_CONFIG	0x00	Configuration of CRC control bits across Field 4.
0x12	0x1d 0x1e	PKT_FIELD_5_LENGTH	0x00 0x00	Unsigned 13-bit Field 5 length value.
0x12	0x1f	PKT_FIELD_5_CONFIG	0x00	General data processing and packet configuration bits for Field 5.
0x12	0x20	PKT_FIELD_5_CRC_CONFIG	0x00	Configuration of CRC control bits across Field 5.
0x12	0x21 0x22	PKT_RX_FIELD_1_LENGTH	0x00 0x00	Unsigned 13-bit RX Field 1 length value.
0x12	0x23	PKT_RX_FIELD_1_CONFIG	0x00	General data processing and packet configuration bits for RX Field 1.
0x12	0x24	PKT_RX_FIELD_1_CRC_CONFIG	0x00	Configuration of CRC control bits across RX Field 1.
0x12	0x25 0x26	PKT_RX_FIELD_2_LENGTH	0x00 0x00	Unsigned 13-bit RX Field 2 length value.
0x12	0x27	PKT_RX_FIELD_2_CONFIG	0x00	General data processing and packet configuration bits for RX Field 2.
0x12	0x28	PKT_RX_FIELD_2_CRC_CONFIG	0x00	Configuration of CRC control bits across RX Field 2.
0x12	0x29 0x2a	PKT_RX_FIELD_3_LENGTH	0x00 0x00	Unsigned 13-bit RX Field 3 length value.
0x12	0x2b	PKT_RX_FIELD_3_CONFIG	0x00	General data processing and packet configuration bits for RX Field 3.
0x12	0x2c	PKT_RX_FIELD_3_CRC_CONFIG	0x00	Configuration of CRC control bits across RX Field 3.
0x12	0x2d 0x2e	PKT_RX_FIELD_4_LENGTH	0x00 0x00	Unsigned 13-bit RX Field 4 length value.
0x12	0x2f	PKT_RX_FIELD_4_CONFIG	0x00	General data processing and packet configuration bits for RX Field 4.
0x12	0x30	PKT_RX_FIELD_4_CRC_CONFIG	0x00	Configuration of CRC control bits across RX Field 4.
0x12	0x31 0x32	PKT_RX_FIELD_5_LENGTH	0x00 0x00	Unsigned 13-bit RX Field 5 length value.
0x12	0x33	PKT_RX_FIELD_5_CONFIG	0x00	General data processing and packet configuration bits for RX Field 5.
0x12	0x34	PKT_RX_FIELD_5_CRC_CONFIG	0x00	Configuration of CRC control bits across RX Field 5.
0x12	0x36 0x37 0x38 0x39	PKT_CRC_SEED	0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00	32-bit seed value for the 32-bit CRC engine

MODEM (0x20)
Group	Number	Name	Default	Summary	Feature Available
0x20	0x00	MODEM_MOD_TYPE	0x02	Selects the type of modulation. In TX mode, additionally selects the source of the modulation.
0x20	0x01	MODEM_MAP_CONTROL	0x80	Controls polarity and mapping of transmit and receive bits.
0x20	0x02	MODEM_DSM_CTRL	0x07	Miscellaneous control bits for the Delta-Sigma Modulator (DSM) in the PLL Synthesizer.
0x20	0x03 0x04 0x05	MODEM_DATA_RATE	0x0f 0x42 0x40	Unsigned 24-bit value used to determine the TX data rate
0x20	0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09	MODEM_TX_NCO_MODE	0x01 0xc9 0xc3 0x80	TX Gaussian filter oversampling ratio and Byte 3 of unsigned 26-bit TX Numerically Controlled Oscillator (NCO) modulus.
0x20	0x0a 0x0b 0x0c	MODEM_FREQ_DEV	0x00 0x06 0xd3	17-bit unsigned TX frequency deviation word.
0x20	0x0d 0x0e	MODEM_FREQ_OFFSET	0x00 0x00	Frequency offset adjustment (a 16-bit signed number).
0x20	0x0f	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_8	0x67	The 8th coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
0x20	0x10	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_7	0x60	The 7th coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
0x20	0x11	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_6	0x4d	The 6th coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
0x20	0x12	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_5	0x36	The 5th coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
0x20	0x13	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_4	0x21	The 4th coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
0x20	0x14	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_3	0x11	The 3rd coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
0x20	0x15	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_2	0x08	The 2nd coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
0x20	0x16	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_1	0x03	The 1st coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
0x20	0x17	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_0	0x01	The 0th coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
0x20	0x18	MODEM_TX_RAMP_DELAY	0x01	TX ramp-down delay setting.
0x20	0x19	MODEM_MDM_CTRL	0x00	MDM control.
0x20	0x1a	MODEM_IF_CONTROL	0x08	Selects Fixed-IF, Scaled-IF, or Zero-IF mode of RX Modem operation.
0x20	0x1b 0x1c 0x1d	MODEM_IF_FREQ	0x03 0xc0 0x00	the IF frequency setting (an 18-bit signed number).
0x20	0x1e	MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG1	0x10	Specifies three decimator ratios for the Cascaded Integrator Comb (CIC) filter.
0x20	0x1f	MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG0	0x20	Specifies miscellaneous parameters and decimator ratios for the Cascaded Integrator Comb (CIC) filter.
0x20	0x20	MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG2	0x00	Specifies miscellaneous decimator filter selections.
0x20	0x21	MODEM_IFPKD_THRESHOLDS	0xe8
0x20	0x22 0x23	MODEM_BCR_OSR	0x00 0x4b	RX BCR/Slicer oversampling rate (12-bit unsigned number).
0x20	0x24 0x25 0x26	MODEM_BCR_NCO_OFFSET	0x06 0xd3 0xa0	RX BCR NCO offset value (an unsigned 22-bit number).
0x20	0x27 0x28	MODEM_BCR_GAIN	0x06 0xd3	The unsigned 11-bit RX BCR loop gain value.
0x20	0x29	MODEM_BCR_GEAR	0x02	RX BCR loop gear control.
0x20	0x2a	MODEM_BCR_MISC1	0xc0	Miscellaneous control bits for the RX BCR loop.
0x20	0x2b	MODEM_BCR_MISC0	0x00	Miscellaneous RX BCR loop controls.
0x20	0x2c	MODEM_AFC_GEAR	0x00	RX AFC loop gear control.
0x20	0x2d	MODEM_AFC_WAIT	0x23	RX AFC loop wait time control.
0x20	0x2e 0x2f	MODEM_AFC_GAIN	0x83 0x69	Sets the gain of the PLL-based AFC acquisition loop, and provides miscellaneous control bits for AFC functionality.
0x20	0x30 0x31	MODEM_AFC_LIMITER	0x00 0x40	Set the AFC limiter value.
0x20	0x32	MODEM_AFC_MISC	0xa0	Specifies miscellaneous AFC control bits.
0x20	0x33	MODEM_AFC_ZIFOFF	0x00	AFC fixed frequency offset in zero IF mode.
0x20	0x34	MODEM_ADC_CTRL	0x00	Sigma Delta ADC controls.
0x20	0x35	MODEM_AGC_CONTROL	0xe0	Miscellaneous control bits for the Automatic Gain Control (AGC) function in the RX Chain.
0x20	0x38	MODEM_AGC_WINDOW_SIZE	0x11	Specifies the size of the measurement and settling windows for the AGC algorithm.
0x20	0x39	MODEM_AGC_RFPD_DECAY	0x10	Sets the decay time of the RF peak detectors.
0x20	0x3a	MODEM_AGC_IFPD_DECAY	0x10	Sets the decay time of the IF peak detectors.
0x20	0x3b	MODEM_FSK4_GAIN1	0x0b	Specifies the gain factor of the secondary branch in 4(G)FSK ISI-suppression.
0x20	0x3c	MODEM_FSK4_GAIN0	0x1c	Specifies the gain factor of the primary branch in 4(G)FSK ISI-suppression.
0x20	0x3d 0x3e	MODEM_FSK4_TH	0x40 0x00	16 bit 4(G)FSK slicer threshold.
0x20	0x3f	MODEM_FSK4_MAP	0x00	4(G)FSK symbol mapping code.
0x20	0x40	MODEM_OOK_PDTC	0x2b	Configures the attack and decay times of the OOK Peak Detector.
0x20	0x41	MODEM_OOK_BLOPK	0x0c	Configures the slicing reference level of the OOK Peak Detector.
0x20	0x42	MODEM_OOK_CNT1	0xa4	OOK control.
0x20	0x43	MODEM_OOK_MISC	0x03	Selects the detector(s) used for demodulation of an OOK signal, or for demodulation of a (G)FSK signal when using the asynchronous demodulator.
0x20	0x45	MODEM_RAW_CONTROL	0x02	Defines gain and enable controls for raw / nonstandard mode.
0x20	0x46 0x47	MODEM_RAW_EYE	0x00 0xa3	11 bit eye-open detector threshold.
0x20	0x48	MODEM_ANT_DIV_MODE	0x02	Antenna diversity mode settings.
0x20	0x49	MODEM_ANT_DIV_CONTROL	0x80	Specifies controls for the Antenna Diversity algorithm.
0x20	0x4a	MODEM_RSSI_THRESH	0xff	Configures the RSSI threshold.
0x20	0x4b	MODEM_RSSI_JUMP_THRESH	0x0c	Configures the RSSI Jump Detection threshold.
0x20	0x4c	MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL	0x01	Control of the averaging modes and latching time for reporting RSSI value(s).
0x20	0x4d	MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL2	0x00	RSSI Jump Detection control.
0x20	0x4e	MODEM_RSSI_COMP	0x40	RSSI compensation value.
0x20	0x50	MODEM_RAW_SEARCH2	0x00	Defines and controls the search period length for the Moving Average and Min-Max detectors.
0x20	0x51	MODEM_CLKGEN_BAND	0x08	Select PLL Synthesizer output divider ratio as a function of frequency band.
0x20	0x54	MODEM_SPIKE_DET	0x00	Configures the threshold for (G)FSK Spike Detection.
0x20	0x55	MODEM_ONE_SHOT_AFC	0x00	Configures parameters for th e One Shot AFC function and for BCR timing/acquisition.
0x20	0x56	MODEM_RSSI_HYSTERESIS	0xff	Configures the amount of hysteresis on the RSSI threshold detection function.
0x20	0x57	MODEM_RSSI_MUTE	0x00	Configures muting of the RSSI to avoid false RSSI interrupts.
0x20	0x58	MODEM_FAST_RSSI_DELAY	0x00	Configures the delay for fast RSSI Latching mode.
0x20	0x59 0x5a	MODEM_PSM	0x00 0x00	Configures the Preamble Sense Mode feature
0x20	0x5b	MODEM_DSA_CTRL1	0x00	Configures parameters for the Signal Arrival Detection circuit block and algorithm.
0x20	0x5c	MODEM_DSA_CTRL2	0x00	Configures parameters for the Signal Arrival Detection circuit block and algorithm.
0x20	0x5d	MODEM_DSA_QUAL	0x00	Configures parameters for the Eye Opening qualification m ethod of the Signal Arrival Detection algorithm.
0x20	0x5e	MODEM_DSA_RSSI	0x00	Signal Arrival Detect RSSI Qualifier Config
0x20	0x5f	MODEM_DSA_MISC	0x00	Miscellaneous detection of signal arrival bits.

MODEM_CHFLT (0x21)
Group	Number	Name	Default	Summary	Feature Available
0x21	0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0a 0x0b 0x0c 0x0d 0x0e 0x0f 0x10 0x11	MODEM_CHFLT_RX1_CHFLT_COE	0xff 0xba 0x0f 0x51 0xcf 0xa9 0xc9 0xfc 0x1b 0x1e 0x0f 0x01 0xfc 0xfd 0x15 0xff 0x00 0x0f	Filter coefficients for the first set of RX filter coefficients.
0x21	0x12 0x13 0x14 0x15 0x16 0x17 0x18 0x19 0x1a 0x1b 0x1c 0x1d 0x1e 0x1f 0x20 0x21 0x22 0x23	MODEM_CHFLT_RX2_CHFLT_COE	0xff 0xc4 0x30 0x7f 0xf5 0xb5 0xb8 0xde 0x05 0x17 0x16 0x0c 0x03 0x00 0x15 0xff 0x00 0x00	Filter coefficients for the second set of RX filter coefficients.

PA (0x22)
Group	Number	Name	Default	Summary	Feature Available
0x22	0x00	PA_MODE	0x08	Selects the PA operating mode, and selects resolution of PA power adjustment (i.e., step size).
0x22	0x01	PA_PWR_LVL	0x7f	Configuration of PA output power level.
0x22	0x02	PA_BIAS_CLKDUTY	0x00	Configuration of the PA Bias and duty cycle of the TX clock source.
0x22	0x03	PA_TC	0x5d	Configuration of PA ramping parameters.
0x22	0x04	PA_RAMP_EX	0x80	Select the time constant of the external PA ramp signal.
0x22	0x05	PA_RAMP_DOWN_DELAY	0x23	Delay from the start of the PA ramp down to disabling of the PA output.
0x22	0x06	PA_DIG_PWR_SEQ_CONFIG	0x03	Configuration for digital power sequencing.

SYNTH (0x23)
Group	Number	Name	Default	Summary	Feature Available
0x23	0x00	SYNTH_PFDCP_CPFF	0x2c	Feed forward charge pump current selection.
0x23	0x01	SYNTH_PFDCP_CPINT	0x0e	Integration charge pump current selection.
0x23	0x02	SYNTH_VCO_KV	0x0b	Gain scaling factors (Kv) for the VCO tuning varactors on both the integrated-path and feed forward path.
0x23	0x03	SYNTH_LPFILT3	0x04	Value of resistor R2 in feed-forward path of loop filter.
0x23	0x04	SYNTH_LPFILT2	0x0c	Value of capacitor C2 in feed-forward path of loop filter.
0x23	0x05	SYNTH_LPFILT1	0x73	Value of capacitors C1 and C3 in feed-forward path of loop filter.
0x23	0x06	SYNTH_LPFILT0	0x03	Bias current of the active amplifier in the feed-forward loop filter.
0x23	0x07	SYNTH_VCO_KVCAL	0x05	Scaling entire KV of VCO.

MATCH (0x30)
Group	Number	Name	Default	Summary	Feature Available
0x30	0x00	MATCH_VALUE_1	0x00	Match value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 1 value with the received Match 1 byte.
0x30	0x01	MATCH_MASK_1	0x00	Mask value to be logically AND-ed (bit-wise) with the Match 1 byte.
0x30	0x02	MATCH_CTRL_1	0x00	Enable for Packet Match functionality, and configuration of Match Byte 1.
0x30	0x03	MATCH_VALUE_2	0x00	Match value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 2 value with the received Match 2 byte.
0x30	0x04	MATCH_MASK_2	0x00	Mask value to be logically AND-ed (bit-wise) with the Match 2 byte.
0x30	0x05	MATCH_CTRL_2	0x00	Configuration of Match Byte 2.
0x30	0x06	MATCH_VALUE_3	0x00	Match value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 3 value with the received Match 3 byte.
0x30	0x07	MATCH_MASK_3	0x00	Mask value to be logically AND-ed (bit-wise) with the Match 3 byte.
0x30	0x08	MATCH_CTRL_3	0x00	Configuration of Match Byte 3.
0x30	0x09	MATCH_VALUE_4	0x00	Match value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 4 value with the received Match 4 byte.
0x30	0x0a	MATCH_MASK_4	0x00	Mask value to be logically AND-ed (bit-wise) with the Match 4 byte.
0x30	0x0b	MATCH_CTRL_4	0x00	Configuration of Match Byte 4.

FREQ_CONTROL (0x40)
Group	Number	Name	Default	Summary	Feature Available
0x40	0x00	FREQ_CONTROL_INTE	0x3c	Frac-N PLL Synthesizer integer divide number.
0x40	0x01 0x02 0x03	FREQ_CONTROL_FRAC	0x08 0x00 0x00	Frac-N PLL fraction number.
0x40	0x04 0x05	FREQ_CONTROL_CHANNEL_STEP_SIZE	0x00 0x00	EZ Frequency Programming channel step size.
0x40	0x06	FREQ_CONTROL_W_SIZE	0x20	Set window gating period (in number of crystal reference clock cycles) for counting VCO frequency during calibration.
0x40	0x07	FREQ_CONTROL_VCOCNT_RX_ADJ	0xff	Adjust target count for VCO calibration in RX mode.

RX_HOP (0x50)
Group	Number	Name	Default	Summary	Feature Available
0x50	0x00	RX_HOP_CONTROL	0x04	Configuration options for the automatic RX Hop functionality.
0x50	0x01	RX_HOP_TABLE_SIZE	0x01	Specifies the number of entries (channels) in the RX Hop table.
0x50	0x02	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[0]	0x00	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x03	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[1]	0x01	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x04	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[2]	0x02	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x05	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[3]	0x03	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x06	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[4]	0x04	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x07	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[5]	0x05	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x08	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[6]	0x06	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x09	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[7]	0x07	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x0a	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[8]	0x08	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x0b	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[9]	0x09	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x0c	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[10]	0x0a	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x0d	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[11]	0x0b	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x0e	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[12]	0x0c	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x0f	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[13]	0x0d	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x10	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[14]	0x0e	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x11	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[15]	0x0f	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x12	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[16]	0x10	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x13	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[17]	0x11	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x14	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[18]	0x12	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x15	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[19]	0x13	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x16	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[20]	0x14	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x17	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[21]	0x15	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x18	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[22]	0x16	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x19	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[23]	0x17	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x1a	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[24]	0x18	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x1b	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[25]	0x19	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x1c	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[26]	0x1a	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x1d	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[27]	0x1b	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x1e	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[28]	0x1c	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x1f	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[29]	0x1d	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x20	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[30]	0x1e	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x21	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[31]	0x1f	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x22	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[32]	0x20	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x23	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[33]	0x21	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x24	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[34]	0x22	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x25	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[35]	0x23	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x26	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[36]	0x24	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x27	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[37]	0x25	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x28	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[38]	0x26	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x29	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[39]	0x27	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x2a	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[40]	0x28	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x2b	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[41]	0x29	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x2c	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[42]	0x2a	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x2d	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[43]	0x2b	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x2e	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[44]	0x2c	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x2f	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[45]	0x2d	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x30	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[46]	0x2e	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x31	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[47]	0x2f	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x32	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[48]	0x30	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x33	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[49]	0x31	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x34	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[50]	0x32	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x35	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[51]	0x33	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x36	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[52]	0x34	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x37	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[53]	0x35	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x38	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[54]	0x36	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x39	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[55]	0x37	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x3a	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[56]	0x38	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x3b	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[57]	0x39	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x3c	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[58]	0x3a	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x3d	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[59]	0x3b	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x3e	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[60]	0x3c	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x3f	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[61]	0x3d	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
0x50	0x40	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[62]	0x3e	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
...	...	...	...	...	...
0x50	0x41	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[63]	0x3f	Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)

PTI (0xf0)
Group	Number	Name	Default	Summary	Feature Available
0xf0	0x00	PTI_CTL	0x80	Packet Trace Interface control fields.
0xf0	0x01 0x02	PTI_BAUD	0x13 0x88	Desired baud rate for the PTI interface.
0xf0	0x03	PTI_LOG_EN	0x00	Enables what the PTI logs.

Command Details

BOOT_COMMANDS

POWER_UP

Number: 0x02
Summary: Command to power-up the device and select the operational mode and functionality.
Purpose:
- This command MUST be issued to complete the power-up sequence for the device. The POWER_UP command is issued after the POR sequence has completed AND CTS is high. CTS can be polled using READ_CMD_BUFF.
- In the event that a patch is downloaded to the chip, the patch must be downloaded before the POWER_UP command is issued.
- Power-up is complete when the CTS is high. This command may take longer to complete than other commands, as the chip also performs several internal calibrations.
- These calibrations include calibration of the boot clock oscillator and the 32kHz R-C oscillator against the crystal oscillator; it is therefore necessary to specify the frequency of the crystal oscillator through the XO_FREQ parameter.

Argument Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CMD	0x02
0x01	BOOT_OPTIONS	PATCH	0	FUNC
0x02	XTAL_OPTIONS	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	TCXO
0x03	XO_FREQ	XO_FREQ[31:24]
0x04		XO_FREQ[23:16]
0x05		XO_FREQ[15:8]
0x06		XO_FREQ[7:0]

Reply Stream:

POWER_UP Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CTS CTS

Argument Fields:

BOOT_OPTIONS

PATCH

Description:

Select patch mode or normal boot mode.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
NO_PATCH	0	Power up into functional mode specified by FUNC parameter.
PATCH	1	Indicates a patch has been applied. Validate patch matches the function selected (indicated by the FUNC parameter) and boot the device.

FUNC[5:0]

Description:

Selects the functionality of the device by specifying the firmware image to be loaded upon boot-up.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
PRO	1	Power the chip up into EZRadio PRO functional mode.

XTAL_OPTIONS

TCXO

Description:

Selects if the reference oscillator signal is derived from an external TCXO (connected to the XIN pin), or from the internal crystal oscillator in conjunction with a crystal blank (connected across the XIN/XOUT pins).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
XTAL	0	Reference signal is derived from the internal crystal oscillator.
TCXO	1	Reference signal is derived from an external TCXO.

XO_FREQ

XO_FREQ[31:0]

Description:

Specifies the frequency of the internal crystal oscillator or external TCXO in Hz. The nominal value is 30000000 (30 MHz) = 0x01C9C380.
This parameter is used during calibration of the Boot Clock Oscillator and 32kHz R-C Oscillator, but is NOT used for calibration or tuning of the PLL Synthesizer.

Type:

U32

Min:

0x17d7840

Max:

0x1e84800

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

COMMON_COMMANDS

NOP

Number: 0x00
Summary: No Operation command.
Purpose:
- This command may be used to ensure that communication with the device has been established. Upon receipt of this command, the chip performs no action except to return CTS.
Argument Stream:

NOP Argument Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CMD 0x00

Reply Stream:

NOP Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CTS CTS

Argument Fields:

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

PART_INFO

Number: 0x01
Summary: Reports basic information about the device.
Purpose:
- Returns Part Number, Part Version, ROM ID, etc.
Argument Stream:

PART_INFO Argument Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CMD 0x01

Reply Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CTS	CTS
0x01	CHIPREV	CHIPREV
0x02	PART	PART[15:8]
0x03	PART	PART[7:0]
0x04	PBUILD	PBUILD
0x05	ID	ID[15:8]
0x06	ID	ID[7:0]
0x07	CUSTOMER	CUSTOMER
0x08	ROMID	ROMID

Argument Fields:

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

CHIPREV

CHIPREV[7:0]

Description:

Chip Mask Revision.

Type:

U8

PART

PART[15:0]

Description:

Part Number (e.g., si4461 will return - 0x4461).

Type:

U16

PBUILD

PBUILD[7:0]

Description:

Part Build.

Type:

U8

ID

ID[15:0]

Description:

Id.

Type:

U16

CUSTOMER

CUSTOMER[7:0]

Description:

Customer ID.

Type:

U8

ROMID

ROMID[7:0]

Description:

ROM Id.

Type:

U8

FUNC_INFO

Number: 0x10
Summary: Returns the Function revision information of the device.
Purpose:
- Return Function revision numbers for currently loaded functional mode. Contrast with PART_INFO.
Argument Stream:

FUNC_INFO Argument Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CMD 0x10

Reply Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CTS	CTS
0x01	REVEXT	REVEXT
0x02	REVBRANCH	REVBRANCH
0x03	REVINT	REVINT
0x04	PATCH	PATCH[15:8]
0x05	PATCH	PATCH[7:0]
0x06	FUNC	FUNC

Argument Fields:

Reply Fields:
CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

REVEXT

REVEXT[7:0]

Description:

External revision number.

Type:

U8

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

REVBRANCH

REVBRANCH[7:0]

Description:

Branch revision number.

Type:

U8

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

REVINT

REVINT[7:0]

Description:

Internal revision number.

Type:

U8

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff
PATCH
PATCH[15:0]

Description:

ID of applied patch. This is also the last 2 bytes in the associated patch file (*.csg).

0x0000 = No patch applied.

Type:

U16
FUNC

FUNC[7:0]

Description:

Current functional mode.

Type:

U8

SET_PROPERTY

Number: 0x11
Summary: Sets the value of one or more properties.
Purpose:
- This command sets the value of one or more properties. Properties are similar to parameters passed to an API command, but are not expected to change frequently. They are typically used to configure the operation of various internal circuit blocks.
- Properties may be controlled by higher layers of the user's software. Setting some properties may not cause the device to take immediate action; however, the property will take effect once a command which uses that property is issued.
- Properties that affect similar circuit blocks or functions (e.g., MODEM or PA or SYNTH properties) are grouped together and share the same GROUP parameter value. Each property within that GROUP has a different offset number or index.
- A single property may be configured by setting the NUM_PROPS parameter = 0x01, setting the START_PROP parameter to the offset number of that particular property, followed by a single data byte representing the desired value of the property.
- Multiple contiguous properties may be configured by setting the NUM_PROPS parameter equal to the number of desired properties, setting the START_PROP parameter to the offset number of the first property within that contiguous block of properties, followed by a string of data bytes representing the desired values of the properties.
- The maximum number of properties that may be set with a single SET_PROPERTY command is 12.

Argument Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CMD	0x11
0x01	GROUP	GROUP
0x02	NUM_PROPS	NUM_PROPS
0x03	START_PROP	START_PROP
0x04	DATA[0]	DATA
...	...	...
0x0f	DATA[11]	DATA

Reply Stream:

SET_PROPERTY Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CTS CTS

Argument Fields:

GROUP

GROUP[7:0]

Description:

Selects the property group to be configured.

Type:

U8

NUM_PROPS

NUM_PROPS[7:0]

Description:

Selects the number of contiguous properties to be written, starting at START_PROP.

Type:

U8

Min:

0x1

Max:

0xc

START_PROP

START_PROP[7:0]

Description:

Selects the offset number or index of the property within the specified group. The available properties are determined by the part number and the POWER_UP:FUNC selection.

Type:

U8

DATA[0...11]

DATA[7:0]

Description:

Value to be written to the property located at START_PROP + N. this parameter is not relevant if NUM_PROPS < N + 1. (where N is the Data index)

Type:

U8

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

GET_PROPERTY

Number: 0x12
Summary: Retrieves the value of one or more properties
Purpose:
- This command retrieves the value of one or more properties. Properties are similar to parameters passed to an API command, but are not expected to change frequently. They are typically used to configure the operation of various internal circuit blocks. The returned value represents the default property value upon POWER_UP or the value set previously with a SET_PROPERTY command.
- Properties that affect similar circuit blocks or functions (e.g., MODEM or PA or SYNTH properties) are grouped together and share the same GROUP parameter value. Each property within that GROUP has a different offset number or index.
- A single property may be retrieved by setting the NUM_PROPS parameter = 0x01 and setting the START_PROP parameter to the offset number of that particular property. The first data byte of the reply stream represents the value of that property.
- Multiple contiguous properties may be retrieved by setting the NUM_PROPS parameter equal to the number of desired properties and setting the START_PROP parameter to the offset number of the first property within that contiguous block of properties. The data bytes of the reply stream represent the values of the contiguous properties in sequential order of their offset number.
- The maximum number of properties that may be retrieved with a single GET_PROPERTY command is 16.
Argument Stream:

GET_PROPERTY Argument Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CMD 0x12

0x01 GROUP GROUP

0x02 NUM_PROPS NUM_PROPS

0x03 START_PROP START_PROP

Reply Stream:

GET_PROPERTY Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CTS CTS

0x01 DATA[0] DATA

... ... ...

0x10 DATA[15] DATA

Argument Fields:

GROUP

GROUP[7:0]

Description:

Selects the property group to be retrieved.

Type:

U8

NUM_PROPS

NUM_PROPS[7:0]

Description:

Selects the number of contiguous properties to be retrieved, starting at START_PROP.

Type:

U8

Min:

0x1

Max:

0x10

START_PROP

START_PROP[7:0]

Description:

Selects the offset number or index of the property within the specified group. the available properties are determined by the part number and the POWER_UP:FUNC selection

Type:

U8

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

DATA[0...15]

DATA[7:0]

Description:

Retrieved value of the properties located starting at START_PROP. Response bytes in this field are not relevant starting at DATA[NUM_PROPS] and contiuing to the end of the DATA response field.

Type:

U8

GPIO_PIN_CFG

Number: 0x13
Summary: Configures the GPIO pins.
Purpose:
- The chip provides General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) pins for handling a variety of signals. This command is used to select the desired signal for each GPIO pin from an enumerated list of available signals.
- The drive strength is selectable for those pins configured as outputs. The selected drive strength is applied simultaneously to all outputs; it is currently not possible to individually configure each GPIO pin for different drive strengths.
- Each pin provides a weak pull-up resistor (~1 Megohm) that may be individually enabled or disabled. It is recommended to disable the pull-up resistor when the pin is configured as an input and driven from an external source (other than an open-drain source).
- The pins referenced by this command share similar hardware characteristics (i.e., drive strength, pull-up resistors, input/output configurability) but may provide access to different sets of signals. Specifically, the NIRQ and SDO pins are not "signal equivalent" to the GPIO pins.

Argument Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CMD	0x13
0x01	GPIO[0]	0	PULL_CTL	GPIO_MODE
...	...	...	...	...
0x04	GPIO[3]	0	PULL_CTL	GPIO_MODE
0x05	NIRQ	0	PULL_CTL	NIRQ_MODE
0x06	SDO	0	PULL_CTL	SDO_MODE
0x07	GEN_CONFIG	0	DRV_STRENGTH		0	0	0	0	0

Reply Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CTS	CTS
0x01	GPIO[0]	GPIO_STATE	X	GPIO_MODE
...	...	...	...	...
0x04	GPIO[3]	GPIO_STATE	X	GPIO_MODE
0x05	NIRQ	NIRQ_STATE	X	NIRQ_MODE
0x06	SDO	SDO_STATE	X	SDO_MODE
0x07	GEN_CONFIG	X	DRV_STRENGTH		X	X	X	X	X

Argument Fields:

GPIO[0...3]

PULL_CTL

Description:

The pin pull-up control.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
PULL_DIS	0	Disable pull-up resistor (recommended setting if the pin is driven from an external source, other than an open-drain source).	revB1A
PULL_EN	1	Enable pull-up resistor.	revB1A

GPIO_MODE[5:0]

Description:

The pin mode.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DONOTHING	0	Behavior of this pin is not modified.	revB1A
TRISTATE	1	Input and output drivers disabled.	revB1A
DRIVE0	2	Pin is configured as a CMOS output and driven low.	revB1A
DRIVE1	3	Pin is configured as a CMOS output and driven high.	revB1A
INPUT	4	Pin is configured as a CMOS input. This is used for all GPIO functions that require the pin to be an input (e.g., TXDATA input for TX Direct Mode). However, configuration of this pin as an input does NOT additionally select which internal circuit receives that input; that functionality is controlled by other properties, as appropriate.	revB1A
32K_CLK	5	Outputs 32 kHz clock selected using GLOBAL_CLK_CFG:CLK_32K_SEL. Output low if the 32 kHz clock is not enabled.	revB1A
BOOT_CLK	6	Outputs the boot clock signal. This signal will only be present when the chip is in the SPI_ACTIVE state as that is the only state in which the boot clock is active.	revB1A
DIV_CLK	7	Outputs the divided clock signal (or the divided boot clock signal in SPI ACTIVE state). This output is low while the chip is in SLEEP state as the source (e.g., the Xtal Oscillator) for the divided clock signal is not running, and outputs the divided XtalOsc signal in all other states. The divider is configured using the GLOBAL_CLK_CFG:DIVIDED_CLK_SEL.	revB1A
CTS	8	Clear To Send signal. This output goes high when the command handler is able to receive a new command, and is low otherwise.	revB1A
INV_CTS	9	Inverted Clear To Send signal. This output goes low when clear to send a new command, and is high otherwise.	revB1A
CMD_OVERLAP	10	This output is low unless a command overlap occurs (i.e., another command is sent before the command handler completes processing a previous command). When command overlap occurs, this output goes high until the rising edge of CTS.	revB1A
SDO	11	Outputs the Serial Data Out (SDO) signal for the SPI bus.	revB1A
POR	12	This output goes low during Power-On Reset and goes high upon completion of POR.	revB1A
CAL_WUT	13	This output is normally low, and pulses high for one cycle of the 32 kHz clock upon expiration of the Calibration Timer. The 32 kHz clock must be enabled in order to use the Calibration Timer. The Calibration Timer period is configured using GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:WUT_CAL_PERIOD and enabled by GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:CAL_EN.	revB1A
WUT	14	This output is normally low, and pulses high for 2^(WUT_R+1) cycles of the 32 kHz clock upon expiration of the Wake-Up Timer (WUT). The 32 kHz clock must be enabled in order to use the WUT. The period of the WUT is configured using GLOBAL_WUT_M, and GLOBAL_WUT_R and enabled by GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:WUT_EN.	revB1A
EN_PA	15	This output goes high when the internal PA is enabled.	revB1A
TX_DATA_CLK	16	Outputs the TX Data Clock signal. This signal is a square wave at the selected TX data rate, and is intended for use in TX Direct Synchronous Mode (i.e., in conjunction with a pin configured for TX Data Input).	revB1A
RX_DATA_CLK	17	Outputs the RX Data CLK signal. This signal is nominally a square wave that is synchronized to the received data rate, and is typically used to latch the RX Data signal into the host MCU.	revB1A
EN_LNA	18	This output goes low when the internal LNA is enabled.	revB1A
TX_DATA	19	Outputs the TX data bits pulled from the TX FIFO and sent to the TX modulator. This is an output signal (primarily for diagnostic purposes) and is NOT used as an input for TX Direct Sync/Async mode.	revB1A
RX_DATA	20	Outputs the demodulated RX Data stream, after synchronization and re-timing by the local RX Data Clock.	revB1A
RX_RAW_DATA	21	Outputs the demodulated RX Raw Data stream, prior to synchronization and re-timing by the local RX Data Clock.	revB1A
ANTENNA_1_SW	22	Antenna-1 Switch signal used for control of an RF switch during Antenna Diversity operation. This signal normally assumes the complementary polarity of the Antenna-2 Switch signal (except during SLEEP state).	revB1A
ANTENNA_2_SW	23	Antenna-2 Switch signal used for control of an RF switch during Antenna Diversity operation. This signal normally assumes the complementary polarity of the Antenna-1 Switch signal (except during SLEEP state).	revB1A
VALID_PREAMBLE	24	This output goes high when a valid preamble is detected, and returns low after the packet is received or Sync Word timeout occurs.	revB1A
INVALID_PREAMBLE	25	Output low normally, pulses output high when the preamble is not detected within a period time (determined by PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_2:RX_PREAMBLE_TIMEOUT) after the demodulator is enabled.	revB1A
SYNC_WORD_DETECT	26	This output goes high when a Sync Word is detected, and returns low after the packet is received.	revB1A
CCA	27	Clear Channel Assessment. This output goes high when the Current RSSI signal exceeds the threshold value set by the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH property, and is low when the Current RSSI is below threshold. This is a real-time (non-latched) signal.	revB1A
IN_SLEEP	28	This output goes high when the chip is NOT in SLEEP state, and goes low when in SLEEP state.	revB1A
PKT_TRACE	29	Outputs packet trace data when not in sleep state. Output low when in sleep state.
TX_RX_DATA_CLK	31	Outputs TX or RX data CLK to be used in conjunction with TX or RX Data pin depending on the current power state.
TX_STATE	32	This output is set high while in TX state and is low otherwise. The TX_STATE and RX_STATE signals are typically used for control of peripheral circuits (e.g., a T/R Switch).	revB1A
RX_STATE	33	This output is set high while in RX state and is low otherwise. The TX_STATE and RX_STATE signals are typically used for control of peripheral circuits (e.g., a T/R Switch).	revB1A
RX_FIFO_FULL	34	This output is high while the number of bytes stored in the RX FIFO exceeds the threshold value set by the PKT_RX_THRESHOLD property, and is low otherwise.	revB1A
TX_FIFO_EMPTY	35	This output is high while the number of bytes of empty space in the TX FIFO exceeds the threshold value set by the PKT_TX_THRESHOLD property, and is low otherwise.	revB1A
LOW_BATT	36	This output is high while the battery voltage drops below the threshold value set by the GLOBAL_LOW_BATT_THRESH property, and is low otherwise.
CCA_LATCH	37	This output goes high if the Current RSSI signal exceeds the threshold value set by the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH property and remains high (i.e., is latched) even if the Current RSSI signal subsequently drops below the threshold value. The signal returns low upon detection of the Sync Word or upon exiting RX state.	revB1A
HOPPED	38	This output toggles (i.e., switches from low to high, or high to low) whenever an automatic hop within the RX Hop Table occurs. This signal is not affected by a manual hop initiated through the RX_HOP command.
HOP_TABLE_WRAP	39	This output toggles (i.e., switches from low to high, or high to low) whenever the automatic hop table wraps. This signal is not affected by a manual hop initiated through the RX_HOP command.

NIRQ

PULL_CTL

Description:

The pin pull-up control.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
PULL_DIS	0	Disable pull-up resistor (recommended setting if the pin is driven from an external source, other than an open-drain source).	revB1A
PULL_EN	1	Enable pull-up resistor.	revB1A

NIRQ_MODE[5:0]

Description:

The pin mode.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DONOTHING	0	Behavior of this pin is not modified.	revB1A
TRISTATE	1	Input and output drivers disabled.	revB1A
DRIVE0	2	Pin is configured as a CMOS output and driven low.	revB1A
DRIVE1	3	Pin is configured as a CMOS output and driven high.	revB1A
INPUT	4	Pin is configured as a CMOS input. This is used for all GPIO functions that require the pin to be an input (e.g., TXDATA input for TX Direct Mode). However, configuration of this pin as an input does NOT additionally select which internal circuit receives that input; that functionality is controlled by other properties, as appropriate.	revB1A
DIV_CLK	7	Outputs the divided clock signal (or the divided boot clock signal in SPI ACTIVE state). This output is low while the chip is in SLEEP state as the source (e.g., the Xtal Oscillator) for the divided clock signal is not running, and outputs the divided XtalOsc signal in all other states. The divider is configured using the GLOBAL_CLK_CFG:DIVIDED_CLK_SEL.	revB1A
CTS	8	Clear To Send signal. This output goes high when the command handler is able to receive a new command, and is low otherwise.	revB1A
SDO	11	Outputs the Serial Data Out (SDO) signal for the SPI bus.	revB1A
POR	12	This output goes low during Power-On Reset and goes high upon completion of POR.	revB1A
EN_PA	15	This output goes high when the internal PA is enabled.	revB1A
TX_DATA_CLK	16	Outputs the TX Data Clock signal. This signal is a square wave at the selected TX data rate, and is intended for use in TX Direct Synchronous Mode (i.e., in conjunction with a pin configured for TX Data Input).	revB1A
RX_DATA_CLK	17	Outputs the RX Data CLK signal. This signal is nominally a square wave that is synchronized to the received data rate, and is typically used to latch the RX Data signal into the host MCU.	revB1A
EN_LNA	18	This output goes low when the internal LNA is enabled.	revB1A
TX_DATA	19	Outputs the TX data bits pulled from the TX FIFO and sent to the TX modulator. This is an output signal (primarily for diagnostic purposes) and is NOT used as an input for TX Direct Sync/Async mode.	revB1A
RX_DATA	20	Outputs the demodulated RX Data stream, after synchronization and re-timing by the local RX Data Clock.	revB1A
RX_RAW_DATA	21	Outputs the demodulated RX Raw Data stream, prior to synchronization and re-timing by the local RX Data Clock.	revB1A
ANTENNA_1_SW	22	Antenna-1 Switch signal used for control of an RF switch during Antenna Diversity operation. This signal normally assumes the complementary polarity of the Antenna-2 Switch signal (except during SLEEP state).	revB1A
ANTENNA_2_SW	23	Antenna-2 Switch signal used for control of an RF switch during Antenna Diversity operation. This signal normally assumes the complementary polarity of the Antenna-1 Switch signal (except during SLEEP state).	revB1A
VALID_PREAMBLE	24	This output goes high when a valid preamble is detected, and returns low after the packet is received or Sync Word timeout occurs.	revB1A
INVALID_PREAMBLE	25	Output low normally, pulses output high when the preamble is not detected within a period time (determined by PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_2:RX_PREAMBLE_TIMEOUT) after the demodulator is enabled.	revB1A
SYNC_WORD_DETECT	26	This output goes high when a Sync Word is detected, and returns low after the packet is received.	revB1A
CCA	27	Clear Channel Assessment. This output goes high when the Current RSSI signal exceeds the threshold value set by the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH property, and is low when the Current RSSI is below threshold. This is a real-time (non-latched) signal.	revB1A
PKT_TRACE	29	Outputs packet trace data when not in sleep state. Output low when in sleep state.
TX_RX_DATA_CLK	31	Outputs TX or RX data CLK to be used in conjunction with TX or RX Data pin depending on the current power state.
NIRQ	39	Active low interrupt signal.	revBlA

SDO

PULL_CTL

Description:

The pin pull-up control.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
PULL_DIS	0	Disable pull-up resistor (recommended setting if the pin is driven from an external source, other than an open-drain source).	revB1A
PULL_EN	1	Enable pull-up resistor.	revB1A

SDO_MODE[5:0]

Description:

The pin mode.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DONOTHING	0	Behavior of this pin is not modified.	revB1A
TRISTATE	1	Input and output drivers disabled.	revB1A
DRIVE0	2	Pin is configured as a CMOS output and driven low.	revB1A
DRIVE1	3	Pin is configured as a CMOS output and driven high.	revB1A
INPUT	4	Pin is configured as a CMOS input. This is used for all GPIO functions that require the pin to be an input (e.g., TXDATA input for TX Direct Mode). However, configuration of this pin as an input does NOT additionally select which internal circuit receives that input; that functionality is controlled by other properties, as appropriate.	revB1A
32K_CLK	5	Outputs 32 kHz clock selected using GLOBAL_CLK_CFG:CLK_32K_SEL. Output low if the 32 kHz clock is not enabled.	revB1A
DIV_CLK	7	Outputs the divided clock signal (or the divided boot clock signal in SPI ACTIVE state). This output is low while the chip is in SLEEP state as the source (e.g., the Xtal Oscillator) for the divided clock signal is not running, and outputs the divided XtalOsc signal in all other states. The divider is configured using the GLOBAL_CLK_CFG:DIVIDED_CLK_SEL.	revB1A
CTS	8	Clear To Send signal. This output goes high when the command handler is able to receive a new command, and is low otherwise.	revB1A
SDO	11	Outputs the Serial Data Out (SDO) signal for the SPI bus.	revB1A
POR	12	This output goes low during Power-On Reset and goes high upon completion of POR.	revB1A
WUT	14	This output is normally low, and pulses high for 2^(WUT_R+1) cycles of the 32 kHz clock upon expiration of the Wake-Up Timer (WUT). The 32 kHz clock must be enabled in order to use the WUT. The period of the WUT is configured using GLOBAL_WUT_M, and GLOBAL_WUT_R and enabled by GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:WUT_EN.	revB1A
EN_PA	15	This output goes high when the internal PA is enabled.	revB1A
TX_DATA_CLK	16	Outputs the TX Data Clock signal. This signal is a square wave at the selected TX data rate, and is intended for use in TX Direct Synchronous Mode (i.e., in conjunction with a pin configured for TX Data Input).	revB1A
RX_DATA_CLK	17	Outputs the RX Data CLK signal. This signal is nominally a square wave that is synchronized to the received data rate, and is typically used to latch the RX Data signal into the host MCU.	revB1A
EN_LNA	18	This output goes low when the internal LNA is enabled.	revB1A
TX_DATA	19	Outputs the TX data bits pulled from the TX FIFO and sent to the TX modulator. This is an output signal (primarily for diagnostic purposes) and is NOT used as an input for TX Direct Sync/Async mode.	revB1A
RX_DATA	20	Outputs the demodulated RX Data stream, after synchronization and re-timing by the local RX Data Clock.	revB1A
RX_RAW_DATA	21	Outputs the demodulated RX Raw Data stream, prior to synchronization and re-timing by the local RX Data Clock.	revB1A
ANTENNA_1_SW	22	Antenna-1 Switch signal used for control of an RF switch during Antenna Diversity operation. This signal normally assumes the complementary polarity of the Antenna-2 Switch signal (except during SLEEP state).	revB1A
ANTENNA_2_SW	23	Antenna-2 Switch signal used for control of an RF switch during Antenna Diversity operation. This signal normally assumes the complementary polarity of the Antenna-1 Switch signal (except during SLEEP state).	revB1A
VALID_PREAMBLE	24	This output goes high when a valid preamble is detected, and returns low after the packet is received or Sync Word timeout occurs.	revB1A
INVALID_PREAMBLE	25	Output low normally, pulses output high when the preamble is not detected within a period time (determined by PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_2:RX_PREAMBLE_TIMEOUT) after the demodulator is enabled.	revB1A
SYNC_WORD_DETECT	26	This output goes high when a Sync Word is detected, and returns low after the packet is received.	revB1A
CCA	27	Clear Channel Assessment. This output goes high when the Current RSSI signal exceeds the threshold value set by the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH property, and is low when the Current RSSI is below threshold. This is a real-time (non-latched) signal.	revB1A

GEN_CONFIG

DRV_STRENGTH[1:0]

Description:

Selects the level of drive strength for those GPIO/NIRQ/SDO pins configured as outputs.
The selected level of drive strength is applied simultaneously to all output pins, with the following exception: GPIO0 will exhibit a weaker drive strength than the other GPIO pins but only in the lowest drive strength setting; its drive strength is the same for all other settings.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
HIGH	0	GPIOs configured as outputs will have the highest drive strength.	revB1A
MED_HIGH	1	GPIOs configured as outputs will have a medium drive strength.	revB1A
MED_LOW	2	GPIOs configured as outputs will have a medium drive strength.	revB1A
LOW	3	GPIOs configured as outputs will have the lowest drive strength.	revB1A

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:: Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.
Type:: U8

GPIO[0...3]

GPIO_STATE

Description:

Reads back the logic level on the pin.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
INACTIVE	0	Pin was read back as a 0.	revB1A
ACTIVE	1	Pin was read back as a 1.	revB1A

GPIO_MODE[5:0]

Description:

Reads back the enumeration of the currently selected function for the pin.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DONOTHING	0	Behavior of this pin is not modified.	revB1A
TRISTATE	1	Input and output drivers disabled.	revB1A
DRIVE0	2	Pin is configured as a CMOS output and driven low.	revB1A
DRIVE1	3	Pin is configured as a CMOS output and driven high.	revB1A
INPUT	4	Pin is configured as a CMOS input. This is used for all GPIO functions that require the pin to be an input (e.g., TXDATA input for TX Direct Mode). However, configuration of this pin as an input does NOT additionally select which internal circuit receives that input; that functionality is controlled by other properties, as appropriate.	revB1A
32K_CLK	5	Outputs 32 kHz clock selected using GLOBAL_CLK_CFG:CLK_32K_SEL. Output low if the 32 kHz clock is not enabled.	revB1A
BOOT_CLK	6	Outputs the boot clock signal. This signal will only be present when the chip is in the SPI_ACTIVE state as that is the only state in which the boot clock is active.	revB1A
DIV_CLK	7	Outputs the divided clock signal (or the divided boot clock signal in SPI ACTIVE state). This output is low while the chip is in SLEEP state as the source (e.g., the Xtal Oscillator) for the divided clock signal is not running, and outputs the divided XtalOsc signal in all other states. The divider is configured using the GLOBAL_CLK_CFG:DIVIDED_CLK_SEL.	revB1A
CTS	8	Clear To Send signal. This output goes high when the command handler is able to receive a new command, and is low otherwise.	revB1A
INV_CTS	9	Inverted Clear To Send signal. This output goes low when clear to send a new command, and is high otherwise.	revB1A
CMD_OVERLAP	10	This output is low unless a command overlap occurs (i.e., another command is sent before the command handler completes processing a previous command). When command overlap occurs, this output goes high until the rising edge of CTS.	revB1A
SDO	11	Outputs the Serial Data Out (SDO) signal for the SPI bus.	revB1A
POR	12	This output goes low during Power-On Reset and goes high upon completion of POR.	revB1A
CAL_WUT	13	This output is normally low, and pulses high for one cycle of the 32 kHz clock upon expiration of the Calibration Timer. The 32 kHz clock must be enabled in order to use the Calibration Timer. The Calibration Timer period is configured using GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:WUT_CAL_PERIOD and enabled by GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:CAL_EN.	revB1A
WUT	14	This output is normally low, and pulses high for 2^(WUT_R+1) cycles of the 32 kHz clock upon expiration of the Wake-Up Timer (WUT). The 32 kHz clock must be enabled in order to use the WUT. The period of the WUT is configured using GLOBAL_WUT_M, and GLOBAL_WUT_R and enabled by GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:WUT_EN.	revB1A
EN_PA	15	This output goes high when the internal PA is enabled.	revB1A
TX_DATA_CLK	16	Outputs the TX Data Clock signal. This signal is a square wave at the selected TX data rate, and is intended for use in TX Direct Synchronous Mode (i.e., in conjunction with a pin configured for TX Data Input).	revB1A
RX_DATA_CLK	17	Outputs the RX Data CLK signal. This signal is nominally a square wave that is synchronized to the received data rate, and is typically used to latch the RX Data signal into the host MCU.	revB1A
EN_LNA	18	This output goes low when the internal LNA is enabled.	revB1A
TX_DATA	19	Outputs the TX data bits pulled from the TX FIFO and sent to the TX modulator. This is an output signal (primarily for diagnostic purposes) and is NOT used as an input for TX Direct Sync/Async mode.	revB1A
RX_DATA	20	Outputs the demodulated RX Data stream, after synchronization and re-timing by the local RX Data Clock.	revB1A
RX_RAW_DATA	21	Outputs the demodulated RX Raw Data stream, prior to synchronization and re-timing by the local RX Data Clock.	revB1A
ANTENNA_1_SW	22	Antenna-1 Switch signal used for control of an RF switch during Antenna Diversity operation. This signal normally assumes the complementary polarity of the Antenna-2 Switch signal (except during SLEEP state).	revB1A
ANTENNA_2_SW	23	Antenna-2 Switch signal used for control of an RF switch during Antenna Diversity operation. This signal normally assumes the complementary polarity of the Antenna-1 Switch signal (except during SLEEP state).	revB1A
VALID_PREAMBLE	24	This output goes high when a valid preamble is detected, and returns low after the packet is received or Sync Word timeout occurs.	revB1A
INVALID_PREAMBLE	25	Output low normally, pulses output high when the preamble is not detected within a period time (determined by PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_2:RX_PREAMBLE_TIMEOUT) after the demodulator is enabled.	revB1A
SYNC_WORD_DETECT	26	This output goes high when a Sync Word is detected, and returns low after the packet is received.	revB1A
CCA	27	Clear Channel Assessment. This output goes high when the Current RSSI signal exceeds the threshold value set by the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH property, and is low when the Current RSSI is below threshold. This is a real-time (non-latched) signal.	revB1A
IN_SLEEP	28	This output goes high when the chip is NOT in SLEEP state, and goes low when in SLEEP state.	revB1A
PKT_TRACE	29	Outputs packet trace data when not in sleep state. Output low when in sleep state.
TX_RX_DATA_CLK	31	Outputs TX or RX data CLK to be used in conjunction with TX or RX Data pin depending on the current power state.
TX_STATE	32	This output is set high while in TX state and is low otherwise. The TX_STATE and RX_STATE signals are typically used for control of peripheral circuits (e.g., a T/R Switch).	revB1A
RX_STATE	33	This output is set high while in RX state and is low otherwise. The TX_STATE and RX_STATE signals are typically used for control of peripheral circuits (e.g., a T/R Switch).	revB1A
RX_FIFO_FULL	34	This output is high while the number of bytes stored in the RX FIFO exceeds the threshold value set by the PKT_RX_THRESHOLD property, and is low otherwise.	revB1A
TX_FIFO_EMPTY	35	This output is high while the number of bytes of empty space in the TX FIFO exceeds the threshold value set by the PKT_TX_THRESHOLD property, and is low otherwise.	revB1A
LOW_BATT	36	This output is high while the battery voltage drops below the threshold value set by the GLOBAL_LOW_BATT_THRESH property, and is low otherwise.
CCA_LATCH	37	This output goes high if the Current RSSI signal exceeds the threshold value set by the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH property and remains high (i.e., is latched) even if the Current RSSI signal subsequently drops below the threshold value. The signal returns low upon detection of the Sync Word or upon exiting RX state.	revB1A
HOPPED	38	This output toggles (i.e., switches from low to high, or high to low) whenever an automatic hop within the RX Hop Table occurs. This signal is not affected by a manual hop initiated through the RX_HOP command.
HOP_TABLE_WRAP	39	This output toggles (i.e., switches from low to high, or high to low) whenever the automatic hop table wraps. This signal is not affected by a manual hop initiated through the RX_HOP command.

NIRQ

NIRQ_STATE

Description:

Reads back the logic level on the NIRQ pin.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
INACTIVE	0	Pin was read back as a 0.	revB1A
ACTIVE	1	Pin was read back as a 1.	revB1A

NIRQ_MODE[5:0]

Description:

Reads back the enumeration of the currently selected function for the NIRQ pin.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DONOTHING	0	Behavior of this pin is not modified.	revB1A
TRISTATE	1	Input and output drivers disabled.	revB1A
DRIVE0	2	Pin is configured as a CMOS output and driven low.	revB1A
DRIVE1	3	Pin is configured as a CMOS output and driven high.	revB1A
INPUT	4	Pin is configured as a CMOS input. This is used for all GPIO functions that require the pin to be an input (e.g., TXDATA input for TX Direct Mode). However, configuration of this pin as an input does NOT additionally select which internal circuit receives that input; that functionality is controlled by other properties, as appropriate.	revB1A
DIV_CLK	7	Outputs the divided clock signal (or the divided boot clock signal in SPI ACTIVE state). This output is low while the chip is in SLEEP state as the source (e.g., the Xtal Oscillator) for the divided clock signal is not running, and outputs the divided XtalOsc signal in all other states. The divider is configured using the GLOBAL_CLK_CFG:DIVIDED_CLK_SEL.	revB1A
CTS	8	Clear To Send signal. This output goes high when the command handler is able to receive a new command, and is low otherwise.	revB1A
SDO	11	Outputs the Serial Data Out (SDO) signal for the SPI bus.	revB1A
POR	12	This output goes low during Power-On Reset and goes high upon completion of POR.	revB1A
EN_PA	15	This output goes high when the internal PA is enabled.	revB1A
TX_DATA_CLK	16	Outputs the TX Data Clock signal. This signal is a square wave at the selected TX data rate, and is intended for use in TX Direct Synchronous Mode (i.e., in conjunction with a pin configured for TX Data Input).	revB1A
RX_DATA_CLK	17	Outputs the RX Data CLK signal. This signal is nominally a square wave that is synchronized to the received data rate, and is typically used to latch the RX Data signal into the host MCU.	revB1A
EN_LNA	18	This output goes low when the internal LNA is enabled.	revB1A
TX_DATA	19	Outputs the TX data bits pulled from the TX FIFO and sent to the TX modulator. This is an output signal (primarily for diagnostic purposes) and is NOT used as an input for TX Direct Sync/Async mode.	revB1A
RX_DATA	20	Outputs the demodulated RX Data stream, after synchronization and re-timing by the local RX Data Clock.	revB1A
RX_RAW_DATA	21	Outputs the demodulated RX Raw Data stream, prior to synchronization and re-timing by the local RX Data Clock.	revB1A
ANTENNA_1_SW	22	Antenna-1 Switch signal used for control of an RF switch during Antenna Diversity operation. This signal normally assumes the complementary polarity of the Antenna-2 Switch signal (except during SLEEP state).	revB1A
ANTENNA_2_SW	23	Antenna-2 Switch signal used for control of an RF switch during Antenna Diversity operation. This signal normally assumes the complementary polarity of the Antenna-1 Switch signal (except during SLEEP state).	revB1A
VALID_PREAMBLE	24	This output goes high when a valid preamble is detected, and returns low after the packet is received or Sync Word timeout occurs.	revB1A
INVALID_PREAMBLE	25	Output low normally, pulses output high when the preamble is not detected within a period time (determined by PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_2:RX_PREAMBLE_TIMEOUT) after the demodulator is enabled.	revB1A
SYNC_WORD_DETECT	26	This output goes high when a Sync Word is detected, and returns low after the packet is received.	revB1A
CCA	27	Clear Channel Assessment. This output goes high when the Current RSSI signal exceeds the threshold value set by the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH property, and is low when the Current RSSI is below threshold. This is a real-time (non-latched) signal.	revB1A
PKT_TRACE	29	Outputs packet trace data when not in sleep state. Output low when in sleep state.
TX_RX_DATA_CLK	31	Outputs TX or RX data CLK to be used in conjunction with TX or RX Data pin depending on the current power state.
NIRQ	39	Active low interrupt signal.	revBlA

SDO

SDO_STATE

Description:

Reads back the logic level on the SDO pin.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
INACTIVE	0	Pin was read back as a 0.	revB1A
ACTIVE	1	Pin was read back as a 1.	revB1A

SDO_MODE[5:0]

Description:

Reads back the enumeration of the currently selected function for the SDO pin.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DONOTHING	0	Behavior of this pin is not modified.	revB1A
TRISTATE	1	Input and output drivers disabled.	revB1A
DRIVE0	2	Pin is configured as a CMOS output and driven low.	revB1A
DRIVE1	3	Pin is configured as a CMOS output and driven high.	revB1A
INPUT	4	Pin is configured as a CMOS input. This is used for all GPIO functions that require the pin to be an input (e.g., TXDATA input for TX Direct Mode). However, configuration of this pin as an input does NOT additionally select which internal circuit receives that input; that functionality is controlled by other properties, as appropriate.	revB1A
32K_CLK	5	Outputs 32 kHz clock selected using GLOBAL_CLK_CFG:CLK_32K_SEL. Output low if the 32 kHz clock is not enabled.	revB1A
DIV_CLK	7	Outputs the divided clock signal (or the divided boot clock signal in SPI ACTIVE state). This output is low while the chip is in SLEEP state as the source (e.g., the Xtal Oscillator) for the divided clock signal is not running, and outputs the divided XtalOsc signal in all other states. The divider is configured using the GLOBAL_CLK_CFG:DIVIDED_CLK_SEL.	revB1A
CTS	8	Clear To Send signal. This output goes high when the command handler is able to receive a new command, and is low otherwise.	revB1A
SDO	11	Outputs the Serial Data Out (SDO) signal for the SPI bus.	revB1A
POR	12	This output goes low during Power-On Reset and goes high upon completion of POR.	revB1A
WUT	14	This output is normally low, and pulses high for 2^(WUT_R+1) cycles of the 32 kHz clock upon expiration of the Wake-Up Timer (WUT). The 32 kHz clock must be enabled in order to use the WUT. The period of the WUT is configured using GLOBAL_WUT_M, and GLOBAL_WUT_R and enabled by GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:WUT_EN.	revB1A
EN_PA	15	This output goes high when the internal PA is enabled.	revB1A
TX_DATA_CLK	16	Outputs the TX Data Clock signal. This signal is a square wave at the selected TX data rate, and is intended for use in TX Direct Synchronous Mode (i.e., in conjunction with a pin configured for TX Data Input).	revB1A
RX_DATA_CLK	17	Outputs the RX Data CLK signal. This signal is nominally a square wave that is synchronized to the received data rate, and is typically used to latch the RX Data signal into the host MCU.	revB1A
EN_LNA	18	This output goes low when the internal LNA is enabled.	revB1A
TX_DATA	19	Outputs the TX data bits pulled from the TX FIFO and sent to the TX modulator. This is an output signal (primarily for diagnostic purposes) and is NOT used as an input for TX Direct Sync/Async mode.	revB1A
RX_DATA	20	Outputs the demodulated RX Data stream, after synchronization and re-timing by the local RX Data Clock.	revB1A
RX_RAW_DATA	21	Outputs the demodulated RX Raw Data stream, prior to synchronization and re-timing by the local RX Data Clock.	revB1A
ANTENNA_1_SW	22	Antenna-1 Switch signal used for control of an RF switch during Antenna Diversity operation. This signal normally assumes the complementary polarity of the Antenna-2 Switch signal (except during SLEEP state).	revB1A
ANTENNA_2_SW	23	Antenna-2 Switch signal used for control of an RF switch during Antenna Diversity operation. This signal normally assumes the complementary polarity of the Antenna-1 Switch signal (except during SLEEP state).	revB1A
VALID_PREAMBLE	24	This output goes high when a valid preamble is detected, and returns low after the packet is received or Sync Word timeout occurs.	revB1A
INVALID_PREAMBLE	25	Output low normally, pulses output high when the preamble is not detected within a period time (determined by PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_2:RX_PREAMBLE_TIMEOUT) after the demodulator is enabled.	revB1A
SYNC_WORD_DETECT	26	This output goes high when a Sync Word is detected, and returns low after the packet is received.	revB1A
CCA	27	Clear Channel Assessment. This output goes high when the Current RSSI signal exceeds the threshold value set by the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH property, and is low when the Current RSSI is below threshold. This is a real-time (non-latched) signal.	revB1A

GEN_CONFIG

DRV_STRENGTH[1:0]

Description:

Reads back the enumeration of the currently selected drive strength.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
HIGH	0	GPIOs configured as outputs will have the highest drive strength.	revB1A
MED_HIGH	1	GPIOs configured as outputs will have a medium drive strength.	revB1A
MED_LOW	2	GPIOs configured as outputs will have a medium drive strength.	revB1A
LOW	3	GPIOs configured as outputs will have the lowest drive strength.	revB1A

FIFO_INFO

Number: 0x15
Summary: Access the current byte counts in the TX and RX FIFOs, and provide for resetting the FIFOs.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for two separate 64-byte FIFO memories for the purpose of storing transmit and receive data. (When the GLOBAL_CONFIG:FIFO_MODE bit is set, these two FIFOs are combined into a single 129-byte shared FIFO.)
- The reply stream for this command returns the current number of received bytes stored in the RX FIFO, and the number of remaining empty bytes in the TX FIFO.
- The command may also be used to reset the individual FIFOs. This is typically used for error recovery (e.g., after encountering a CRC error in RX mode). Any valid data that has not yet been retrieved from the RX FIFO will be lost as a result of a reset; it is recommended to read such data prior to a reset. The FIFOs do not need to be reset prior to initial use after power-up.
- The FIFO reset function (if enabled) is processed prior to returning the byte count in the FIFOs. Thus the reply stream to a FIFO_INFO command that resets the FIFOs will return byte counts that indicate the FIFOs are empty.
- A FIFO reset command should not be sent while actively receiving or transmitting a packet, as this may corrupt the index pointers into the FIFOs and result in loss of stored information.
- The FIFO:TX and FIFO:RX bits are self-clearing; that is, there is no need to send the command twice (e.g., with the reset bits set the first time, and cleared the second time).
Argument Stream:

FIFO_INFO Argument Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CMD 0x15

0x01 FIFO 0 0 0 0 0 0 RX TX

Reply Stream:

FIFO_INFO Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CTS CTS

0x01 RX_FIFO_COUNT RX_FIFO_COUNT

0x02 TX_FIFO_SPACE TX_FIFO_SPACE

Argument Fields:
FIFO
RX

Description:

Resets the RX FIFO.

The RX FIFO mode specified in property GLOBAL_CONFIG:FIFO_MODE will be effective after reset.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

FALSE 0 Do not reset the RX data FIFO. revB1A

TRUE 1 Reset the RX data FIFO. revB1A

TX

Description:

Resets the TX FIFO.

The TX FIFO mode specified in property GLOBAL_CONFIG:FIFO_MODE will be effective after reset.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

FALSE 0 Do not reset the TX data FIFO. revB1A

TRUE 1 Reset the TX data FIFO. revB1A

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

RX_FIFO_COUNT

RX_FIFO_COUNT[7:0]

Description:

Returns the number of received bytes currently stored in the RX FIFO.

Type:

U8

TX_FIFO_SPACE

TX_FIFO_SPACE[7:0]

Description:

Returns the number of empty bytes (i.e., space) currently available in the TX FIFO.

Type:

U8

GET_INT_STATUS

Number: 0x20
Summary: Returns the interrupt status of ALL the possible interrupt events (both STATUS and PENDING). Optionally, it may be used to clear latched (PENDING) interrupt events.
Purpose:
- Returns the current interrupt status of ALL the possible interrupt events (both STATUS and PENDING) and optionally clears PENDING interrupts.
- STATUS indicates the current state of an internal interrupt event such as preamble/sync word detection, packet sent/received, etc. For example, PREAMBLE_DETECT is low before detection of a valid preamble, but goes high when the preamble arrives and is successfully detected. STATUS is cleared automatically upon termination or cessation of the corresponding internal interrupt event.
- PENDING simply latches the rising edge of the corresponding STATUS, and does not change until cleared by a GET_INT_STATUS command (or GET_CHIP_STATUS, GET_PH_STATUS, GET_MODEM_STATUS). For example, PREAMBLE_DETECT_PEND is low before detection of a valid preamble, goes high with PREAMBLE_DETECT, and remains high until cleared.
- It is possible to poll for interrupts by reading the STATUS and PENDING response bytes, as they are always up-to-date. Additionally, PENDING interrupts may generate a HW interrupt on the NIRQ output pin, if the interrupt is enabled via INT_CTL_ENABLE, INT_CTL_PH_ENABLE, INT_CTL_MODEM_ENABLE, and INT_CTL_CHIP_ENABLE properties.
- Sending the GET_INT_STATUS command with NO input parameters results in clearing all of the PENDING interrupts.
- When PENDING interrupts are being cleared, the reply stream reflects their status prior to clearing.

Argument Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CMD	0x20
0x01	PH_CLR_PEND	FILTER_MATCH_PEND_CLR	FILTER_MISS_PEND_CLR	PACKET_SENT_PEND_CLR	PACKET_RX_PEND_CLR	CRC_ERROR_PEND_CLR	ALT_CRC_ERROR_PEND_CLR	TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY_PEND_CLR	RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL_PEND_CLR
0x02	MODEM_CLR_PEND	RSSI_LATCH_PEND_CLR	POSTAMBLE_DETECT_PEND_CLR	INVALID_SYNC_PEND_CLR	RSSI_JUMP_PEND_CLR	RSSI_PEND_CLR	INVALID_PREAMBLE_PEND_CLR	PREAMBLE_DETECT_PEND_CLR	SYNC_DETECT_PEND_CLR
0x03	CHIP_CLR_PEND	0	CAL_PEND_CLR	FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR_PEND_CLR	STATE_CHANGE_PEND_CLR	CMD_ERROR_PEND_CLR	CHIP_READY_PEND_CLR	LOW_BATT_PEND_CLR	WUT_PEND_CLR

Reply Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CTS	CTS
0x01	INT_PEND	X	X	X	X	X	CHIP_INT_PEND	MODEM_INT_PEND	PH_INT_PEND
0x02	INT_STATUS	X	X	X	X	X	CHIP_INT_STATUS	MODEM_INT_STATUS	PH_INT_STATUS
0x03	PH_PEND	FILTER_MATCH_PEND	FILTER_MISS_PEND	PACKET_SENT_PEND	PACKET_RX_PEND	CRC_ERROR_PEND	ALT_CRC_ERROR_PEND	TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY_PEND	RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL_PEND
0x04	PH_STATUS	FILTER_MATCH	FILTER_MISS	PACKET_SENT	PACKET_RX	CRC_ERROR	ALT_CRC_ERROR	TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY	RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL
0x05	MODEM_PEND	RSSI_LATCH_PEND	POSTAMBLE_DETECT_PEND	INVALID_SYNC_PEND	RSSI_JUMP_PEND	RSSI_PEND	INVALID_PREAMBLE_PEND	PREAMBLE_DETECT_PEND	SYNC_DETECT_PEND
0x06	MODEM_STATUS	RSSI_LATCH	POSTAMBLE_DETECT	INVALID_SYNC	RSSI_JUMP	RSSI	INVALID_PREAMBLE	PREAMBLE_DETECT	SYNC_DETECT
0x07	CHIP_PEND	X	CAL_PEND	FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR_PEND	STATE_CHANGE_PEND	CMD_ERROR_PEND	CHIP_READY_PEND	LOW_BATT_PEND	WUT_PEND
0x08	CHIP_STATUS	X	CAL	FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR	STATE_CHANGE	CMD_ERROR	CHIP_READY	LOW_BATT	WUT

Argument Fields:

PH_CLR_PEND

FILTER_MATCH_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending FILTER_MATCH interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

FILTER_MISS_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending FILTER_MISS interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

PACKET_SENT_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending PACKET_SENT interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

PACKET_RX_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending PACKET_RX interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

CRC_ERROR_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending CRC_ERROR interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

ALT_CRC_ERROR_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending ALT_CRC_ERROR interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

MODEM_CLR_PEND

RSSI_LATCH_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending RSSI_LATCH interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

POSTAMBLE_DETECT_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending POSTAMBLE_DETECT interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

INVALID_SYNC_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending INVALID_SYNC interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

RSSI_JUMP_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending RSSI_JUMP interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

RSSI_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending RSSI interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

INVALID_PREAMBLE_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending INVALID_PREAMBLE interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

PREAMBLE_DETECT_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending PREAMBLE_DETECT interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

SYNC_DETECT_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending SYNC_DETECT interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

CHIP_CLR_PEND

CAL_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending CAL interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

STATE_CHANGE_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending STATE_CHANGE interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

CMD_ERROR_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending CMD_ERROR interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

CHIP_READY_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending CHIP_READY interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

LOW_BATT_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending LOW_BATT interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

WUT_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending WUT interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

INT_PEND

CHIP_INT_PEND

Description:

If set, an enabled CHIP_PEND bit is set indicating an interrupt is pending. See the GET_INT_STATUS:CHIP_STATUS field for the triggering events within the Chip Status Interrupt group.

Type:

BOOL

MODEM_INT_PEND

Description:

If set, an enabled MODEM_PEND bit is set indicating an interrupt is pending. See the GET_INT_STATUS:MODEM_STATUS field for the triggering events within the Modem Interrupt group.

Type:

BOOL

PH_INT_PEND

Description:

If set, an enabled PH_PEND bit is set indicating an interrupt is pending. See the GET_INT_STATUS:PH_STATUS field for the triggering events within the Packet Handler Interrupt group.

Type:

BOOL

INT_STATUS

CHIP_INT_STATUS

Description:

If set, the Chip Status Interrupt group has an interrupt pending. See the GET_INT_STATUS:CHIP_STATUS field for the triggering events within the Chip Status Interrupt group.

Type:

BOOL

MODEM_INT_STATUS

Description:

If set, the Modem Interrupt group has an interrupt pending. See the GET_INT_STATUS:MODEM_STATUS field for the triggering events within the Modem Interrupt group.

Type:

BOOL

PH_INT_STATUS

Description:

If set, the Packet Handler Interrupt group has an interrupt pending. See the GET_INT_STATUS:PH_STATUS field for the triggering events within the Packet Handler Interrupt group.

Type:

BOOL

PH_PEND

FILTER_MATCH_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the FILTER_MATCH status bit has been detected and therefore a FILTER_MATCH interrupt is pending. See associated FILTER_MATCH status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

FILTER_MISS_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the FILTER_MISS status bit has been detected and therefore a FILTER_MISS interrupt is pending. See associated FILTER_MISS status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

PACKET_SENT_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the PACKET_SENT status bit has been detected and therefore a PACKET_SENT interrupt is pending. See associated PACKET_SENT status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

PACKET_RX_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the PACKET_RX status bit has been detected and therefore a PACKET_RX interrupt is pending. See associated PACKET_RX status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

CRC_ERROR_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the CRC_ERROR status bit has been detected and therefore a CRC_ERROR interrupt is pending. See associated CRC_ERROR status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

ALT_CRC_ERROR_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the ALT_CRC_ERROR status bit has been detected and therefore a ALT_CRC_ERROR interrupt is pending. See associated ALT_CRC_ERROR status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY status bit has been detected and therefore a TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY interrupt is pending. See associated TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL status bit has been detected and therefore a RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL interrupt is pending. See associated RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

PH_STATUS

FILTER_MATCH

Description:

Set to indicate the incoming packet matched filter. Cleared upon entry into RX state, or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

FILTER_MISS

Description:

Set to indicate the incoming packet was discarded because filter did not match. Cleared upon entry into RX state, or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

PACKET_SENT

Description:

Set to indicate that data bytes in the TX FIFO were transmitted successfully. Cleared upon entry into TX state.

Type:

BOOL

PACKET_RX

Description:

Set to indicate that the expected number of data bytes have been successfully received and placed in the RX FIFO. All enabled Packet Handler functions (e.g., CRC check, Filter Matching) must be successfully completed in order to generate a PACKET_RX interrupt.

Type:

BOOL

CRC_ERROR

Description:

Set to indicate that the received CRC checksum byte(s) do not match the calculated CRC checksum value. Cleared upon entry into RX state or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

ALT_CRC_ERROR

Description:

Set to indicate that the received CRC checksum byte(s) do not match the calculated alternate CRC checksum value. For the difference between the two CRC engines (CRC, ALT_CRC), see PKT_CRC_CONFIG property. Cleared upon entry into RX state or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY

Description:

Set to indicate that the amount of space in the TX FIFO is equal to or greater than the PKT_TX_THRESHOLD value. This interrupt may be used to signal the host MCU to store more data bytes into the TX FIFO, thus providing a means for handling packets with lengths greater than the size of the TX FIFO (i.e., 64 bytes, or 129 bytes in shared FIFO mode). Cleared if the amount of space in the TX FIFO is more than the PKT_TX_THRESHOLD value.

Type:

BOOL

RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL

Description:

Set to indicate that the number of bytes stored in the RX FIFO is equal to or greater than the PKT_RX_THRESHOLD value. This interrupt may be used to signal the host MCU to read more data bytes from the RX FIFO, thus providing a means for handling packets with lengths greater than the size of the RX FIFO (i.e., 64 bytes, or 129 bytes in shared FIFO mode). Cleared if the amount of data in the RX FIFO is less than the PKT_RX_THRESHOLD value.

Type:

BOOL

MODEM_PEND

RSSI_LATCH_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the RSSI_LATCH status bit has been detected and therefore a RSSI_LATCH interrupt is pending. See associated RSSI_LATCH status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

POSTAMBLE_DETECT_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the POSTAMBLE_DETECT status bit has been detected and therefore a POSTAMBLE_DETECT interrupt is pending. See associated POSTAMBLE_DETECT status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

INVALID_SYNC_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the INVALID_SYNC status bit has been detected and therefore a INVALID_SYNC interrupt is pending. See associated INVALID_SYNC status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

RSSI_JUMP_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the RSSI_JUMP status bit has been detected and therefore a RSSI_JUMP interrupt is pending. See associated RSSI_JUMP status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

RSSI_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the RSSI status bit has been detected and therefore a RSSI interrupt is pending. See associated RSSI status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

INVALID_PREAMBLE_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the INVALID_PREAMBLE status bit has been detected and therefore a INVALID_PREAMBLE interrupt is pending. See associated INVALID_PREAMBLE status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

PREAMBLE_DETECT_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the PREAMBLE_DETECT status bit has been detected and therefore a PREAMBLE_DETECT interrupt is pending. See associated PREAMBLE_DETECT status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

SYNC_DETECT_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the SYNC_DETECT status bit has been detected and therefore a SYNC_DETECT interrupt is pending. See associated SYNC_DETECT status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

MODEM_STATUS

RSSI_LATCH

Description:

Set if the latched RSSI value (defined in MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL has exceeded the threshold value defined in the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH property. Cleared upon entry into RX state or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

POSTAMBLE_DETECT

Description:

Set if 1-4 bytes of received data matches the pattern of bits defined in the POSTAMBLE_PATTERN_XX properties. Postamble detection must also be enabled in the PREAMBLE_POSTAMBLE_CONFIG property. Cleared upon entry into RX, or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

INVALID_SYNC

Description:

Self clearing signal that pulses high when a valid Sync Word (matching the pattern of bits defined in the SYNC_BITS_XX properties) was not detected within the allowed search timeout period. If configured to receive a standard preamble, the search timeout period is Sync Word Length + 4bits. If configured to receive a non-standard preamble, the search timeout period is defined by the PREAMBLE_TX_LENGTH property.

Type:

BOOL

RSSI_JUMP

Description:

Self clearing signal that pulses high when the Current RSSI value jumps by more than the threshold value defined in the MODEM_RSSI_JUMP_THRESH property.

Type:

BOOL

RSSI

Description:

Set if the current RSSI value has exceeded the threshold value defined in the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH property.Cleared upon entry into RX state or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

INVALID_PREAMBLE

Description:

Self clearing signal that pulses high indicating that one of the following has occurred: a) a valid Preamble was not detected within the allowed search timeout period, or b) the Latched RSSI value is below the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH value and the chip has been enabled to check for this condition. The search timeout period for Preamble is configured in PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_2, while the CHECK_THRESH_AT_LATCH function is configured in MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL.

Type:

BOOL

PREAMBLE_DETECT

Description:

Set when a pattern of bits was received that matched the expected Preamble pattern. If configured to receive a standard preamble, the expected pattern of bits is '...010101...' with a threshold length defined in PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_1. If configured to receive a non-standard preamble, the expected pattern of bits is defined by the PREAMBLE_PATTERN_XX and the PREAMBLE_CONFIG_NSTD properties. Cleared when SYNC is detected, upon entering RX state, or RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

SYNC_DETECT

Description:

Set when the received Sync Word pattern matched the pattern of bits defined in the SYNC_BITS property. If SYNC_CONFIG2:DUAL_SYNC_EN is enabled, the pattern in SYNC_BITS2 is also used to match. Cleared when a packet is received (valid or invalid), upon entry into RX state, or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

CHIP_PEND

CAL_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the CAL status bit has been detected and therefore a CAL interrupt is pending. See associated CAL status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR status bit has been detected and therefore a FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR interrupt is pending. See associated FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

STATE_CHANGE_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the STATE_CHANGE status bit has been detected and therefore a STATE_CHANGE interrupt is pending. See associated STATE_CHANGE status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

CMD_ERROR_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the CMD_ERROR status bit has been detected and therefore a CMD_ERROR interrupt is pending. See associated CMD_ERROR status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

CHIP_READY_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the CHIP_READY status bit has been detected and therefore a CHIP_READY interrupt is pending. See associated CHIP_READY status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

LOW_BATT_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the LOW_BATT status bit has been detected and therefore a LOW_BATT interrupt is pending. See associated LOW_BATT status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

WUT_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the WUT status bit has been detected and therefore a WUT interrupt is pending. See associated WUT status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

CHIP_STATUS

CAL

Description:

Self clearing signal that pulses high to indicate a RC32K calibration event is pending. If this occurs, the RC32K oscillator will be calibrated on the next transition to Sleep/Standby state.

Type:

BOOL

FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR

Description:

Set to indicate that the number of received or transmitted bytes exceeds the size of the RX or TX FIFO, respectively (i.e., 64 bytes for each FIFO, or 129 bytes when sharing the FIFO). Upon such an underflow/overflow event, the FIFO(s) will need to be reset. Cleared by issuing a FIFO_INFO command to reset the FIFOs.

Type:

BOOL

STATE_CHANGE

Description:

Set to indicate a successful transition from one state to another operating state. Cleared when a state transition is in progress.

Type:

BOOL

CMD_ERROR

Description:

Self clearing signal that pulses high to indicate an error has occurred in the processing of a command. For example, an incorrect command/property ID is sent, or an attempt was made to write a property that is outside of the given property group.

Type:

BOOL

CHIP_READY

Description:

Set to indicate the chip (upon completion of the POWER_UP sequence) has reached the state where it is ready to accept commands, or when the IR calibration process is completed. Cleared when the chip is shutdown or when IR calibration has begun.

Type:

BOOL

LOW_BATT

Description:

Set to indicate the battery voltage is below the threshold set by GLOBAL_LOW_BATT_THRESH. Cleared to indicate the battery voltage is above the threshold set by GLOBAL_LOW_BATT_THRESH.

Type:

BOOL

WUT

Description:

Self clearing signal that pulses high to indicate the WUT (Wake-up timer) has expired.

Type:

BOOL

REQUEST_DEVICE_STATE

Number: 0x33
Summary: Request current device state and channel.
Purpose:
- This command returns information regarding the current operating state and tuned frequency channel of the device.
- Returning the current channel number is often useful in automatic frequency hopping applications, to determine the frequency on which the device found a valid signal.
- It is not possible for this command to return a device state value indicating the chip is in SLEEP or STANDBY mode, as the very act of sending an SPI command while the chip is in SLEEP or STANDBY mode assures that it wakes into SPI_ACTIVE mode.
Argument Stream:

REQUEST_DEVICE_STATE Argument Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CMD 0x33

Reply Stream:

REQUEST_DEVICE_STATE Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CTS CTS

0x01 CURR_STATE X X X X MAIN_STATE

0x02 CURRENT_CHANNEL CURRENT_CHANNEL

Argument Fields:

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:: Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.
Type:: U8

CURR_STATE

MAIN_STATE[3:0]

Description:

Returns the current operating state of the device. Please refer to the published datasheet for more details regarding these operational modes.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
SLEEP	1	(Not Applicable)	revB1A
SPI_ACTIVE	2	SPI_ACTIVE state.	revB1A
READY	3	READY state.	revB1A
READY2	4	Another enumeration for READY state.	revB1A
TX_TUNE	5	TX_TUNE state.	revB1A
RX_TUNE	6	RX_TUNE state.	revB1A
TX	7	TX state.	revB1A
RX	8	RX state.	revB1A

CURRENT_CHANNEL

CURRENT_CHANNEL[7:0]

Description:: Returns the current tuned channel.
Type:: U8

CHANGE_STATE

Number: 0x34
Summary: Manually switch the chip to a desired operating state.
Purpose:
- The chip normally manages the required steps in transitioning between operating states automatically. For example, transmission of a packet may require: waking the chip from SLEEP mode, enabling the Xtal Oscillator (READY mode), calibrating the VCO and tuning the PLL Synthesizer (TX_TUNE mode), enabling the PA and transmission of the packet (TX mode), and returning to an IDLE state. This sequencing is normally handled by the internal state machine.
- This command provides for manually switching to a desired operating state.
- This command may be used to enter TX or RX mode, if desired. However, those modes of operation typically require specification of additional parameters (e.g., channel number, number of packet bytes, etc.) prior to switching mode. For this reason, separate START_TX and START_RX commands are provided that essentially accomplish the CHANGE_STATE = TX or RX functionality, while simultaneously passing the required parameter bytes.
Argument Stream:

CHANGE_STATE Argument Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CMD 0x34

0x01 NEXT_STATE1 0 0 0 0 NEW_STATE

Reply Stream:

CHANGE_STATE Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CTS CTS

Argument Fields:

NEXT_STATE1

NEW_STATE[3:0]

Description:

Operating state to switch to immediately. Please refer to the published datasheet for more details regarding these operational modes.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
NOCHANGE	0	No change, remain in current state.	revB1A
SLEEP	1	SLEEP or STANDBY state, according to the mode of operation of the 32K R-C Osc selected by GLOBAL_CLK_CFG:CLK_32K_SEL.	revB1A
SPI_ACTIVE	2	SPI_ACTIVE state.	revB1A
READY	3	READY state.	revB1A
TX_TUNE	5	TX_TUNE state.	revB1A
RX_TUNE	6	RX_TUNE state.	revB1A
TX	7	TX state.	revB1A
RX	8	RX state.	revB1A

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

READ_CMD_BUFF

Number: 0x44
Summary: Used to read CTS and the command response.
Purpose:
- Processing of API commands is handled by the command handler in the chip. A subsequent command may not be sent until the chip has completed processing of the first command. The chip indicates the ability to receive another command and the availability of response data by issuing a Clear To Send (CTS) signal; it is necessary for the host MCU to poll the chip for this CTS signal. The CTS signal may be polled via SPI command, or monitored on a GPIO line or as an interrupt on the nIRQ pin.
- This command is used to poll the CTS signal via the SPI bus. The NSEL line should be pulled low, followed by sending the READ_CMD_BUFF command on SDI. While NSEL remains asserted low, an additional eight clock pulses are sent on SCLK and the CTS response byte is read on SDO. If the CTS response byte is not 0xFF, the host MCU should pull NSEL high and repeat the polling procedure.
- If the CTS response byte is 0xFF, the host MCU should keep NSEL asserted low and provide additional clock cycles on SCLK to read out as many response bytes (on SDO) as necessary. The host MCU should pull NSEL high upon completion of reading the response stream.
- A primary function of this command is to determine when CTS goes high, and thus by definition this command may be sent while CTS is low. This command itself does not cause CTS to go low.
- Attempting to read response bytes from the command buffer while CTS is not 0xFF will return invalid results. The response bytes are valid only if CTS = 0xFF.
Argument Stream:

READ_CMD_BUFF Argument Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CMD 0x44

Reply Stream:

READ_CMD_BUFF Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CTS CTS

0x01 BYTE[0] CMD_BUFF

... ... ...

0x10 BYTE[15] CMD_BUFF

Argument Fields:

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

BYTE[0...15]

CMD_BUFF[7:0]

Description:

Byte 0-15 of the command response buffer.

Type:

U8

FRR_A_READ

Number: 0x50
Summary: Reads the fast response registers (FRR) starting with FRR_A.
Purpose:
- The chip provides four Fast Response Registers (FRR) that may be read immediately without the need to monitor and check CTS, thus improving the speed at which the contents may be retrieved.
- The FRR registers may be read in a burst fashion through the FRR_X_READ commands. After the initial 16 clock cycles, each additional eight clock cycles will clock out the contents of the next fast response register in a circular fashion. Example: If the FRR_A_READ command is issued, the registers will be read in the order A-B-C-D, while if the FRR_B_READ command is issued, the registers will be read in the order B-C-D-A, etc.
- This command does not cause CTS to go low, and can be sent and the reply read while CTS is low. The command ID should be clocked in on SDI then the reply should be clocked out on SDO without deasserting NSEL.
- The FRR_CTL_X_MODE properties are used to select the specific parameter values that will be returned by the FRR_X_READ commands. Please refer to the text description for FRR_CTL_X_MODE for more details regarding selection of the parameter(s) held within the FRR registers.
Argument Stream:

FRR_A_READ Argument Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CMD 0x50

Reply Stream:

FRR_A_READ Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 FRR_A_VALUE FRR_A_VALUE

0x01 FRR_B_VALUE FRR_B_VALUE

0x02 FRR_C_VALUE FRR_C_VALUE

0x03 FRR_D_VALUE FRR_D_VALUE

Argument Fields:

Reply Fields:

FRR_A_VALUE

FRR_A_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register A.

Type:

U8

FRR_B_VALUE

FRR_B_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register B.

Type:

U8

FRR_C_VALUE

FRR_C_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register C.

Type:

U8

FRR_D_VALUE

FRR_D_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register D.

Type:

U8

FRR_B_READ

Number: 0x51
Summary: Reads the fast response registers (FRR) starting with FRR_B.
Purpose:
- The chip provides four Fast Response Registers (FRR) that may be read immediately without the need to monitor and check CTS, thus improving the speed at which the contents may be retrieved.
- The FRR registers may be read in a burst fashion through the FRR_X_READ commands. After the initial 16 clock cycles, each additional eight clock cycles will clock out the contents of the next fast response register in a circular fashion. Example: If the FRR_A_READ command is issued, the registers will be read in the order A-B-C-D, while if the FRR_B_READ command is issued, the registers will be read in the order B-C-D-A, etc.
- This command does not cause CTS to go low, and can be sent and the reply read while CTS is low. The command ID should be clocked in on SDI then the reply should be clocked out on SDO without deasserting NSEL.
- The FRR_CTL_X_MODE properties are used to select the specific parameter values that will be returned by the FRR_X_READ commands. Please refer to the text description for FRR_CTL_X_MODE for more details regarding selection of the parameter(s) held within the FRR registers.
Argument Stream:

FRR_B_READ Argument Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CMD 0x51

Reply Stream:

FRR_B_READ Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 FRR_B_VALUE FRR_B_VALUE

0x01 FRR_C_VALUE FRR_C_VALUE

0x02 FRR_D_VALUE FRR_D_VALUE

0x03 FRR_A_VALUE FRR_A_VALUE

Argument Fields:

Reply Fields:

FRR_B_VALUE

FRR_B_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register B.

Type:

U8

FRR_C_VALUE

FRR_C_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register C.

Type:

U8

FRR_D_VALUE

FRR_D_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register D.

Type:

U8

FRR_A_VALUE

FRR_A_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register A.

Type:

U8

FRR_C_READ

Number: 0x53
Summary: Reads the fast response registers (FRR) starting with FRR_C.
Purpose:
- The chip provides four Fast Response Registers (FRR) that may be read immediately without the need to monitor and check CTS, thus improving the speed at which the contents may be retrieved.
- The FRR registers may be read in a burst fashion through the FRR_X_READ commands. After the initial 16 clock cycles, each additional eight clock cycles will clock out the contents of the next fast response register in a circular fashion. Example: If the FRR_A_READ command is issued, the registers will be read in the order A-B-C-D, while if the FRR_B_READ command is issued, the registers will be read in the order B-C-D-A, etc.
- This command does not cause CTS to go low, and can be sent and the reply read while CTS is low. The command ID should be clocked in on SDI then the reply should be clocked out on SDO without deasserting NSEL.
- The FRR_CTL_X_MODE properties are used to select the specific parameter values that will be returned by the FRR_X_READ commands. Please refer to the text description for FRR_CTL_X_MODE for more details regarding selection of the parameter(s) held within the FRR registers.
Argument Stream:

FRR_C_READ Argument Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CMD 0x53

Reply Stream:

FRR_C_READ Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 FRR_C_VALUE FRR_C_VALUE

0x01 FRR_D_VALUE FRR_D_VALUE

0x02 FRR_A_VALUE FRR_A_VALUE

0x03 FRR_B_VALUE FRR_B_VALUE

Argument Fields:

Reply Fields:

FRR_C_VALUE

FRR_C_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register C.

Type:

U8

FRR_D_VALUE

FRR_D_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register D.

Type:

U8

FRR_A_VALUE

FRR_A_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register A.

Type:

U8

FRR_B_VALUE

FRR_B_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register B.

Type:

U8

FRR_D_READ

Number: 0x57
Summary: Reads the fast response registers (FRR) starting with FRR_D.
Purpose:
- The chip provides four Fast Response Registers (FRR) that may be read immediately without the need to monitor and check CTS, thus improving the speed at which the contents may be retrieved.
- The FRR registers may be read in a burst fashion through the FRR_X_READ commands. After the initial 16 clock cycles, each additional eight clock cycles will clock out the contents of the next fast response register in a circular fashion. Example: If the FRR_A_READ command is issued, the registers will be read in the order A-B-C-D, while if the FRR_B_READ command is issued, the registers will be read in the order B-C-D-A, etc.
- This command does not cause CTS to go low, and can be sent and the reply read while CTS is low. The command ID should be clocked in on SDI then the reply should be clocked out on SDO without deasserting NSEL.
- The FRR_CTL_X_MODE properties are used to select the specific parameter values that will be returned by the FRR_X_READ commands. Please refer to the text description for FRR_CTL_X_MODE for more details regarding selection of the parameter(s) held within the FRR registers.
Argument Stream:

FRR_D_READ Argument Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CMD 0x57

Reply Stream:

FRR_D_READ Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 FRR_D_VALUE FRR_D_VALUE

0x01 FRR_A_VALUE FRR_A_VALUE

0x02 FRR_B_VALUE FRR_B_VALUE

0x03 FRR_C_VALUE FRR_C_VALUE

Argument Fields:

Reply Fields:

FRR_D_VALUE

FRR_D_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register D.

Type:

U8

FRR_A_VALUE

FRR_A_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register A.

Type:

U8

FRR_B_VALUE

FRR_B_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register B.

Type:

U8

FRR_C_VALUE

FRR_C_VALUE[7:0]

Description:

Value in Fast Response Register C.

Type:

U8

IR_CAL_COMMANDS

IRCAL

Number: 0x17
Summary: Image rejection calibration.
Purpose:
- Performs image rejection calibration. Completion can be monitored by polling CTS or waiting for CHIP_READY interrupt source.

Argument Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CMD	0x17
0x01	SEARCHING_STEP_SIZE	0	INITIAL_PH_AMP	FINE_STEP_SIZE		COARSE_STEP_SIZE
0x02	SEARCHING_RSSI_AVG	0	0	RSSI_FINE_AVG		0	0	RSSI_COARSE_AVG
0x03	RX_CHAIN_SETTING1	EN_HRMNIC_GEN	IRCLKDIV	RF_SOURCE_PWR		CLOSE_SHUNT_SWITCH	PGA_GAIN
0x04	RX_CHAIN_SETTING2	RSSI_READ_DELAY				0	0	0	ADC_HIGH_GAIN

Reply Stream:

IRCAL Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CTS CTS

Argument Fields:

SEARCHING_STEP_SIZE

INITIAL_PH_AMP

Description:

Initial ph and amp value when start IR calibration.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 1 Use zero for phase and amplitude values as starting values.

ENUM_1 0 Use previous calibration values as starting values.

FINE_STEP_SIZE[1:0]

Description:

Step size of fine stepping. Writing a value of 0 will skip fine stepping.

Type:

U8

COARSE_STEP_SIZE[3:0]

Description:

Step Size of coarse stepping. Writing a value of 0 will skip coarse stepping.

Type:

U8

SEARCHING_RSSI_AVG

RSSI_FINE_AVG[1:0]

Description:

How many measurements(2^avg) per RSSI measurement while fine stepping.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 1 measurement.

ENUM_1 1 2 measurements.

ENUM_2 2 4 measurements.

ENUM_3 3 8 measurements.

RSSI_COARSE_AVG[1:0]

Description:

How many measurements(2^avg) per RSSI measurement while coarse stepping.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 1 measurement.

ENUM_1 1 2 measurements.

ENUM_2 2 4 measurements.

ENUM_3 3 8 measurements.

RX_CHAIN_SETTING1

EN_HRMNIC_GEN

Description:

Enable harmonic generator.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Not enable.

ENUM_1 1 Enable.

IRCLKDIV

Description:

Set irclkdiv.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Set to nominal gain.

ENUM_1 1 Harmonics at N x 30 MHz.

RF_SOURCE_PWR[1:0]

Description:

Power of internal generator(Default 3).

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 smallest.

ENUM_1 1 small.

ENUM_2 2 big.

ENUM_3 3 biggest.

CLOSE_SHUNT_SWITCH

Description:

Close shunt switch.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Open LNA input shunt switch.

ENUM_1 1 Close Open LNA input shunt switch.

PGA_GAIN[2:0]

Description:

Set PGA Gain.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 6 dB.

ENUM_1 1 9 dB.

ENUM_2 2 12 dB.

ENUM_3 3 6 dB.

ENUM_4 4 6 dB.

ENUM_5 5 6 dB.

ENUM_6 6 0 dB.

ENUM_7 7 3 dB.

RX_CHAIN_SETTING2

RSSI_READ_DELAY[3:0]

Description:

How many bits clock delay before read RSSI when calibration. Delay = (2 + RSSI_READ_DLEAY)*bit_clock).

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 2 + 0.

ENUM_1 1 2 + 1.

ENUM_2 15 2 + 15.

ADC_HIGH_GAIN

Description:

Set ADC to high gain.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Set to nominal gain.

ENUM_1 1 Set to high gain.

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

IRCAL_MANUAL

Number: 0x1a
Summary: Image rejection calibration.
Purpose:
- Forces a specific value for IR calibration, and reads back calibration values from previous calibrations.

Argument Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CMD	0x1a
0x01	IRCAL_AMP	IRCAL_AMP_SKIP	0	IRCAL_AMP_SIGN	IRCAL_AMP_MAG
0x02	IRCAL_PH	IRCAL_PH_SKIP	0	IRCAL_PH_SIGN	IRCAL_PH_MAG

Reply Stream:

IRCAL_MANUAL Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CTS CTS

0x01 IRCAL_AMP_REPLY X X IRCAL_AMP_SIGN IRCAL_AMP_MAG

0x02 IRCAL_PH_REPLY X X IRCAL_PH_SIGN IRCAL_AMP_PH

Argument Fields:

IRCAL_AMP

IRCAL_AMP_SKIP

Description:

Select whether or not the associated calibration value is applied.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

APPLY 0 Apply amplitude calibration value.

SKIP 1 Do not apply amplitude calibration value.

IRCAL_AMP_SIGN

Description:

Specify how the amplitude calibration value is to be applied.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

POS 0 Positive calibration value.

NEG 1 Negative calibration value.

IRCAL_AMP_MAG[4:0]

Description:

Magnitude of amplitude correction.

Type:

U8

IRCAL_PH

IRCAL_PH_SKIP

Description:

Select whether or not the associated calibration value is applied.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

APPLY 0 Apply phase calibration value.

SKIP 1 Do not apply phase calibration value.

IRCAL_PH_SIGN

Description:

Specify how the phase calibration value is to be applied.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

POS 0 Positive calibration value.

NEG 1 Negative calibration value.

IRCAL_PH_MAG[4:0]

Description:

Magnitude of phase correction.

Type:

U8

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

IRCAL_AMP_REPLY

IRCAL_AMP_SIGN

Description:

Specify how the amplitude calibration value is to be applied.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

POS 0 Positive calibration value.

NEG 1 Negative calibration value.

IRCAL_AMP_MAG[4:0]

Description:

Magnitude of amplitude correction.

Type:

U8

IRCAL_PH_REPLY

IRCAL_PH_SIGN

Description:

Specify how the phase calibration value is to be applied.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

POS 0 Positive calibration value.

NEG 1 Negative calibration value.

IRCAL_AMP_PH[4:0]

Description:

Magnitude of phase correction.

Type:

U8

TX_COMMANDS

START_TX

Number: 0x31
Summary: Switches to TX state and starts transmission of a packet.
Purpose:
- This command switches the chip to TX state and begins transmission of a packet. Depending upon the value of the START parameter, the start of transmission may be delayed until a certain condition is met.
- Several optional parameters may be passed with this command. If these parameter values are not sent, their previously configured values remain in use. The parameter values are retained while in SLEEP mode, and thus only need to be written when they change.
- The chip may be configured to automatically enter a desired operational state after transmission of the packet.
- The chip will not return CTS high until the chip has entered the TX state.

Argument Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CMD	0x31
0x01	CHANNEL	CHANNEL
0x02	CONDITION	TXCOMPLETE_STATE				UPDATE	RETRANSMIT	START
0x03	TX_LEN	0	0	0	TX_LEN[12:8]
0x04	TX_LEN	TX_LEN[7:0]
0x05	TX_DELAY	TX_DELAY
0x06	NUM_REPEAT	NUM_REPEAT

Reply Stream:

START_TX Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CTS CTS

Argument Fields:

CHANNEL

CHANNEL[7:0]

Description:

Selects the channel number on which to transmit. Please refer to FREQ_CONTROL_CHANNEL_STEP_SIZE for more details regarding the channelized approach to frequency tuning of the chip.
If the CHANNEL parameter byte is not passed with the command, the chip will tune to the last channel specified in either a START_TX or START_RX command; the internal variable that retains the CHANNEL value is shared by these two commands.

Type:

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

CONDITION

TXCOMPLETE_STATE[3:0]

Description:

This parameter selects the desired operational state of the chip to automatically enter upon completion of the packet transmission.
If this parameter is not passed with the command, the chip continues to use the previously configured value. If no value has been previously configured (i.e., upon POWER_UP), the default value of 3 = READY state is used.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
NOCHANGE	0	Do not change from previously sent TXCOMPLETE_STATE. (No Change does not have the effect of remaining in TX mode.)	revB1A
SLEEP	1	SLEEP or STANDBY state, according to the mode of operotion of the 32K R-C Osc selected by GLOBAL_CLK_CFG:CLK_32K_SEL.	revB1A
SPI_ACTIVE	2	SPI ACTIVE state.	revB1A
READY	3	READY state.	revB1A
READY2	4	Another enumeration for READY state.	revB1A
TX_TUNE	5	TX_TUNE state.	revB1A
RX_TUNE	6	RX_TUNE state.	revB1A
TX	7	TX state.	revC2A
RX	8	RX state.	revB1A

UPDATE

Description:

Selects the condition upon which transmission will start.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
UPDATE	1	Update TX parameters (to be used by a subsequent packet) but do not enter TX mode.
USE	0	Use TX parameters to enter TX mode.

RETRANSMIT

Description:

Selects whether the current packet will simply be a retransmission of the previous packet, or whether the current packet will transmit new data from the TX FIFO.
In the event of a retransmission, new (additional) data should not be written to the TX FIFO prior to the retransmission.
The RETRANSMIT bit should be set prior to sending the first packet, as well as on all subsequent retransmissions.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Send data that has been written to the TX FIFO. If the TX FIFO is empty, a FIFO underflow interrupt will occur.	revB1A
ENUM_1	1	Send last packet again.	revB1A

START[1:0]

Description:

Selects the condition upon which transmission will start.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
IMMEDIATE	0	Start TX immediately.	revB1A
WUT	1	Start TX upon expiration of the Wake-Up Timer.	revB1A

TX_LEN

TX_LEN[12:0]

Description:

Specifies the number of bytes to transmit in the data field(s) of the packet.
If this field is non-zero, the packet will be transmitted with TX_LEN number of data bytes, using the data field configuration options (e.g., CRC, data whitening, Manchester coding, etc.) of only PKT_FIELD_1_X. The Payload length is limited to 8191 bytes in this scenario.
If this field is zero, the number of data bytes to be transmitted is specified by the value(s) of the PKT_FIELD_X_LENGTH properties. The Payload length is limited to 5 x 8191 = 40955 bytes in this scenario (as each of the five data fields may be configured for a length of 8191 bytes). This approach is necessary if field-specific processing is desired (e.g., data whitening on one field but not another, Manchester coding on one field but not another, etc).
The TX_LEN parameter should still be passed even if the RETRANSMIT bit is set.

Type:

U16

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1fff

TX_DELAY

TX_DELAY[7:0]

Description:: Specifies a time delay (in µsec) between transmissions of packets, in the event another transmission is scheduled.
Type:: U8
Min:: 0x0
Max:: 0x80

NUM_REPEAT

NUM_REPEAT[7:0]

Description:: Specifies the number of times to repeat the packet. Packet cannot be longer than the fifo. If preamble and sync are required, those bytes should be put into the fifo and preamble/sync transmission disabled in the packet handler.
Type:: U8
Min:: 0x0
Max:: 0xff

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

TX_HOP

Number: 0x37
Summary: Hop to a new frequency while in TX.
Purpose:
- While in TX state this will ramp down the PA, Retune the PLL, and ramp the PA back up.

Argument Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CMD	0x37
0x01	INTE	INTE
0x02	FRAC	0	FRAC[22:16]
0x03		FRAC[15:8]
0x04		FRAC[7:0]
0x05	VCO_CNT	VCO_CNT[15:8]
0x06	VCO_CNT	VCO_CNT[7:0]
0x07	PLL_SETTLE_TIME	PLL_SETTLE_TIME[15:8]
0x08	PLL_SETTLE_TIME	PLL_SETTLE_TIME[7:0]

Reply Stream:

TX_HOP Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CTS CTS

Argument Fields:

INTE

INTE[7:0]

Description:

INTE register value.

Type:

U8

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x7f

FRAC

FRAC[22:0]

Description:

FRAC register value.

Type:

U8[]

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x7fffff

VCO_CNT

VCO_CNT[15:0]

Description:

VCO_CNT register value.

Type:

U16

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xffff

PLL_SETTLE_TIME

PLL_SETTLE_TIME[15:0]

Description:

Delay in us to leave PA ramped down.

Type:

U16

Min:

0x32

Max:

0x80

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

WRITE_TX_FIFO

Number: 0x66
Summary: Writes data byte(s) to the TX FIFO.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for two separate 64-byte FIFO memories for the purpose of storing transmit and receive data. (When the GLOBAL_CONFIG:FIFO_MODE bit is set, these two FIFOs are combined into a single 129-byte shared FIFO.)
- This command is used to write data byte(s) into the TX FIFO. The WRITE_TX_FIFO command should be clocked in on SDI (followed by the data byte(s) to be written) without deasserting NSEL. If you write more data bytes than the TX FIFO can hold it will generate a FIFO Overflow interrupt event.
- This command does not cause CTS to go low, and can be sent while CTS is low. This command has no response to be read and thus there is no need to monitor CTS after sending this command.
Argument Stream:

WRITE_TX_FIFO Argument Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CMD 0x66

0x01 DATA[0] DATA

... ... ...

M DATA[N] DATA

Argument Fields:

DATA[0...N]

(indefinite length array stream)

DATA[7:0]

Description:

Data to write to the TX FIFO

Type:

U8

RX_COMMANDS

PACKET_INFO

Number: 0x16
Summary: Returns information about the length of the variable field in the last packet received, and (optionally) overrides field length.
Purpose:
- The chip provides the ability for receiving packets in which one of the Payload field(s) is variable in length, with its length specified by received byte(s) embedded within a prior fixed-length field. This command may be used to retrieve the value of the length byte(s) (i.e., return the length of the variable length field). Please refer to the text descriptions for PKT_LEN and PKT_LEN_FIELD_SOURCE for more details regarding reception of a variable length packet.
- The value returned by this command describes the length of only the variable length field pointed to by the PKT_LEN:DST_FIELD parameter. This value may not be the same as the total length of the Payload, as the Payload may consist of several fixed-length fields in addition to the variable-length field. If no previous variable-length packet has been received, the return value will be 0.
- The LENGTH[15:0] response value is cleared upon entry into RX mode; therefore, the PACKET_INFO command should be sent after reception of a valid packet and prior to re-entering RX mode, else the response value will always be zero.
- This command may be issued with five optional arguments. If these arguments follow, their values are used to override the packet length value that was originally configured by issuing the START_RX command with a non-zero RX_LEN value, or by programming the PKT_RX_FIELD_X_LENGTH properties.
- This feature is provided to support variable-length packet functionality in applications where the length value cannot be extracted by the chip itself (due to special encoding, e.g., 3-of-6 encoding). In such an application, all data fields are defined as fixed-length fields; the host MCU decodes the received length byte(s) in the first field and subsequently issues the PACKET_INFO command during reception of the RX packet to modify the "fixed" length of a subsequent field. Please contact Silicon Labs Support for assistance with this functionality.
- In 802.15.4g receive mode, the FCS byte length embedded in the FHR is included to inform the host of the number of FCS bytes in the FIFO following the MAC Payload. If FCS is 0, 2 is added to the return length; if FCS is 1, 4 is added to the return length.

Argument Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CMD	0x16
0x01	FIELD_NUMBER	0	0	0	FIELD_NUM
0x02	LEN	LEN[15:8]
0x03	LEN	LEN[7:0]
0x04	LEN_DIFF	LEN_DIFF[15:8]
0x05	LEN_DIFF	LEN_DIFF[7:0]

Reply Stream:

PACKET_INFO Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CTS CTS

0x01 LENGTH LENGTH[15:8]

0x02 LENGTH[7:0]

Argument Fields:

FIELD_NUMBER

FIELD_NUM[4:0]

Description:

Selects the data field whose length will be modified per the LEN[15:0] and LEN_DIFF[15:0] parameters.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	Do not override the length of any data fields.
ENUM_1	1	Override the programmed value of PKT_FIELD_1_LENGTH, or the value of RX_LEN in the START_RX command.
ENUM_2	2	Override the programmed value of PKT_FIELD_2_LENGTH.
ENUM_3	4	Override the programmed value of PKT_FIELD_3_LENGTH.
ENUM_4	8	Override the programmed value of PKT_FIELD_4_LENGTH.
ENUM_5	16	Override the programmed value of PKT_FIELD_5_LENGTH.

LEN

LEN[15:0]

Description:: Selects the new length (in bytes) of the data field specified by the FIELD_NUM parameter.
Type:: U16
Min:: 0x1
Max:: 0x1fff

LEN_DIFF

LEN_DIFF[15:0]

Description:

Specifies the difference (in bytes) between the new length value (specified in LEN[15:0]) and the original length value (specified in the corresponding PKT_FIELD_X_LENGTH property, or passed in the START_RX:RX_LEN parameter).
This is a signed 16-bit value, with a positive value indicating an increase in field length and a negative value indicating a decrease in field length.
Passing the LEN_DIFF parameter as part of the PACKET_INFO command improves the speed with which the chip can process the requested change in packet length (compared with the chip internally performing that computation).

Type:

S16

Min:

-0x8000

Max:

0x7fff

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

LENGTH

LENGTH[15:0]

Description:

Returns the variable length field value, extracted from the last received variable-length packet

Type:

U16

GET_MODEM_STATUS

Number: 0x22
Summary: Returns the interrupt status of the Modem Interrupt Group (both STATUS and PENDING). Optionally, it may be used to clear latched (PENDING) interrupt events.
Purpose:
- Returns the current interrupt status of Modem interrupt events (both STATUS and PENDING) and optionally clears PENDING interrupts.
- Please refer to the GET_INT_STATUS command for more details regarding the difference between STATUS and PENDING interrupts.
- Sending the GET_MODEM_STATUS command with NO input parameter results in clearing all of the PENDING interrupts.
- When PENDING interrupts are being cleared, the reply stream reflects their status prior to clearing.

Argument Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CMD	0x22
0x01	MODEM_CLR_PEND	RSSI_LATCH_PEND_CLR	POSTAMBLE_DETECT_PEND_CLR	INVALID_SYNC_PEND_CLR	RSSI_JUMP_PEND_CLR	RSSI_PEND_CLR	INVALID_PREAMBLE_PEND_CLR	PREAMBLE_DETECT_PEND_CLR	SYNC_DETECT_PEND_CLR

Reply Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CTS	CTS
0x01	MODEM_PEND	RSSI_LATCH_PEND	POSTAMBLE_DETECT_PEND	INVALID_SYNC_PEND	RSSI_JUMP_PEND	RSSI_PEND	INVALID_PREAMBLE_PEND	PREAMBLE_DETECT_PEND	SYNC_DETECT_PEND
0x02	MODEM_STATUS	RSSI_LATCH	POSTAMBLE_DETECT	INVALID_SYNC	RSSI_JUMP	RSSI	INVALID_PREAMBLE	PREAMBLE_DETECT	SYNC_DETECT
0x03	CURR_RSSI	CURR_RSSI
0x04	LATCH_RSSI	LATCH_RSSI
0x05	ANT1_RSSI	ANT1_RSSI
0x06	ANT2_RSSI	ANT2_RSSI
0x07	AFC_FREQ_OFFSET	AFC_FREQ_OFFSET[15:8]
0x08	AFC_FREQ_OFFSET	AFC_FREQ_OFFSET[7:0]

Argument Fields:

MODEM_CLR_PEND

RSSI_LATCH_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending RSSI_LATCH interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

POSTAMBLE_DETECT_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending POSTAMBLE_DETECT interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

INVALID_SYNC_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending INVALID_SYNC interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

RSSI_JUMP_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending RSSI_JUMP interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

RSSI_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending RSSI interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

INVALID_PREAMBLE_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending INVALID_PREAMBLE interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

PREAMBLE_DETECT_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending PREAMBLE_DETECT interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

SYNC_DETECT_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending SYNC_DETECT interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

MODEM_PEND

RSSI_LATCH_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the RSSI_LATCH status bit has been detected and therefore a RSSI_LATCH interrupt is pending. See associated RSSI_LATCH status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

POSTAMBLE_DETECT_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the POSTAMBLE_DETECT status bit has been detected and therefore a POSTAMBLE_DETECT interrupt is pending. See associated POSTAMBLE_DETECT status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

INVALID_SYNC_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the INVALID_SYNC status bit has been detected and therefore a INVALID_SYNC interrupt is pending. See associated INVALID_SYNC status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

RSSI_JUMP_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the RSSI_JUMP status bit has been detected and therefore a RSSI_JUMP interrupt is pending. See associated RSSI_JUMP status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

RSSI_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the RSSI status bit has been detected and therefore a RSSI interrupt is pending. See associated RSSI status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

INVALID_PREAMBLE_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the INVALID_PREAMBLE status bit has been detected and therefore a INVALID_PREAMBLE interrupt is pending. See associated INVALID_PREAMBLE status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

PREAMBLE_DETECT_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the PREAMBLE_DETECT status bit has been detected and therefore a PREAMBLE_DETECT interrupt is pending. See associated PREAMBLE_DETECT status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

SYNC_DETECT_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the SYNC_DETECT status bit has been detected and therefore a SYNC_DETECT interrupt is pending. See associated SYNC_DETECT status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

MODEM_STATUS

RSSI_LATCH

Description:

Set if the latched RSSI value (defined in MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL has exceeded the threshold value defined in the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH property. Cleared upon entry into RX state or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

POSTAMBLE_DETECT

Description:

Set if 1-4 bytes of received data matches the pattern of bits defined in the POSTAMBLE_PATTERN_XX properties. Postamble detection must also be enabled in the PREAMBLE_POSTAMBLE_CONFIG property. Cleared upon entry into RX, or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

INVALID_SYNC

Description:

Self clearing signal that pulses high when a valid Sync Word (matching the pattern of bits defined in the SYNC_BITS_XX properties) was not detected within the allowed search timeout period. If configured to receive a standard preamble, the search timeout period is Sync Word Length + 4bits. If configured to receive a non-standard preamble, the search timeout period is defined by the PREAMBLE_TX_LENGTH property.

Type:

BOOL

RSSI_JUMP

Description:

Self clearing signal that pulses high when the Current RSSI value jumps by more than the threshold value defined in the MODEM_RSSI_JUMP_THRESH property.

Type:

BOOL

RSSI

Description:

Set if the current RSSI value has exceeded the threshold value defined in the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH property.Cleared upon entry into RX state or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

INVALID_PREAMBLE

Description:

Self clearing signal that pulses high indicating that one of the following has occurred: a) a valid Preamble was not detected within the allowed search timeout period, or b) the Latched RSSI value is below the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH value and the chip has been enabled to check for this condition. The search timeout period for Preamble is configured in PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_2, while the CHECK_THRESH_AT_LATCH function is configured in MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL.

Type:

BOOL

PREAMBLE_DETECT

Description:

Set when a pattern of bits was received that matched the expected Preamble pattern. If configured to receive a standard preamble, the expected pattern of bits is '...010101...' with a threshold length defined in PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_1. If configured to receive a non-standard preamble, the expected pattern of bits is defined by the PREAMBLE_PATTERN_XX and the PREAMBLE_CONFIG_NSTD properties. Cleared when SYNC is detected, upon entering RX state, or RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

SYNC_DETECT

Description:

Set when the received Sync Word pattern matched the pattern of bits defined in the SYNC_BITS property. If SYNC_CONFIG2:DUAL_SYNC_EN is enabled, the pattern in SYNC_BITS2 is also used to match. Cleared when a packet is received (valid or invalid), upon entry into RX state, or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

CURR_RSSI

CURR_RSSI[7:0]

Description:

Current RSSI reading from the modem.

Type:

U8

LATCH_RSSI

LATCH_RSSI[7:0]

Description:

Latched RSSI reading from the modem as configured by MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL. Reset to 0 upon entering RX mode or if RX is restarted.

Type:

U8

ANT1_RSSI

ANT1_RSSI[7:0]

Description:

RSSI of ANT1 during evaluation of the antenna diversity algorithm. The RSSI value is latched during Preamble evaluation and is available for reading only after detection of Sync Word.

Type:

U8

ANT2_RSSI

ANT2_RSSI[7:0]

Description:

RSSI of ANT2 during evaluation of the antenna diversity algorithm. The RSSI value is latched during Preamble evaluation and is available for reading only after detection of Sync Word.

Type:

U8

AFC_FREQ_OFFSET

AFC_FREQ_OFFSET[15:0]

Description:

The AFC value that is generated by the PLL AFC feedback loop during receive mode.

Type:

U16

START_RX

Number: 0x32
Summary: Switches to RX state and starts reception of a packet.
Purpose:
- This command switches the chip to RX state and begins reception of a packet. Depending upon the value of the START parameter, the start of reception may be delayed until a certain condition is met.
- Several optional parameters may be passed with this command. If these parameter values are not sent, their previously configured values remain in use. The parameter values are retained while in SLEEP mode, and thus only need to be written when they change.
- The chip may be configured to automatically enter different operational states after reception of the packet, depending upon the success or failure of the packet reception.
- The chip will not return CTS high until the chip has entered the RX state.

Argument Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CMD	0x32
0x01	CHANNEL	CHANNEL
0x02	CONDITION	0	0	0	0	UPDATE	0	START
0x03	RX_LEN	0	0	0	RX_LEN[12:8]
0x04	RX_LEN	RX_LEN[7:0]
0x05	NEXT_STATE1	0	0	0	0	RXTIMEOUT_STATE
0x06	NEXT_STATE2	0	0	0	0	RXVALID_STATE
0x07	NEXT_STATE3	0	0	0	0	RXINVALID_STATE

Reply Stream:

START_RX Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CTS CTS

Argument Fields:

CHANNEL

CHANNEL[7:0]

Description:

Selects the channel number on which to receive. Please refer to FREQ_CONTROL_CHANNEL_STEP_SIZE for more details regarding the channelized approach to frequency tuning of the chip.
If the CHANNEL parameter byte is not passed with the command, the chip will tune to the last channel specified in either a START_TX or START_RX command ; the internal variable that retains the CHANNEL value is shared by these two commands.

Type:

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

CONDITION

UPDATE

Description:

Selects the condition upon which reception will start.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
UPDATE	1	Update RX parameters (to be used by a subsequent packet) but do not enter RX mode.
USE	0	Use RX parameters to enter RX mode.

START[1:0]

Description:

Selects the condition upon which reception will start.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
IMMEDIATE	0	Start RX immediately.
WUT	1	Start RX when wake up timer expires.

RX_LEN

RX_LEN[12:0]

Description:

Specifies the number of bytes to receive in the data field(s) of the packet.
If this field is non-zero, the packet will be received with RX_LEN number of data bytes, using the data field configuration options (e.g., CRC, data whitening, Manchester coding, etc.) of only PKT_FIELD_1_X. The Payload length is limited to 8191 bytes in this scenario.
If this field is zero, the number of data bytes to be received is specified by the value(s) of the PKT_FIELD_X_LENGTH properties. The Payload length is limited to 5 x 8191 = 40955 bytes in this scenario (as each of the five data fields may be configured for a length of 8191 bytes). This approach is necessary if field-specific processing is desired (e.g., data whitening on one field but not another, Manchester coding on one field but not another, etc).

Type:

U16

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1fff

NEXT_STATE1

RXTIMEOUT_STATE[3:0]

Description:

This parameter selects the desired operational state of the chip to automatically enter upon timeout of Preamble detection. Please refer to PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_2 for details regarding configuration of Preamble detection timeout.
If this parameter is not passed with the command, the chip continues to use the previously configured value. If no value has been previously configured (i.e., upon POWER_UP), the default value of 0 = Remain in RX state is used.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
NOCHANGE	0	Remain in RX state if RXTIMEOUT occurs.
SLEEP	1	SLEEP or STANDBY state, according to the mode of operation of the 32K R-C Osc selected by GLOBAL_CLK_CFG:CLK_32K_SEL.
SPI_ACTIVE	2	SPI ACTIVE state.
READY	3	READY state.
READY2	4	Another enumeration for READY state.
TX_TUNE	5	TX_TUNE state.
RX_TUNE	6	RX_TUNE state.
TX	7	TX state.
RX	8	RX state (briefly exit and re-enter RX state to re-arm for acquisition of another packet).
RX_IDLE	9	RX_IDLE state.

NEXT_STATE2

RXVALID_STATE[3:0]

Description:

This parameter selects the desired operational state of the chip to automatically enter upon reception of a valid packet. A packet is considered valid if the CRC check passes, and if the MATCH byte check is verified (if enabled). If neither CRC nor MATCH functionality is enabled, a packet is considered valid when the specified number of bytes are received.
If this parameter is not passed with the command, the chip continues to use the previously configured value. If no value has been previously configured (i.e., upon POWER_UP), the default value of 3 = READY state is used.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
REMAIN	0	Remain in RX state (but do not re-arm to acquire another packet).	revB1A
SLEEP	1	SLEEP or STANDBY state, according to the mode of operotion of the 32K R-C Osc selected by GLOBAL_CLK_CFG:CLK_32K_SEL.	revB1A
SPI_ACTIVE	2	SPI ACTIVE state.	revB1A
READY	3	READY state.	revB1A
READY2	4	Another enumeration for READY state.	revB1A
TX_TUNE	5	TX_TUNE state.	revB1A
RX_TUNE	6	RX_TUNE state.	revB1A
TX	7	TX state.	revB1A
RX	8	RX state (briefly exit and re-enter RX state to re-arm for acquisition of another packet).	revB1A

NEXT_STATE3

RXINVALID_STATE[3:0]

Description:

This parameter selects the desired operational state of the chip to automatically enter upon reception of an invalid packet. A packet is considered invalid if the CRC check fails or if the MATCH byte check fails (if enabled).
If this parameter is not passed with the command, the chip continues to use the previously configured value. If no value has been previously configured (i.e., upon POWER_UP), the default value of 3 = READY state is used.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
REMAIN	0	Remain in RX state (but do not re-arm to acquire another packet).	revB1A
SLEEP	1	SLEEP or STANDBY state, according to the mode of operotion of the 32K R-C Osc selected by GLOBAL_CLK_CFG:CLK_32K_SEL.	revB1A
SPI_ACTIVE	2	SPI ACTIVE state.	revB1A
READY	3	READY state.	revB1A
READY2	4	Another enumeration for READY state.	revB1A
TX_TUNE	5	TX_TUNE state.	revB1A
RX_TUNE	6	RX_TUNE state.	revB1A
TX	7	TX state.	revB1A
RX	8	RX state (briefly exit and re-enter RX state to re-arm for acquisition of another packet).	revB1A

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

RX_HOP

Number: 0x36
Summary: Manually hop to a new frequency while in RX mode.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for automatic frequency hopping from one RX channel to another when certain conditions are met. However, the user may desire to retain control of RX hopping within the host MCU (e.g., when hopping on conditions that are not supported by the built-in automatic hopping functionality).
- This command provides for "manual" frequency hopping; that is, quickly tuning to a new RX frequency upon request by the host MCU (as compared to automatically hopping when certain RX conditions are met).
- By directly passing the frequency tuning parameters (INTE, FRAC, and VCO_CNT) with the command, certain internal computational steps are avoided and the tuning speed of the hop is improved (compared to simply re-issuing a START_RX command with the new desired channel number). The values entered for these parameters should describe the desired RX channel center frequency (i.e., not the shifted RX LO frequency).
- Any arbitrary frequency (within the same band) may be tuned with this command; there is no requirement for the frequencies to fall on increments of a given channel spacing. However, the same output divider setting (as set in the MODEM_CLKGEN_BAND property) is used for all frequencies, and thus the tuned frequencies may not span across an output divider band break.
- This command is typically issued while already in RX mode and will cause the chip to hop to the frequency specified by the parameters and start searching for a Preamble.
- The VCO_CNT parameter is required to support calibration of the VCO at each tuned frequency. This is normally a parameter that is internally calculated by the chip; however, that internal computation requires time and thus hop speed may be improved by pre-calculating and passing this parameter from the host MCU. Please contact Silicon Labs Support for assistance with calculation of the VCO_CNT values.

Argument Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CMD	0x36
0x01	INTE	INTE
0x02	FRAC	0	0	0	0	FRAC[19:16]
0x03		FRAC[15:8]
0x04		FRAC[7:0]
0x05	VCO_CNT	VCO_CNT[15:8]
0x06	VCO_CNT	VCO_CNT[7:0]

Reply Stream:

RX_HOP Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CTS CTS

Argument Fields:
INTE
INTE[7:0]

Description:

This parameter defines the integer portion of the total divide number for the Fractional-N PLL Synthesizer.

Please refer to the text description for FREQ_CONTROL_INTE for more details regarding frequency calculation.

Type:

U8

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x7f
FRAC
FRAC[19:0]

Description:

This parameter defines the fractional portion of the total divide number for the Fractional-N PLL Synthesizer.

Please refer to the text description for FREQ_CONTROL_INTE for more details regarding frequency calculation.

Type:

U8[]

Min:

0x80000

Max:

0xfffff
VCO_CNT

VCO_CNT[15:0]

Description:

This parameter defines the target count required by the VCO Calibration algorithm.

Type:

U16

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xffff

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

READ_RX_FIFO

Number: 0x77
Summary: Reads data byte(s) from the RX FIFO.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for two separate 64-byte FIFO memories for the purpose of storing transmit and receive data. (When the GLOBAL_CONFIG:FIFO_MODE bit is set, these two FIFOs are combined into a single 129-byte shared FIFO.)
- This command is used to read data byte(s) from the RX FIFO. The READ_RX_FIFO command should be clocked in on SDI and the reply should be clocked out on SDO without deasserting NSEL. If you read more data bytes than the RX FIFO contains it will generate a FIFO Underflow interrupt event.
- This command does not cause CTS to go low, and can be sent while CTS is low. This command has no response to be read and thus there is no need to monitor CTS after sending this command.
Argument Stream:

READ_RX_FIFO Argument Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CMD 0x77

Reply Stream:

READ_RX_FIFO Reply Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 DATA[0] DATA

... ... ...

M DATA[N] DATA

Argument Fields:

Reply Fields:

DATA[0...N]

(indefinite length array stream)

DATA[7:0]

Description:

Data read from the RX FIFO

Type:

U8

ADVANCED_COMMANDS

GET_ADC_READING

Number: 0x14
Summary: Performs conversions using the Auxiliary ADC and returns the results of those conversions.
Purpose:
- The chip provides an Auxiliary Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) for the purpose of measuring various analog parameters and returning their values in digital form. The ADC utilizes a Successive Approximation Register (SAR) architecture and achieves 11-bit resolution, with a 9-bit Effective Number of Bits (ENOB).
- The ADC may be configured to measure the internal battery voltage, an internal temperature sensor, or an external voltage applied to a selected GPIO pin. More than one type of measurement may be enabled at the same time; the conversions will be performed sequentially and all converted values returned.
- The ADC is capable of converting any battery voltage within the chip's operating supply voltage range of 1.8VDC to 3.6VDC.
- The GPIO pin carrying the external voltage to be measured is selected by the ADC_GPIO_PIN parameter, and must also be configured as an input pin or tri-state pin (through the GPIO_PIN_CFG command).
- The voltage on the selected GPIO pin may be internally attenuated prior to conversion, thus effectively extending the range of voltages which may be converted. The attenuation factor is configurable through the GPIO_ATT parameter.
Argument Stream:

GET_ADC_READING Argument Stream

Index Name 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0x00 CMD 0x14

0x01 ADC_EN 0 0 0 TEMPERATURE_EN BATTERY_VOLTAGE_EN ADC_GPIO_EN ADC_GPIO_PIN

0x02 ADC_CFG UDTIME GPIO_ATT

Reply Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CTS	CTS
0x01	GPIO_ADC	X	X	X	X	X	GPIO_ADC[10:8]
0x02	GPIO_ADC	GPIO_ADC[7:0]
0x03	BATTERY_ADC	X	X	X	X	X	BATTERY_ADC[10:8]
0x04	BATTERY_ADC	BATTERY_ADC[7:0]
0x05	TEMP_ADC	X	X	X	X	X	TEMP_ADC[10:8]
0x06	TEMP_ADC	TEMP_ADC[7:0]

Argument Fields:

ADC_EN

TEMPERATURE_EN

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Do not perform ADC conversion of the temperature. The reply value in TEMP_ADC will always be 0x000.
ENUM_1	1	Perform ADC conversion of the temperature. The reply value in TEMP_ADC will be TEMP(degC) = (899/4096)*TEMP_ADC - 293.

BATTERY_VOLTAGE_EN

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Do not perform ADC conversion of the battery voltage. The reply value in BATTERY_ADC will always be 0x000.	revB1A
ENUM_1	1	Perform ADC conversion of the battery voltage. The reply value in BATTERY_ADC will be VBAT(V) = 3*BATTERY_ADC/1280.	revB1A

ADC_GPIO_EN

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Do not perform ADC conversion of the voltage applied to the selected GPIO pin. The reply value in GPIO_ADC will always be 0x000.	revB1A
ENUM_1	1	Perform ADC conversion of the voltage applied to the selected GPIO pin. The reply value in GPIO_ADC will be VGPIO(V) = GPIO_ADC/GPIO_ADC_DIV, where GPIO_ADC_DIV is an attenuation factor defined by the selection of the GPIO_ATT parameter.	revB1A

ADC_GPIO_PIN[1:0]

Description:

Select the GPIO pin on which to perform conversion of an externally applied voltage.
The selected GPIO pin must also be configured as an input pin or tri-state pin (through use of the GPIO_PIN_CFG command).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	The voltage on GPIO0 will be converted by the ADC.	revB1A
ENUM_1	1	The voltage on GPIO1 will be converted by the ADC.	revB1A
ENUM_2	2	The voltage on GPIO2 will be converted by the ADC.	revB1A
ENUM_3	3	The voltage on GPIO3 will be converted by the ADC.	revB1A

ADC_CFG

UDTIME[3:0]

Description:

Selects the rate of ADC conversion, where ADC_RATE = SYS_CLK / 12 / 2^(UDTIME + 1). Selecting shorter conversion times (i.e., faster conversion rates) will result in lower ADC resolution and longer conversion times will result in higher ADC resolution.
An ADC conversion rate of 305 Hz (UDTIME = 0xC) to 1.22 kHz (UDTIME = 0xA) is recommended.
If the ADC_CFG parameter byte is not sent, or is set ADC_CFG = 0x00, the UDTIME parameter will assume a default value of 0xC = 305 Hz ADC conversion rate (for nominal SYS_CLK = 30 MHz).

Type:

GPIO_ATT[3:0]

Description:

Selects the attenuation factor to be internally applied to the voltage on the GPIO pin, prior to conversion by the ADC. This effectively extends the range of voltages which may be converted.
If the ADC_CFG parameter byte is not sent, or is set ADC_CFG = 0x00, the GPIO_ATT parameter will assume a default value of 0x5 = 0 to 3.2V range.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
0P8	0	ADC measurement range is 0 to 0.8 V. GPIO_ADC_DIV = 2560.	revB1A
1P6	4	ADC measurement range is 0 to 1.6 V. GPIO_ADC_DIV = 1280.	revB1A
3P2	5	ADC measurement range is 0 to 3.2 V. GPIO_ADC_DIV = 640.	revB1A
2P4	8	ADC measurement range is 0 to 2.4 V. GPIO_ADC_DIV = 853.33.	revB1A
3P6	9	ADC measurement range is 0 to 3.6 V. GPIO_ADC_DIV = 426.66.	revB1A

Reply Fields:
CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8
GPIO_ADC
GPIO_ADC[10:0]

Description:

Returns the voltage on the selected GPIO pin, as converted by the Auxiliary ADC.

The reply value will be VGPIO(V) = GPIO_ADC/GPIO_ADC_DIV, where GPIO_ADC_DIV is an attenuation factor defined by the selection of the GPIO_ATT parameter.

Type:

U16
BATTERY_ADC
BATTERY_ADC[10:0]

Description:

Returns the battery voltage, as converted by the Auxiliary ADC.

The reply value will be VBAT(V) = 3*BATTERY_ADC/1280.

Type:

U16
TEMP_ADC

TEMP_ADC[10:0]

Description:

Returns the temperature, as converted by the Auxiliary ADC.The reply value will be TEMP(degC) = (899/4096)*TEMP_ADC - 293.

Type:

U16

GET_PH_STATUS

Number: 0x21
Summary: Returns the interrupt status of the Packet Handler Interrupt Group (both STATUS and PENDING). Optionally, it may be used to clear latched (PENDING) interrupt events.
Purpose:
- Returns the current interrupt status of Packet Handler interrupt events (both STATUS and PENDING) and optionally clears PENDING interrupts.
- Please refer to the GET_INT_STATUS command for more details regarding the difference between STATUS and PENDING interrupts.
- Sending the GET_PH_STATUS command with NO input parameter results in clearing all of the PENDING interrupts.
- When PENDING interrupts are being cleared, the reply stream reflects their status prior to clearing.

Argument Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CMD	0x21
0x01	PH_CLR_PEND	FILTER_MATCH_PEND_CLR	FILTER_MISS_PEND_CLR	PACKET_SENT_PEND_CLR	PACKET_RX_PEND_CLR	CRC_ERROR_PEND_CLR	ALT_CRC_ERROR_PEND_CLR	TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY_PEND_CLR	RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL_PEND_CLR

Reply Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CTS	CTS
0x01	PH_PEND	FILTER_MATCH_PEND	FILTER_MISS_PEND	PACKET_SENT_PEND	PACKET_RX_PEND	CRC_ERROR_PEND	ALT_CRC_ERROR_PEND	TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY_PEND	RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL_PEND
0x02	PH_STATUS	FILTER_MATCH	FILTER_MISS	PACKET_SENT	PACKET_RX	CRC_ERROR	ALT_CRC_ERROR	TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY	RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL

Argument Fields:

PH_CLR_PEND

FILTER_MATCH_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending FILTER_MATCH interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

FILTER_MISS_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending FILTER_MISS interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

PACKET_SENT_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending PACKET_SENT interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

PACKET_RX_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending PACKET_RX interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

CRC_ERROR_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending CRC_ERROR interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

ALT_CRC_ERROR_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending ALT_CRC_ERROR interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:

Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.

Type:

U8

PH_PEND

FILTER_MATCH_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the FILTER_MATCH status bit has been detected and therefore a FILTER_MATCH interrupt is pending. See associated FILTER_MATCH status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

FILTER_MISS_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the FILTER_MISS status bit has been detected and therefore a FILTER_MISS interrupt is pending. See associated FILTER_MISS status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

PACKET_SENT_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the PACKET_SENT status bit has been detected and therefore a PACKET_SENT interrupt is pending. See associated PACKET_SENT status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

PACKET_RX_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the PACKET_RX status bit has been detected and therefore a PACKET_RX interrupt is pending. See associated PACKET_RX status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

CRC_ERROR_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the CRC_ERROR status bit has been detected and therefore a CRC_ERROR interrupt is pending. See associated CRC_ERROR status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

ALT_CRC_ERROR_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the ALT_CRC_ERROR status bit has been detected and therefore a ALT_CRC_ERROR interrupt is pending. See associated ALT_CRC_ERROR status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY status bit has been detected and therefore a TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY interrupt is pending. See associated TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL_PEND

Description:

If set, a rising edge of the RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL status bit has been detected and therefore a RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL interrupt is pending. See associated RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL status bit for more details.

Type:

BOOL

PH_STATUS

FILTER_MATCH

Description:

Set to indicate the incoming packet matched filter. Cleared upon entry into RX state, or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

FILTER_MISS

Description:

Set to indicate the incoming packet was discarded because filter did not match. Cleared upon entry into RX state, or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

PACKET_SENT

Description:

Set to indicate that data bytes in the TX FIFO were transmitted successfully. Cleared upon entry into TX state.

Type:

BOOL

PACKET_RX

Description:

Set to indicate that the expected number of data bytes have been successfully received and placed in the RX FIFO. All enabled Packet Handler functions (e.g., CRC check, Filter Matching) must be successfully completed in order to generate a PACKET_RX interrupt.

Type:

BOOL

CRC_ERROR

Description:

Set to indicate that the received CRC checksum byte(s) do not match the calculated CRC checksum value. Cleared upon entry into RX state or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

ALT_CRC_ERROR

Description:

Set to indicate that the received CRC checksum byte(s) do not match the calculated alternate CRC checksum value. For the difference between the two CRC engines (CRC, ALT_CRC), see PKT_CRC_CONFIG property. Cleared upon entry into RX state or if RX is restarted.

Type:

BOOL

TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY

Description:

Set to indicate that the amount of space in the TX FIFO is equal to or greater than the PKT_TX_THRESHOLD value. This interrupt may be used to signal the host MCU to store more data bytes into the TX FIFO, thus providing a means for handling packets with lengths greater than the size of the TX FIFO (i.e., 64 bytes, or 129 bytes in shared FIFO mode). Cleared if the amount of space in the TX FIFO is more than the PKT_TX_THRESHOLD value.

Type:

BOOL

RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL

Description:

Set to indicate that the number of bytes stored in the RX FIFO is equal to or greater than the PKT_RX_THRESHOLD value. This interrupt may be used to signal the host MCU to read more data bytes from the RX FIFO, thus providing a means for handling packets with lengths greater than the size of the RX FIFO (i.e., 64 bytes, or 129 bytes in shared FIFO mode). Cleared if the amount of data in the RX FIFO is less than the PKT_RX_THRESHOLD value.

Type:

BOOL

GET_CHIP_STATUS

Number: 0x23
Summary: Returns the interrupt status of the Chip Interrupt Group (both STATUS and PENDING). Optionally, it may be used to clear latched (PENDING) interrupt events.
Purpose:
- Returns the current interrupt status of Chip interrupt events (both STATUS and PENDING) and optionally clears PENDING interrupts.
- Please refer to the GET_INT_STATUS command for more details regarding the difference between STATUS and PENDING interrupts.
- Sending the GET_CHIP_STATUS command with NO input parameter results in clearing all of the PENDING interrupts.
- When PENDING interrupts are being cleared, the reply stream reflects their status prior to clearing.

Argument Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CMD	0x23
0x01	CHIP_CLR_PEND	0	CAL_PEND_CLR	FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR_PEND_CLR	STATE_CHANGE_PEND_CLR	CMD_ERROR_PEND_CLR	CHIP_READY_PEND_CLR	LOW_BATT_PEND_CLR	WUT_PEND_CLR

Reply Stream:


Index	Name	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CTS	CTS
0x01	CHIP_PEND	X	CAL_PEND	FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR_PEND	STATE_CHANGE_PEND	CMD_ERROR_PEND	CHIP_READY_PEND	LOW_BATT_PEND	WUT_PEND
0x02	CHIP_STATUS	X	CAL	FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR	STATE_CHANGE	CMD_ERROR	CHIP_READY	LOW_BATT	WUT
0x03	CMD_ERR_STATUS	CMD_ERR_STATUS
0x04	CMD_ERR_CMD_ID	CMD_ERR_CMD_ID

Argument Fields:

CHIP_CLR_PEND

CAL_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending CAL interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

STATE_CHANGE_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending STATE_CHANGE interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

CMD_ERROR_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending CMD_ERROR interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

CHIP_READY_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending CHIP_READY interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

LOW_BATT_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending LOW_BATT interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

WUT_PEND_CLR

Description:

If clear, clear any pending WUT interrupt. If set, leave interrupt pending.

Type:

BOOL

Reply Fields:

CTS

CTS[7:0]

Description:: Clear to Send. Indicates that the previous command has completed execution and the response byte stream (if any) is valid. The next command may be sent.
Type:: U8

CHIP_PEND

CAL_PEND

Description:: If set, a rising edge of the CAL status bit has been detected and therefore a CAL interrupt is pending. See associated CAL status bit for more details.
Type:: BOOL

FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR_PEND

Description:: If set, a rising edge of the FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR status bit has been detected and therefore a FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR interrupt is pending. See associated FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR status bit for more details.
Type:: BOOL

STATE_CHANGE_PEND

Description:: If set, a rising edge of the STATE_CHANGE status bit has been detected and therefore a STATE_CHANGE interrupt is pending. See associated STATE_CHANGE status bit for more details.
Type:: BOOL

CMD_ERROR_PEND

Description:: If set, a rising edge of the CMD_ERROR status bit has been detected and therefore a CMD_ERROR interrupt is pending. See associated CMD_ERROR status bit for more details.
Type:: BOOL

CHIP_READY_PEND

Description:: If set, a rising edge of the CHIP_READY status bit has been detected and therefore a CHIP_READY interrupt is pending. See associated CHIP_READY status bit for more details.
Type:: BOOL

LOW_BATT_PEND

Description:: If set, a rising edge of the LOW_BATT status bit has been detected and therefore a LOW_BATT interrupt is pending. See associated LOW_BATT status bit for more details.
Type:: BOOL

WUT_PEND

Description:: If set, a rising edge of the WUT status bit has been detected and therefore a WUT interrupt is pending. See associated WUT status bit for more details.
Type:: BOOL

CHIP_STATUS

CAL

Description:: Self clearing signal that pulses high to indicate a RC32K calibration event is pending. If this occurs, the RC32K oscillator will be calibrated on the next transition to Sleep/Standby state.
Type:: BOOL

FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR

Description:: Set to indicate that the number of received or transmitted bytes exceeds the size of the RX or TX FIFO, respectively (i.e., 64 bytes for each FIFO, or 129 bytes when sharing the FIFO). Upon such an underflow/overflow event, the FIFO(s) will need to be reset. Cleared by issuing a FIFO_INFO command to reset the FIFOs.
Type:: BOOL

STATE_CHANGE

Description:: Set to indicate a successful transition from one state to another operating state. Cleared when a state transition is in progress.
Type:: BOOL

CMD_ERROR

Description:: Self clearing signal that pulses high to indicate an error has occurred in the processing of a command. For example, an incorrect command/property ID is sent, or an attempt was made to write a property that is outside of the given property group.
Type:: BOOL

CHIP_READY

Description:: Set to indicate the chip (upon completion of the POWER_UP sequence) has reached the state where it is ready to accept commands, or when the IR calibration process is completed. Cleared when the chip is shutdown or when IR calibration has begun.
Type:: BOOL

LOW_BATT

Description:: Set to indicate the battery voltage is below the threshold set by GLOBAL_LOW_BATT_THRESH. Cleared to indicate the battery voltage is above the threshold set by GLOBAL_LOW_BATT_THRESH.
Type:: BOOL

WUT

Description:: Self clearing signal that pulses high to indicate the WUT (Wake-up timer) has expired.
Type:: BOOL

CMD_ERR_STATUS

CMD_ERR_STATUS[7:0]

Description:

Last command error cause. Only valid if CMD_ERROR status bit is set.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
CMD_ERROR_NONE	0	No error.
CMD_ERROR_BAD_COMMAND	16	Bad command issued.
CMD_ERROR_BAD_ARG	17	Argment(s) in issued command were invalid.
CMD_ERROR_COMMAND_BUSY	18	Command was issued before previous command was completed.
CMD_ERROR_INVALID_STATE	19	Command issued was not allowed while in the current device state.
CMD_ERROR_BAD_BOOTMODE	49	Invalid bootmode supplied.
CMD_ERROR_BAD_PROPERTY	64	Bad Property ID was provided.

CMD_ERR_CMD_ID

CMD_ERR_CMD_ID[7:0]

Description:: Command ID that was being proccessed at the time of the last command error.
Type:: ENUM

Property Details

GLOBAL

GLOBAL_XO_TUNE

Group: 0x00
Index: 0x00

Summary: Configure the internal capacitor frequency tuning bank for the crystal oscillator.
Purpose:
- The chip provides internal adjustable capacitor banks for the purpose of tuning the frequency of the crystal oscillator. These capacitances effectively appear in shunt from the XIN and XOUT pins to GND.
- TUNE_VALUE = 0x00 corresponds to the lowest tuning capacitance value and thus the highest frequency of oscillation, while TUNE_VALUE = 0x7F corresponds to the highest tuning capacitance value and the lowest frequency of oscillation. Each LSB code corresponds to ~70 fF change in capacitance.
- The total frequency adjustment range (for a typical 30 MHz crystal blank) is approximately ±100 ppm.
Default: 0x40
Register View:

	GLOBAL_XO_TUNE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	0	TUNE_VALUE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x40

Field Details:

GLOBAL_XO_TUNE

TUNE_VALUE[6:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
FASTEST_FREQUENCY	0	Lowest capacitance (i.e., highest oscillation frequency)
SLOWEST_FREQUENCY	127	Highest capacitance (i.e., lowest oscillation frequency)

GLOBAL_CLK_CFG

Group: 0x00
Index: 0x01

Summary: Clock configuration options.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for outputting a variety of clock signals on selected GPIO pins. It is necessary to configure these clock signals prior to using the Wake-Up Timer (WUT) or GPIO clock output.
- The source of the clock signal(s) may be derived from the system clock (i.e., crystal oscillator or external reference source) or from the 32K R-C / Xtal oscillator.
- The clock signal derived from the system clock (i.e., crystal oscillator or external reference source) may be further divided by a configurable divide ratio, as selected by the DIVIDED_CLK_SEL field. During SPI_ACTIVE mode (i.e., when the crystal oscillator is disabled) the output signal is derived from the divided Boot Clock signal.
- The 32K clock source may be obtained from an internal 32K R-C Oscillator, or from an internal Crystal Oscillator operating with an external 32K crystal blank.
- In the event the 32K Xtal Osc is used, the crystal blank must be placed across the GPIO0 and GPIO1 pins, thus rendering these pins unavailable for any other purpose. Additionally, the GPIO0 and GPIO1 pins must be defined as input pins or tri-state pins (through use of the GPIO_PIN_CFG command) in order to support the mode of oscillation.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	GLOBAL_CLK_CFG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x01	0	DIVIDED_CLK_EN	DIVIDED_CLK_SEL			0	CLK_32K_SEL
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0			0x0	0x0

Field Details:

GLOBAL_CLK_CFG

DIVIDED_CLK_EN

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLE	0	Divided system clock output is disabled.
ENABLE	1	Divided system clock output is enabled.

DIVIDED_CLK_SEL[2:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
DIV_1	0	Clock output is system clock divided by 1.
DIV_2	1	Clock output is system clock divided by 2.
DIV_3	2	Clock output is system clock divided by 3.
DIV_7_5	3	Clock output is system clock divided by 7.5.
DIV_10	4	Clock output is system clock divided by 10.
DIV_15	5	Clock output is system clock divided by 15.
DIV_30	6	Clock output is system clock divided by 30.

CLK_32K_SEL[1:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
OFF	0	32 kHz clock is disabled.
RC	1	32 kHz clock is driven by internal RC oscillator.
CRYSTAL	2	32 kHz clock is driven by internal crystal oscillator operating with external 32K crystal blank across GPIO0 and GPIO1 pins.

GLOBAL_LOW_BATT_THRESH

Group: 0x00
Index: 0x02

Summary: Configures the threshold voltage for low-battery detection.
Purpose:
- The chip provides low-battery detection (LBD) capability. The battery voltage is compared against the threshold voltage configured in this property, using a dedicated internal voltage comparator.
- The result of the LBD function may be viewed in real-time on a GPIO pin, or may be used to generate an interrupt event.
- The LBD functionality must be enabled in the GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG property. The battery voltage is measured at time intervals defined by the Wake-Up Timer (WUT), and thus is only available when the WUT is additionally enabled. (Of course, the host MCU may initiate a measurement of the battery voltage at any time through the GET_ADC_READING command.)
- The low battery threshold is configurable from 1.5V to 3.05V in increments of 50mV, and is given by the following formula:
  
  $VDD\_THRESH=\left(\frac{30+THRESHOLD}{20}\right)V (150 DPI)$
Default: 0x18
Register View:

	GLOBAL_LOW_BATT_THRESH
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x02	0	0	0	THRESHOLD
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x18

Field Details:

GLOBAL_LOW_BATT_THRESH

THRESHOLD[4:0]

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1f

Default:

0x18

GLOBAL_CONFIG

Group: 0x00
Index: 0x03

Summary: Global configuration settings.
Purpose:
- Description: This is a reserved field that should always be written to 1. Note that the recommended setting does not match the current default (wake-up) value of this bit.
Default: 0x20
Register View:

	GLOBAL_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x03	0	RESERVED	SEQUENCER_MODE	FIFO_MODE	PROTOCOL			POWER_MODE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x1	0x0	0x0			0x0

Field Details:

GLOBAL_CONFIG

RESERVED

Description:: Description: This is a reserved field that should always be written to 1. Note that the recommended setting does not match the current default (wake-up) value of this bit.
Default:: 0x0

SEQUENCER_MODE

Description:

Processing of API commands (e.g., START_TX) is handled by the command handler in the chip. Due to processing overhead and "housekeeping" functions (e.g., interrupt service routines), the time required to process an API command may not be fixed. As a result, the time delay between issuing a START_TX command and the point in time where the chip actually enters TX mode may be slightly variable, in normal operation.
The default operation of the chip is to process the START_TX command and enter TX mode as quickly as possible. However, the chip may be configured to enter TX mode only after expiration of a fixed (longer) time period, measured from issuance of the START_TX command. In this fashion, the time delay between the command and the TX packet is fixed and consistent, but slightly longer than normal.
The time period is a function of the initial state of the chip prior to entering TX mode. The timer counts 'X' cycles of a clock operating at Fxtal/30 MHz (i.e., 1 µsec clock ticks for the nominal crystal Fxtal=30 MHz).
SLEEP / SPI_ACTIVE to TX = 0x1F4 = 500 cycles
TX_TUNE to TX = 0x4B = 75 cycles
READY to TX = 0x96 = 150 cycles
RX to TX = 0x96 = 150 cycles

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
GUARANTEED	0	Enter TX mode upon expiration of a guaranteed time period after nSEL (associated with a START_TX command) goes high. The time period depends on the current chip state.
FAST	1	Enter TX mode as quickly as possible after receipt of a START_TX command.

FIFO_MODE

Description:

The chip normally provides for two separate 64-byte FIFO memories for the purpose of storing transmit and receive data.
When this bit is set, these two FIFOs are combined into a single 129-byte shared FIFO. The user must ensure that all data is transmitted or retrieved from the shared FIFO space prior to switching TX/RX modes, else stored data may be lost.
Shared FIFO mode will not take effect until after performing a reset of the FIFOs (through the FIFO_INFO command).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
SPLIT_FIFO	0	TX and RX FIFO are independent, 64-byte size for each other.
HALF_DUPLEX_FIFO	1	TX/RX FIFO are sharing with 129-byte size buffer.

PROTOCOL[2:0]

Description:

Certain protocols (e.g., IEEE 802.15.4g) require dynamic re-configuration of how the packet is processed.
The default mode of operation is to receive a generic packet format; the desired processing of the packet is configured prior to packet reception and remains in effect for the duration of the packet.
If this field is set, the chip becomes "protocol-aware" and dynamically alters its packet processing as a function of received Header byte(s).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
GENERIC	0	Packet format is generic, no dynamic reprogramming of packet handler properties.
IE154G	1	Packet format is IEEE802.15.4g compliant. The following properties are overriden: PKT_CRC_CONFIG, CRC_ENDIAN/BIT_ORDER in PKT_CONFG1 for TX and RX, PKT_FIELD_1_CRC_CONFIG for RX. Other applicable properties in the packet handler group still need to be programmed. Field 1 should have the length of 16 bits to contain the PHR with PKT_LEN_FIELD_SOURCE set to 1 for RX. PSDU field shall use Field 2 with variable length. Field 2 length should be set to the maximum allowed including the anticipated FCS length. It is anticipated that the FCS will be calculated by the host and transmitted over the air. PHR and FCS will be put in the FIFO for the host to retrieve and check. Therefore, CRC shouldn't be enabled.

POWER_MODE

Description:

The chip may be placed into either a High Performance or Low Power mode of operation.
This bit primarily affects RX and TUNE modes, and trades off RX performance (i.e., sensitivity and linearity) for current consumption. The difference in current consumption in TX mode is negligible.
Please refer to the published datasheet for expected values of current consumption in each mode.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
HIGH_PERF	0	High performance mode for RX and TX.
LOW_POWER	1	Low power mode for RX and TX.

GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG

Group: 0x00
Index: 0x04

Summary: General Wakeup Timer feature configuration.
Purpose:
- The chip contains an integrated timer that may be used to wake the chip at periodic intervals. This property is used to enable and configure various functions related to the Wake-Up timer (WUT), such as Low-Battery Detection (LBD) and Low Duty Cycle (LDC) operation.
- The WUT counts cycles of the 32K clock signal, and thus a 32K clock source (either internal 32K R-C Oscillator or internal Crystal Oscillator with external 32K crystal blank) must also be enabled through the GLOBAL_CLK_CFG property in order to obtain WUT functionality.
- The frequency of the 32K R-C Oscillator will change with temperature and thus periodic re-calibration is required. The 32K R-C Oscillator is initially calibrated during the POWER_UP command after exit from the SDN state.
- There are two different methods by which re-calibration of the 32K R-C Oscillator may be configured. One method is to enable the re-calibration by setting the GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:CAL_EN bit and selecting the desired calibration period through the GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:WUT_CAL_PERIOD parameter. The other method is to leave the GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:CAL_EN bit cleared but to configure a non-zero value in the GLOBAL_WUT_CAL property, resulting in calibration on multiples of the WUT period. In both methods, the 32K R-C Oscillator must be enabled to provide a clock signal to the timer(s).
- Calibration of the 32K R-C Oscillator is performed by comparing its frequency to that of the 30 MHz Xtal Oscillator. Therefore, the 30 MHz Xtal Oscillator is automatically started during calibration, resulting in an increase in average current consumption. Selecting a longer value of GLOBAL_WUT_CAL or GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:WUT_CAL_PERIOD is recommended to lower the average current consumption.
- LDC mode is provided to automatically wake-up the receiver to check if a valid signal is available (LDC RX mode), or to enable the transmitter to send a packet (LDC TX mode).
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x04	WUT_LDC_EN		WUT_CAL_PERIOD			WUT_LBD_EN	WUT_EN	CAL_EN
	*Default*
	0x0		0x0			0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG
WUT_LDC_EN[1:0]

Description:

Enables or disables LDC operation, and selects the mode of LDC operation.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

DISABLE_LDC 0 Disable LDC operation.

RX_LDC 1 LDC RX Mode.

TX_LDC 2 LDC TX Mode.

WUT_CAL_PERIOD[2:0]

Description:

Selects the time interval for periodic re-calibration of the 32K R-C Oscillator.

Calibration must additionally be enabled by setting the WUT_CONFIG:CAL_EN bit, else this field has no effect.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

1_SEC 0 1 sec.

2_SEC 1 2 sec.

4_SEC 2 4 sec.

8_SEC 3 8 sec.

16_SEC 4 16 sec.

32_SEC 5 32 sec.

64_SEC 6 64 sec.

128_SEC 7 128 sec.

WUT_LBD_EN

Description:

"When high, enables the Low Battery Detect (LBD) function.

A comparison of the battery voltage with the GLOBAL_LOW_BATT_THRESH value (through use of a dedicated internal voltage comparator) is performed upon expiration of the WUT interval.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

DISABLE_LBD 0 Disable the LBD functionality.

ENABLE_LBD 1 Enable the LBD functionality.

WUT_EN

Description:

Description: Enables or disables the WUT. No other functionality derived from the WUT (e.g., LBD or LDC) may be obtained without first enabling the WUT. It remains additionally necessary to enable a 32K clock source for the WUT. Note that the 32K clock source needs to be stable in order to guarantee WUT timing. If using the internal 32K RC oscillator, wait at least 300 microseconds or 10 clock cycles between enabling the internal oscillator and enabling the WUT. If using an external 32K XTAL, wait at least 1.5 seconds or 49,152 clock cycles between enabling the external XTAL and enabling the WUT.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

DISABLE_WUT 0 Disable wake up timer.

ENABLE_WUT 1 Enable wake up timer.

CAL_EN

Description:

"Selects whether the chip will wake up at periodic intervals and perform calibration of the 32K R-C Oscillator.

When enabled, the calibration interval is controlled by the GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:WUT_CAL_PERIOD parameter.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

DISABLE_CAL 0 Disable the 32K R-C Oscillator calibration timer.

ENABLE_CAL 1 Enable the 32K R-C Oscillator calibration timer.

GLOBAL_WUT_M

Group: 0x00
Indexes: 0x05 ... 0x06

Summary: Configure the mantissa of the Wake-Up Timer (WUT) value.
Purpose:
- The chip contains an integrated timer that may be used to wake the chip at periodic intervals. The WUT is enabled by the GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:WUT_EN bit.
- The WUT_M and WUT_R values should be configured prior to enabling the WUT_EN bit. In the event it is desired to modify the WUT_M/R values, the WUT_EN bit should first be disabled and then re-enabled after the timer values are modified.
- The clock source for the WUT is taken from either the internal 32 kHz RC Oscillator or from the internal 32 kHz crystal oscillator (operating in conjunction with a 32 kHz crystal blank placed between the GPIO0 and GPIO1 pins). Therefore, a 32K clock source must be enabled (through the GLOBAL_CLK_CFG property) in order for the timer to have a clock signal to count.
- The period of the WUT is given by the following formula:
  
  $WUT\_PERIOD\_sec = WUT\_M \times (\frac{4 \times 2^{WUT\_R}}{32768})sec (150 DPI)$
- This property sets the mantissa value WUT_M. A value of WUT_M = 0 is a legal value but will have the same effect as WUT_M = 1.
- The WUT_M value is only used in defining the period of the WUT, and (unlike the WUT_R value) is not shared in defining the Low Duty Cycle (LDC) duration.
- The chip may be configured to generate an interrupt event upon expiration of the WUT.
- Additionally, a GPIO pin may be configured to output a real-time signal with the programmed WUT period. The duty cycle of this signal may be other than 50%, with the output pulsing high for 2^(WUT_R+1) cycles of the 32K clock.
Defaults: 0x00,0x01
Register View:

	GLOBAL_WUT_M
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x05	WUT_M[15:8]
0x06	WUT_M[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x05	0x0
0x06	0x1

Field Details:

GLOBAL_WUT_M

WUT_M[15:0]

Description:

Configures the mantissa in the formula for the period.

Min:

0x1

Max:

0xffff

Default:

0x1

GLOBAL_WUT_R

Group: 0x00
Index: 0x07

Summary: Configure the exponent of the Wake-Up Timer (WUT) value.
Purpose:
- The chip contains an integrated timer that may be used to wake the chip at periodic intervals. Please refer to the text description for GLOBAL_WUT_M for more details regarding setting the period of the WUT.
- This property sets the value of the exponent WUT_R. A value of WUT_R = 0 is a legal value but has the same effect as WUT_R = 1. The maximum permissible value is WUT_R = 0x14 = 20d.
- The WUT_R value is shared between defining the period of the WUT and the LDC mode duration, in contrast with the WUT_M value which is used only in defining the period of the WUT.
- In most applications the WUT is used to wake from a low-current state such as SLEEP mode. The WUT_SLEEP bit is used to select whether the chip returns to SLEEP mode after expiration of the WUT, or remains in SPI_ACTIVE mode. If the chip was already in a higher-current operational state (e.g., TUNE or RX mode) when the WUT expired, it will not drop back to SLEEP or SPI_ACTIVE mode but will remain in the commanded operational state.
Default: 0x60
Register View:

	GLOBAL_WUT_R
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x07	LDC_MAX_PERIODS		WUT_SLEEP	WUT_R
	*Default*
	0x1		0x1	0x0

Field Details:

GLOBAL_WUT_R

LDC_MAX_PERIODS[1:0]

Description:

Configures how many LDC periods to wait for a incoming packet to be received after preamble or sync has been detected.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
FOREVER	0	Wait forever for an incoming packet. User must abort reception if desired.
TWO	1	Wait for a max of 2 LDC periods after preamble or sync is received.
FOUR	2	Wait for a max of 4 LDC periods after preamble or sync is received.
EIGHT	3	Wait for a max of 8 LDC periods after preamble or sync is received.

WUT_SLEEP

Description:

selects the operating state after expiration of the WUT.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
READY	0	Go to SPI_ACTIVE state after WUT.
SLEEP	1	Go to Sleep state after WUT.

WUT_R[4:0]

Description:: Configures the value of the exponent in the formula for the period of the WUT.
Min:: 0x0
Max:: 0x14
Default:: 0x0

GLOBAL_WUT_LDC

Group: 0x00
Index: 0x08

Summary: Configures the period of time the chip remains active after automatic wake-up in LDC mode.
Purpose:
- The chip contains an integrated timer used to determine the length of time the chip remains active after automatic wake-up in LDC mode.
- The LDC active period is given by the following formula:
  
  $LDC\_PERIOD\_sec=WUT\_LDC\times ( \frac{4\times 2^{WUT\_R}}{32768sec}) (150 DPI)$
- This property sets the mantissa value WUT_LDC. A value of WUT_LDC = 0 is a legal value but will have the same effect as WUT_LDC = 1. The WUT_R (exponent) value is shared in defining the period of the WUT.
- The clock source for the WUT is taken from either the internal 32 kHz RC Oscillator or from the internal 32 kHz crystal oscillator (operating in conjunction with a 32 kHz crystal blank placed between the GPIO0 and GPIO1 pins). Therefore, a 32K clock source must be enabled (through the GLOBAL_CLK_CFG property) in order for the timer to have a clock signal to count.
- The LDC period determines the length of time the chip remains in active mode, while the WUT period determines the length of time the chip remains inactive. Therefore the total amount of time between successive wake-up cycles is LDC_PERIOD + WUT_PERIOD.
- The period of time spent in active mode may be less than the defined LDC_PERIOD. Example: if a valid RX packet is detected within the LDC_PERIOD and completely received prior to the expiration of LDC_PERIOD, the chip will return to the WUT state immediately upon the end of the packet.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	GLOBAL_WUT_LDC
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x08	WUT_LDC
	*Default*
	0x0

Field Details:
GLOBAL_WUT_LDC
WUT_LDC[7:0]

Description:

Configures the mantissa in the formula for the period of active time in LDC mode.

An LDC mode of operation must be enabled (through the GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:WUT_LDC_EN field) for this parameter to take effect.

Min:

0x1

Max:

0xff

Default:

0x0

GLOBAL_WUT_CAL

Group: 0x00
Index: 0x09

Summary: Controls if calibration of the 32K R-C Oscillator will be performed on intervals of the WUT.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for two different methods of configuring the period between re-calibration of the 32K R-C Oscillator. One method involves enabling a Calibration Timer and selecting a calibration interval in various multiples of 1 second (see the GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG property); the other method involves performing calibration on configurable integer multiples of the programmed WUT interval.
- The GLOBAL_WUT_CAL property configures the desired integer multiple of the WUT interval on which to perform calibration (i.e., the second method mentioned above). A value of WUT_CAL = 0x00 disables this feature. Any non-zero value will result in calibration of the 32K R-C Oscillator on that integer multiple of the WUT interval. Example: WUT_CAL = 0x01 will calibrate on every WUT interval, WUT_CAL = 0x02 will calibrate on every second WUT interval, etc.
- The GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:CAL_EN bit must also be cleared for this method of calibration timing to be enabled.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	GLOBAL_WUT_CAL
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x09	WUT_CAL
	*Default*
	0x0

Field Details:
GLOBAL_WUT_CAL
WUT_CAL[7:0]

Description:

Selects the multiple of the WUT period on which to perform calibration of the 32K R-C Oscillator.

The GLOBAL_WUT_CONFIG:CAL_EN bit must also be cleared for this method of calibration timing to be enabled.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

Default:

0x0

INT_CTL

INT_CTL_ENABLE

Group: 0x01
Index: 0x00

Summary: This property provides for global enabling of the three interrupt groups (Chip, Modem and Packet Handler) in order to generate HW interrupts at the NIRQ pin.
Purpose:
- Enables top-level interrupt sources to generate HW interrupts at the NIRQ pin.
- The three interrupt groups are Chip, Modem and Packet Handler. Each of them contains multiple possible interrupt sources that must be individually enabled via the INT_CTL_PH_ENABLE, INT_CTL_MODEM_ENABLE, INT_CTL_CHIP_ENABLE properties.
- Note that this property only provides for global enabling/disabling of the HW interrupt indication on the NIRQ output pin. An internal interrupt event may still be generated even if the indication on the NIRQ output pin is disabled. The interrupt event may always be monitored by polling a GPIO pin, or via GET_INT_STATUS, GET_CHIP_STATUS, GET_PH_STATUS, or GET_MODEM_STATUS commands.
Default: 0x04
Register View:

	INT_CTL_ENABLE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	0	0	0	0	0	CHIP_INT_STATUS_EN	MODEM_INT_STATUS_EN	PH_INT_STATUS_EN
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x1	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

INT_CTL_ENABLE

CHIP_INT_STATUS_EN

Description:

Enables chip interrupts to assert NIRQ.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disable pending interrupts in the Chip Status group from asserting nNIRQ.	revB1A
ENABLED	1	Enable pending interrupts in the Chip Status group to assert nNIRQ.	revB1A

MODEM_INT_STATUS_EN

Description:

Enables modem interrupts to assert NIRQ.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disable pending interrupts in rx mode group from asserting nNIRQ.
ENABLED	1	Enable pending interrupts in rx mode group to assert nNIRQ.

PH_INT_STATUS_EN

Description:

Enables packet handler interrupts to assert NIRQ.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disable pending interrupts in tx mode group from asserting nNIRQ.
ENABLED	1	Enable pending interrupts in tx mode group to assert nNIRQ.

INT_CTL_PH_ENABLE

Group: 0x01
Index: 0x01

Summary: Enable individual interrupt sources within the Packet Handler Interrupt Group to generate a HW interrupt on the NIRQ output pin.
Purpose:
- Enable individual interrupt sources within the Packet Handler Interrupt Group in order to generate a HW interrupt at the NIRQ output pin.
- In order to fully enable a HW interrupt, it is necessary to enable both the individual interrupt source (within this property) as well as the corresponding interrupt group (e.g., set INT_CTL_ENABLE:PH_INT_STATUS_EN).
- Note that even if an interrupt source is not enabled to generate a HW NIRQ interrupt, the given interrupt event still may occur inside the chip and may be monitored by polling a GPIO pin, or via the GET_INT_STATUS or GET_PH_STATUS commands.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	INT_CTL_PH_ENABLE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x01	FILTER_MATCH_EN	FILTER_MISS_EN	PACKET_SENT_EN	PACKET_RX_EN	CRC_ERROR_EN	ALT_CRC_ERROR_EN	TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY_EN	RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL_EN
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

INT_CTL_PH_ENABLE

FILTER_MATCH_EN

Description:

If set, Enables FILTER_MATCH interrupt on rising edge of FILTER_MATCH status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

FILTER_MISS_EN

Description:

If set, Enables FILTER_MISS interrupt on rising edge of FILTER_MISS status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

PACKET_SENT_EN

Description:

If set, Enables PACKET_SENT interrupt on rising edge of PACKET_SENT status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

PACKET_RX_EN

Description:

If set, Enables PACKET_RX interrupt on rising edge of PACKET_RX status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

CRC_ERROR_EN

Description:

If set, Enables CRC_ERROR interrupt on rising edge of CRC_ERROR status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

ALT_CRC_ERROR_EN

Description:

If set, Enables ALT_CRC_ERROR interrupt on rising edge of ALT_CRC_ERROR status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY_EN

Description:

If set, Enables TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY interrupt on rising edge of TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL_EN

Description:

If set, Enables RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL interrupt on rising edge of RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

INT_CTL_MODEM_ENABLE

Group: 0x01
Index: 0x02

Summary: Enable individual interrupt sources within the Modem Interrupt Group to generate a HW interrupt on the NIRQ output pin.
Purpose:
- Enable individual interrupt sources within the Modem Interrupt Group in order to generate a HW interrupt at the NIRQ output pin.
- In order to fully enable a HW interrupt, it is necessary to enable both the individual interrupt source (within this property) as well as the corresponding interrupt group (e.g., set INT_CTL_ENABLE:MODEM_INT_STATUS_EN ).
- Note that even if an interrupt source is not enabled to generate a HW NIRQ interrupt, the given interrupt event still may occur inside the chip and may be monitored by polling a GPIO pin, or via the GET_INT_STATUS or GET_MODEM_STATUS commands.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	INT_CTL_MODEM_ENABLE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x02	RSSI_LATCH_EN	POSTAMBLE_DETECT_EN	INVALID_SYNC_EN	RSSI_JUMP_EN	RSSI_EN	INVALID_PREAMBLE_EN	PREAMBLE_DETECT_EN	SYNC_DETECT_EN
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

INT_CTL_MODEM_ENABLE

RSSI_LATCH_EN

Description:

If set, Enables RSSI_LATCH interrupt on rising edge of RSSI_LATCH status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

POSTAMBLE_DETECT_EN

Description:

If set, Enables POSTAMBLE_DETECT interrupt on rising edge of POSTAMBLE_DETECT status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

INVALID_SYNC_EN

Description:

If set, Enables INVALID_SYNC interrupt on rising edge of INVALID_SYNC status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

RSSI_JUMP_EN

Description:

If set, Enables RSSI_JUMP interrupt on rising edge of RSSI_JUMP status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

RSSI_EN

Description:

If set, Enables RSSI interrupt on rising edge of RSSI status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

INVALID_PREAMBLE_EN

Description:

If set, Enables INVALID_PREAMBLE interrupt on rising edge of INVALID_PREAMBLE status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

PREAMBLE_DETECT_EN

Description:

If set, Enables PREAMBLE_DETECT interrupt on rising edge of PREAMBLE_DETECT status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

SYNC_DETECT_EN

Description:

If set, Enables SYNC_DETECT interrupt on rising edge of SYNC_DETECT status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources. If dual sync words are configured via SYNC_CONFIG2:DUAL_SYNC_EN, then either sync word can trigger this interrupt.

Default:

0x0

INT_CTL_CHIP_ENABLE

Group: 0x01
Index: 0x03

Summary: Enable individual interrupt sources within the Chip Interrupt Group to generate a HW interrupt on the NIRQ output pin.
Purpose:
- Enable individual interrupt sources within the Chip Interrupt Group in order to generate a HW interrupt at the NIRQ output pin.
- In order to fully enable a HW interrupt, it is necessary to enable both the individual interrupt source (within this property) as well as the corresponding interrupt group (e.g., set INT_CTL_ENABLE:CHIP_INT_STATUS_EN).
- Note that even if an interrupt source is not enabled to generate a HW NIRQ interrupt, the given interrupt event still may occur inside the chip and may be monitored by polling a GPIO pin, or via the GET_INT_STATUS or GET_CHIP_STATUS commands.
Default: 0x04
Register View:

	INT_CTL_CHIP_ENABLE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x03	0	CAL_EN	FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR_EN	STATE_CHANGE_EN	CMD_ERROR_EN	CHIP_READY_EN	LOW_BATT_EN	WUT_EN
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x1	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

INT_CTL_CHIP_ENABLE

CAL_EN

Description:

If set, Enables CAL interrupt on rising edge of CAL status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR_EN

Description:

If set, Enables FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR interrupt on rising edge of FIFO_UNDERFLOW_OVERFLOW_ERROR status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

STATE_CHANGE_EN

Description:

If set, Enables STATE_CHANGE interrupt on rising edge of STATE_CHANGE status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

CMD_ERROR_EN

Description:

If set, Enables CMD_ERROR interrupt on rising edge of CMD_ERROR status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

CHIP_READY_EN

Description:

If set, Enables CHIP_READY interrupt on rising edge of CHIP_READY status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x1

LOW_BATT_EN

Description:

If set, Enables LOW_BATT interrupt on rising edge of LOW_BATT status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

WUT_EN

Description:

If set, Enables WUT interrupt on rising edge of WUT status bit. See the status bits in GET_INT_STATUS for more details on the interrupt sources.

Default:

0x0

FRR_CTL

FRR_CTL_A_MODE

Group: 0x02
Index: 0x00

Summary: Fast Response Register A Configuration.
Purpose:
- The chip provides four Fast Response Registers (FRR) that may be read immediately without the need to monitor and check CTS, thus improving the speed at which the contents may be retrieved.
- The FRR_CTL_X_MODE properties are used to select the specific parameter values (selected from the enumeration list below) that will be returned by the FRR_X_READ commands. This property selects the parameter held in FRR_A and returned by the FRR_A_READ command.
- The FRR registers may be read in a burst fashion through the FRR_X_READ commands. After the initial 16 clock cycles, each additional eight clock cycles will clock out the contents of the next fast response register in a circular fashion. Example: If the FRR_A_READ command is issued, the registers will be read in the order A-B-C-D, while if the FRR_B_READ command is issued, the registers will be read in the order B-C-D-A, etc.
Default: 0x01
Register View:

	FRR_CTL_A_MODE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	FRR_A_MODE
	*Default*
	0x1

Field Details:

FRR_CTL_A_MODE

FRR_A_MODE[7:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disabled. Will always read back 0.	revB1A
INT_STATUS	1	Global status.	revB1A
INT_PEND	2	Global interrupt pending.	revB1A
INT_PH_STATUS	3	Packet Handler status.	revB1A
INT_PH_PEND	4	Packet Handler interrupt pending.	revB1A
INT_MODEM_STATUS	5	Modem status.	revB1A
INT_MODEM_PEND	6	Modem interrupt pending.	revB1A
INT_CHIP_STATUS	7	Chip status.	revB1A
INT_CHIP_PEND	8	Chip status interrupt pending.	revB1A
CURRENT_STATE	9	Current state.	revB1A
LATCHED_RSSI	10	Latched RSSI value as defined in MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL:LATCH.	revB1A

FRR_CTL_B_MODE

Group: 0x02
Index: 0x01

Summary: Fast Response Register B Configuration.
Purpose:
- This property selects the parameter held in FRR_B and returned by the FRR_B_READ command.
- Please refer to the text description for FRR_CTL_A_MODE for more details regarding the Fast Response Register (FRR) function.
Default: 0x02
Register View:

	FRR_CTL_B_MODE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x01	FRR_B_MODE
	*Default*
	0x2

Field Details:

FRR_CTL_B_MODE

FRR_B_MODE[7:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disabled. Will always read back 0.	revB1A
INT_STATUS	1	Global status.	revB1A
INT_PEND	2	Global interrupt pending.	revB1A
INT_PH_STATUS	3	Packet Handler status.	revB1A
INT_PH_PEND	4	Packet Handler interrupt pending.	revB1A
INT_MODEM_STATUS	5	Modem status.	revB1A
INT_MODEM_PEND	6	Modem interrupt pending.	revB1A
INT_CHIP_STATUS	7	Chip status.	revB1A
INT_CHIP_PEND	8	Chip status interrupt pending.	revB1A
CURRENT_STATE	9	Current state.	revB1A
LATCHED_RSSI	10	Latched RSSI value as defined in MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL:LATCH.	revB1A

FRR_CTL_C_MODE

Group: 0x02
Index: 0x02

Summary: Fast Response Register C Configuration.
Purpose:
- This property selects the parameter held in FRR_C and returned by the FRR_C_READ command.
- Please refer to the text description for FRR_CTL_A_MODE for more details regarding the Fast Response Register (FRR) function.
Default: 0x09
Register View:

	FRR_CTL_C_MODE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x02	FRR_C_MODE
	*Default*
	0x9

Field Details:

FRR_CTL_C_MODE

FRR_C_MODE[7:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disabled. Will always read back 0.	revB1A
INT_STATUS	1	Global status.	revB1A
INT_PEND	2	Global interrupt pending.	revB1A
INT_PH_STATUS	3	Packet Handler status.	revB1A
INT_PH_PEND	4	Packet Handler interrupt pending.	revB1A
INT_MODEM_STATUS	5	Modem status.	revB1A
INT_MODEM_PEND	6	Modem interrupt pending.	revB1A
INT_CHIP_STATUS	7	Chip status.	revB1A
INT_CHIP_PEND	8	Chip status interrupt pending.	revB1A
CURRENT_STATE	9	Current state.	revB1A
LATCHED_RSSI	10	Latched RSSI value as defined in MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL:LATCH.	revB1A

FRR_CTL_D_MODE

Group: 0x02
Index: 0x03

Summary: Fast Response Register D Configuration.
Purpose:
- This property selects the parameter held in FRR_D and returned by the FRR_D_READ command.
- Please refer to the text description for FRR_CTL_A_MODE for more details regarding the Fast Response Register (FRR) function.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	FRR_CTL_D_MODE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x03	FRR_D_MODE
	*Default*
	0x0

Field Details:

FRR_CTL_D_MODE

FRR_D_MODE[7:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disabled. Will always read back 0.	revB1A
INT_STATUS	1	Global status.	revB1A
INT_PEND	2	Global interrupt pending.	revB1A
INT_PH_STATUS	3	Packet Handler status.	revB1A
INT_PH_PEND	4	Packet Handler interrupt pending.	revB1A
INT_MODEM_STATUS	5	Modem status.	revB1A
INT_MODEM_PEND	6	Modem interrupt pending.	revB1A
INT_CHIP_STATUS	7	Chip status.	revB1A
INT_CHIP_PEND	8	Chip status interrupt pending.	revB1A
CURRENT_STATE	9	Current state.	revB1A
LATCHED_RSSI	10	Latched RSSI value as defined in MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL:LATCH.	revB1A

PREAMBLE

PREAMBLE_TX_LENGTH

Group: 0x10
Index: 0x00

Summary: Configure length of TX Preamble.
Purpose:
- This property is used to configure the length of the Preamble field in TX mode for both Standard and Non-Standard Preambles.
- This property is not used by the chip in RX mode except when receiving a Non-Standard Preamble. In such a case, this property must be configured with the expected Preamble length (to provide an upper timeout limit on the Sync Word search algorithm).
- This property is only applicable in TX Packet Handler FIFO mode; if TX Direct Synchronous or TX Direct Asynchronous mode is selected (see MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), the entire transmission is obtained from a real-time TXDATA input stream on a GPIO pin and no automatic field construction is possible.
- The units of this property are in either nibbles or bytes, depending upon the value of PREAMBLE_CONFIG:LENGTH_CONFIG.
- Setting PREAMBLE_TX_LENGTH = 0x00 is a valid value, and will result in skipping transmission of the Preamble field; in such a case, the Sync Word will be the first transmitted field.
Default: 0x08
Register View:

	PREAMBLE_TX_LENGTH
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	TX_LENGTH
	*Default*
	0x8

Field Details:

PREAMBLE_TX_LENGTH

TX_LENGTH[7:0]

Description:

Length of the TX Preamble to send, in units of nibbles or bytes (depending upon the value of PREAMBLE_CONFIG:LENGTH_CONFIG).

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

Default:

0x8

PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_1

Group: 0x10
Index: 0x01

Summary: Configuration of reception of a packet with a Standard Preamble pattern.
Purpose:
- The fields in this property are applicable only in RX mode, and apply primarily to reception of Standard Preamble patterns (e.g., 1010 or 0101 patterns).
- However, see note on required configuration of RX_THRESH during reception of Non-Standard Preamble patterns.
Default: 0x14
Register View:

	PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_1
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x01	SKIP_SYNC_TIMEOUT	RX_THRESH
	*Default*
	0x0	0x14

Field Details:

PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_1

SKIP_SYNC_TIMEOUT

Description:

During reception of a Standard Preamble pattern, the chip recognizes the start of the Sync Word field as a sequence of bits that does not match a ...1010... pattern. Detection of the Sync Word is expected to occur soon thereafter (within the programmed length of the Sync Word field).
This bit affects the timeout function only during reception of a Standard Preamble; it is not possible to skip the Sync Word timeout function during reception of a Non-Standard Preamble.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLE	0	If Sync Word is not found the system will timeout and return to searching for Preamble.
ENABLE	1	Sync Word search timeout is ignored and the chip remains continuously searching for Sync Word.

RX_THRESH[6:0]

Description:

Configures the number of standard preamble bits (e.g., 1010 or 0101) that must be consecutively received to detect a valid preamble. Bit errors are not allowed during qualification of a Standard Preamble.
This field does NOT determine the detection threshold during reception of a Non-Standard Preamble (this is set by PREAMBLE_CONFIG_NSTD:PATTERN_LENGTH). However, when receiving a Non-Standard Preamble this field should be configured to a moderate value (e.g., 0x14 to 0x20) else premature timeout of the search for Sync Word may occur.
Detection of a PREAMBLE_VALID signal is typically used by the chip as a trigger event for gear-switching of internal clock timing loops or AFC functionality.
Setting RX_THRESH = 0x00 is a valid value and will result in skipping checking/qualification of the preamble; the PREAMBLE_VALID signal will be asserted HIGH immediately upon entering RX mode.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x7f

Default:

0x14

PREAMBLE_CONFIG_NSTD

Group: 0x10
Index: 0x02

Summary: Configuration of transmission/reception of a packet with a Non-Standard Preamble pattern.
Purpose:
- The fields in this property apply only to transmission and reception of packets with Non-Standard Preamble patterns (e.g., other than 1010 or 0101 patterns).
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PREAMBLE_CONFIG_NSTD
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x02	RX_ERRORS			PATTERN_LENGTH
	*Default*
	0x0			0x0

Field Details:
PREAMBLE_CONFIG_NSTD
RX_ERRORS[2:0]

Description:

Number of bit errors that are allowed during reception and qualification of a Non-Standard Preamble pattern.

No bit errors are allowed when configured to receive a Standard Preamble pattern; however, it is possible to configure the chip to receive a Non-Standard Preamble but define the pattern to match that of a Standard Preamble, thus providing a means for tolerating bit errors.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x7

Default:

0x0

PATTERN_LENGTH[4:0]

Description:

This value (plus 1) specifies the length (in bits) of the repeating pattern that defines the Non-Standard Preamble. The actual values of the bits in the pattern are specified within the PREAMBLE_PATTERN_XX properties; the PATTERN_LENGTH field simply determines how many of those specified bit values are transmitted as a repeating pattern.

In TX mode, if the total length of the TX preamble (as defined by the PREAMBLE_TX_LENGTH property) is longer than PATTERN_LENGTH, the pattern will be transmitted repeatedly as necessary.

In RX mode during reception of a Non-Standard Preamble, this field determines the number of preamble bits that must be received to detect a valid preamble. That is, the PATTERN_LENGTH field provides a similar Detection Threshold functionality for a Non-Standard Preamble as PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_1:RX_THRESH provides for a Standard Preamble.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1f

Default:

0x0

PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_2

Group: 0x10
Index: 0x03

Summary: Configuration of timeout periods during reception of a packet with Standard Preamble pattern.
Purpose:
- During initial reception and acquisition of a packet, it is often useful to define a timeout period to limit the amount of time the chip remains on-channel awaiting the incoming packet. This property allows configuration of this preamble search timeout period.
- If a valid preamble is not found within the specified timeout period, an INVALID_PREAMBLE event is generated and may be used to generate an interrupt and/or exit automatically from RX mode.
- The fields in this property are applicable only in RX mode, and only apply to reception of Standard Preamble patterns (e.g., 1010 or 0101 patterns). Detection of INVALID_PREAMBLE is not possible when configured to receive a Non-Standard Preamble pattern.
- Two different timeout configuration fields are provided to allow definition of timeout periods with significantly different lengths and bit resolution.
Default: 0x0f
Register View:

	PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_2
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x03	RX_PREAMBLE_TIMEOUT_EXTEND				RX_PREAMBLE_TIMEOUT
	*Default*
	0x0				0xf

Field Details:
PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_2
RX_PREAMBLE_TIMEOUT_EXTEND[3:0]

Description:

Length of time (in increments of 15 nibbles, i.e., 60 bits, up to a maximum of 225 nibbles) to search for preamble before determining that a preamble does not exist, and an INVALID_PREAMBLE signal/interrupt is generated.

If the value of this field is non-zero, the value of the RX_PREAMBLE_TIMEOUT field is ignored.

This field allows for very long RX timeout periods and is typically used for applications in which the RX dwells on a channel and waits for the TX packet to arrive.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xf

Default:

0x0

RX_PREAMBLE_TIMEOUT[3:0]

Description:

Length of time (in nibbles i.e., 4 bits) to search for preamble before determining that a preamble does not exist, and an INVALID_PREAMBLE signal/interrupt is generated. This length of RX timeout period is typically used for RX channel scanning or hopping applications. This field is only applicable if the value of the RX_PREAMBLE_TIMEOUT_EXTEND field is zero.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xf

Default:

0xf

PREAMBLE_CONFIG

Group: 0x10
Index: 0x04

Summary: General configuration bits for the Preamble field.
Purpose:
- Miscellaneous preamble configuration bits.
Default: 0x21
Register View:

	PREAMBLE_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x04	RX_PREAM_SRC	0	PREAM_FIRST_1_OR_0	LENGTH_CONFIG	MAN_CONST	MAN_ENABLE	STANDARD_PREAM
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x1	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x1

Field Details:

PREAMBLE_CONFIG

RX_PREAM_SRC

Description:

Determines the source of preamble detection in RX.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
STANDARD_PREAM	0	The preamble detection source is determined by PREAMBLE_CONFIG:STANDARD_PREAM. If MODEM_DSA_CTRL1:DSA_EN is enabled, the signal arrival block will help qualify preamble detect.
DSA_ONLY	1	Signal Arrival Detector is used for preamble detection in RX. Ignores setting in PREAMBLE_CONFIG:STANDARD_PREAM.

PREAM_FIRST_1_OR_0

Description:

This bit should be set to match the polarity of the first bit of the transmitted packet. The WDS Calculator should configure this bit correctly as a function of the selected Preamble type (i.e. Standard or Non-Standard) and first defined bit (e.g., Standard 0101 or Standard 1010).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
FIRST_0	0	First transmitted bit in the packet is 0.
FIRST_1	1	First transmitted bit in the packet is 1.

LENGTH_CONFIG

Description:

This bit specifies whether the units of the PREAMBLE_TX_LENGTH property are in increments of nibbles or bytes.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
NIBBLE	0	The units of the PREAMBLE_TX_LENGTH property are in nibbles.
BYTE	1	The units of the PREAMBLE_TX_LENGTH property are in bytes.

MAN_CONST

Description:

Manchester encoding normally operates by replacing each 0 bit with a 10 chip pattern, and each 1 bit with a 01 bit pattern (or vice versa).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
NO_CON	0	When Manchester encoding is enabled across the Preamble field by setting the MAN_ENABLE bit and STANDARD_PREAM=0x2 (i.e., standard preamble pattern is 0101), the post-Manchester transmitted bits will be 10011001. If STANDARD_PREAM=0x1 (i.e., standard preamble pattern is 1010), the post-Manchester transmitted bits will be 01100110.
CONST	1	When Manchester encoding is enabled across the Preamble field by setting the MAN_ENABLE bit and STANDARD_PREAM=0x2, the pre-Manchester preamble pattern will be replaced with a pattern of constant 1's, and the post-Manchester transmitted bits will be 01010101. If STANDARD_PREAM=0x1, the pre-Manchester pattern will be replaced with a pattern of constant 0's, and the post-Manchester transmitted bits will be 10101010.

MAN_ENABLE

Description:

This bit enables or disables Manchester encoding/decoding across only the Preamble field. This bit is applicable in both TX and RX mode.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
NO_MAN	0	Preamble field is not Manchester encoded/decoded.
EN_MAN	1	Preamble field is Manchester encoded/decoded.

STANDARD_PREAM[1:0]

Description:

This field is applicable to both TX and RX modes, but has slightly different meaning in both modes.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
PRE_NS	0	TX Mode: Transmit the Non-Standard Preamble (defined in PREAMBLE_PATTERN_XX) as a repetitive pattern until reaching the number of nibbles/bytes defined in PREAMBLE_TX_LENGTH. RX Mode: Expects to receive the Non-Standard Preamble pattern (defined in PREAMBLE_PATTERN_XX) at least once, and generates a PREAMBLE_VALID signal/interrupt upon the first detection of the number of pattern bits specified by PATTERN_LENGTH.
PRE_1010	1	TX Mode: Transmit a Standard 1010 preamble until reaching the number of nibbles/bytes defined in PREAMBLE_TX_LENGTH. RX Mode: Expects to receive a Standard 1010 or 0101 preamble. In RX mode, a value of 0x1 or 0x2 in this field results in identical operation.
PRE_0101	2	TX Mode: Transmit a Standard 0101 preamble until reaching the number of nibbles/bytes defined in PREAMBLE_TX_LENGTH. RX Mode: Expects to receive a Standard 1010 or 0101 preamble. In RX mode, a value of 0x1 or 0x2 in this field results in identical operation.

PREAMBLE_PATTERN

Group: 0x10
Indexes: 0x05 ... 0x08

Summary: Configuration of the bit values describing a Non-Standard Preamble pattern.
Purpose:
- The PREAMBLE_PATTERN property defines the pattern to be transmitted in TX mode and the pattern expected to be received in RX mode, but only when PREAMBLE_CONFIG:STANDARD_PREAM has been set to 0x0 (i.e., use Non-Standard Preamble).
- The PREAMBLE_PATTERN property is used to define the actual bit values describing the Non-Standard Preamble pattern; PREAMBLE_CONFIG_NSTD:PATTERN_LENGTH is used to define how many bits of the PREAMBLE_PATTERN value is used.
- In TX mode, if the value of PREAMBLE_TX_LENGTH is larger than PREAMBLE_CONFIG_NSTD:PATTERN_LENGTH, the PREAMBLE_PATTERN will be transmitted repeatedly until the full number of bits has been sent.
- In RX mode, the full number of bits defined by PREAMBLE_CONFIG_NSTD:PATTERN_LENGTH must be received once before the PREAMBLE_VALID signal/interrupt is generated.
- If Manchester encoding/decoding is enabled, the values of the PREAMBLE_PATTERN property is expressed in chips (i.e., after Manchester encoding in TX mode, or before Manchester decoding in RX mode).
- The bits of the PREAMBLE_PATTERN are always sent bits 0-31 time-wise (e.g. bit 0 is sent first).
Defaults: 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00
Register View:

	PREAMBLE_PATTERN
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x05	PATTERN[31:24]
0x06	PATTERN[23:16]
0x07	PATTERN[15:8]
0x08	PATTERN[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x05	0x0
0x06	0x0
0x07	0x0
0x08	0x0

Field Details:

PREAMBLE_PATTERN

PATTERN[31:0]

Description:

Bits of the Non-Standard Preamble pattern to be transmitted or expected to be received.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xffffffff

Default:

0x0

PREAMBLE_POSTAMBLE_CONFIG

Group: 0x10
Index: 0x09

Summary: Configuration of Postamble functionality and the Postamble pattern bits.
Purpose:
- The chip provides the ability to search for a specific pattern of byte(s) embedded within the Payload data fields, and to take action or generate an interrupt event upon detection of that pattern. This functionality is referred to as a Postamble.
- This property enables this feature and configures aspects of its functionality, such as the size of the Postamble and the action to take upon detection.
- The chip will only search for a Postamble pattern once the Sync Word is detected (i.e., the Postamble pattern must be embedded within the Payload data fields). It is not possible to use the Postamble functionality if there is no Sync Word or it is not detected.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PREAMBLE_POSTAMBLE_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x09	POSTAMBLE_ENABLE	PKT_VALID_ON_POSTAMBLE	0	0	0	0	POSTAMBLE_SIZE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

PREAMBLE_POSTAMBLE_CONFIG

POSTAMBLE_ENABLE

Description:

Enables/disables detection of a Postamble pattern.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
FALSE	0	Disables detection of a Postamble.
TRUE	1	Enables detection of a Postamble. Detection of a Postamble will generate a POSTAMBLE_DETECT interrupt event.

PKT_VALID_ON_POSTAMBLE

Description:

Selects the action that will be taken upon detection of a Postamble.
This bit has no effect if POSTAMBLE_ENABLE is not set.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
FALSE	0	Reception of the packet will continue after detection of Postamble. However, a POSTAMBLE_DETECT interrupt event is still generated and may be used to notify the host MCU.
TRUE	1	Packet reception will stop upon detection of Postamble and the part will transition to the state specified by START_RX:RXVALID_STATE.

POSTAMBLE_SIZE[1:0]

Description:

Selects the size of the Postamble pattern.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	Postamble word is 8 bits, with the bit pattern defined in POSTAMBLE_PATTERN[31:24].
ENUM_1	1	Postamble word is 16 bits, with the bit pattern defined in POSTAMBLE_PATTERN[31:16].
ENUM_2	2	Postamble word is 24 bits, with the bit pattern defined in POSTAMBLE_PATTERN[31:8].
ENUM_3	3	Postamble word is 32 bits, with the bit pattern defined in POSTAMBLE_PATTERN[31:0].

PREAMBLE_POSTAMBLE_PATTERN

Group: 0x10
Indexes: 0x0a ... 0x0d

Summary: Defines the Postamble pattern.
Purpose:
- Please refer to PREAMBLE_POSTAMBLE_CONFIG for more details regarding configuration of the Postamble functionality.
Defaults: 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00
Register View:

	PREAMBLE_POSTAMBLE_PATTERN
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x0a	POSTAMBLE_PATTERN[31:24]
0x0b	POSTAMBLE_PATTERN[23:16]
0x0c	POSTAMBLE_PATTERN[15:8]
0x0d	POSTAMBLE_PATTERN[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x0a	0x0
0x0b	0x0
0x0c	0x0
0x0d	0x0

Field Details:

PREAMBLE_POSTAMBLE_PATTERN

POSTAMBLE_PATTERN[31:0]

Description:

Defines the Postamble pattern.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xffffffff

Default:

0x0

SYNC

SYNC_CONFIG

Group: 0x11
Index: 0x00

Summary: Sync Word configuration bits.
Purpose:
- Configuration of miscellaneous Sync Word bits. NOTE: each byte of the Sync Word is transmitted/received in little-endian fashion (i.e., least significant bit first). Byte(s) of the Sync Word are transmitted/received in descending order (i.e., Byte 3 first, followed by Byte 2, etc.)
Default: 0x01
Register View:

	SYNC_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	SKIP_TX	RX_ERRORS			4FSK	MANCH	LENGTH
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0			0x0	0x0	0x1

Field Details:

SYNC_CONFIG

SKIP_TX

Description:

This property allows the user to choose if the sync word is transmitted. Note: This field only affects TX operation and does not affect reception of the Sync Word.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
SYNC_XMIT	0	Sync Word is transmitted. The number of bytes comprising the Sync Word is defined by the LENGTH field within this same property.	revB1A
NO_SYNC_XMIT	1	Sync Word is not transmitted. NOTE: the SKIP_TX bit only affects TX operation, and does not affect reception of the Sync Word.	revB1A

RX_ERRORS[2:0]

Description:: Defines the number of bit errors that are allowed in the Sync Word field during receive Sync Word detection.
Min:: 0x0
Max:: 0x7
Default:: 0x0

4FSK

Description:

Configures 4FSK modulation for the Sync Word for TX and RX.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Disable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.
ENUM_1	1	Enable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

MANCH

Description:

If Manchester decoding of the Sync Word in RX mode is enabled, MODEM_MAP_CONTROL:ENMANCH should also be set; this results in an extended search timeout period for the Sync Word to allow for the increased number of bits/chips.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Sync word is not manchester encoded.	revB1A
ENABLED	1	Sync word is manchester encoded.	revB1A

LENGTH[1:0]

Description:

Determines the length of the Sync Word in bytes. The Sync Word is defined in SYNC_BITS and SYNC_BITS2. This length can be modified by ref_prop_field SYNC_CONFIG2 LENGTH_SUB] to allow 2 bit granularity.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
LEN_1_BYTES	0	Sync Word is 1-byte (8 bits) in length. Sync Word byte 3 [31:24] is used, with its value defined in the SYNC_BITS property.	revB1A
LEN_2_BYTES	1	Sync Word is 2-bytes (16 bits) in length. Sync Word bytes 3 and 2 [31:16] are used (in descending order), with their values defined in the SYNC_BITS property.	revB1A
LEN_3_BYTES	2	Sync Word is 3-bytes (24 bits) in length. Sync Word bytes 3, 2, and 1 [31:8] are used (in descending order), with their values defined in the SYNC_BITS property.	revB1A
LEN_4_BYTES	3	Sync Word is 4-bytes (32 bits) in length. Sync Word bytes 3, 2, 1, and 0 [31:0] are used (in descending order), with their values defined in the SYNC_BITS property.	revB1A

SYNC_BITS

Group: 0x11
Indexes: 0x01 ... 0x04

Summary: Sync word.
Purpose:
- Define the value of the Sync Word for both TX and RX operation. NOTE: Although the Sync Word byte(s) are transmitted/received in descending order (i.e., Byte 3 first, followed by Byte 2, etc.), each byte is transmitted/received in little-endian fashion (i.e., least significant bit first).
Defaults: 0x2d,0xd4,0x2d,0xd4
Register View:

	SYNC_BITS
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x01	BITS[31:24]
0x02	BITS[23:16]
0x03	BITS[15:8]
0x04	BITS[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x01	0x2d
0x02	0xd4
0x03	0x2d
0x04	0xd4

Field Details:

SYNC_BITS

BITS[31:0]

Description:

bits

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xffffffff

Default:

0x2dd42dd4

SYNC_CONFIG2

Group: 0x11
Index: 0x05

Summary: Sync Word configuration bits.
Purpose:
- Advanced Sync Configuration Bits.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	SYNC_CONFIG2
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x05	SYNC_ERROR_ONLY_BEGIN	0	0	0	0	0	LENGTH_SUB
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

SYNC_CONFIG2

SYNC_ERROR_ONLY_BEGIN

Description:

When this bit is set, the errors that are allowed in the sync match can only occur at the beginning of the Sync. For example, if 5 errors are allowed, these 5 errors must occur in the first 5 bits of the Sync for a Sync to be detected. If there are one or more errors outside of these first 5 bits, Sync is not detected.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
SYNC_ERROR_RAND	0	Allow errors to be randomly distributed throughout the Sync.
SYNC_ERROR_BEGIN	1	Allow errors to only be at the beginning of the sync word.

LENGTH_SUB[1:0]

Description:

Combined with the length field in SYNC_CONFIG to determine the total number of sync word bits, this field is the subtracted portion of the sync length formula:

$total\_sync\_bits\_on\_air = ((SYNC\_CONFIG\_LENGTH[1:0] + 1) * 8) - (SYNC\_CONFIG2\_LENGTH\_SUB[1:0] * 2) (150 DPI)$

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
SUB_0	0	Use the sync length as defined in SYNC_CONFIG directly, without adjustment.
SUB_2	1	Subract 2 bits from the sync length.
SUB_4	2	Subract 4 bits from the sync length.
SUB_6	3	Subract 6 bits from the sync length.

PKT

PKT_CRC_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x00

Summary: Select a CRC polynomial and seed.
Purpose:
- The chip contains a 32-bit CRC engine for the purpose of generating and comparing a checksum across selected data fields. This property is used to select the desired CRC polynomial and CRC seed value.
- If a 8-bit CRC polynomial is selected, the length of the resulting checksum is 1-bytes. If a 16-bit CRC polynomial is selected, the length of the resulting checksum is 2-bytes. If a 32-bit CRC polynomial is selected, the length of the resulting checksum is 4-bytes.
- The configuration bits in this property are common to both TX and RX modes; however, this property is only applicable when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when PKT_CONFIG1:PH_RX_DISABLE is cleared in RX mode).
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_CRC_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	CRC_SEED	ALT_CRC_POLYNOMIAL			CRC_POLYNOMIAL
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0			0x0

Field Details:

PKT_CRC_CONFIG

CRC_SEED

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
CRC_SEED_0	0	Use all 0's for the CRC Seed.
CRC_SEED_1	1	Use all 1's for the CRC Seed.

ALT_CRC_POLYNOMIAL[2:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
NO_CRC	0	None
ITU_T_CRC8	1	ITU-T CRC8: X8+X2+X+1.
IEC_16	2	IEC-16: X16+X14+X12+X11+X9+X8+X7+X4+X+1.
BAICHEVA_16	3	Baicheva-16: X16+X15+X12+X7+X6+X4+X3+1.
CRC_16_IBM	4	CRC-16 (IBM): X16+X15+X2+1.
CCITT_16	5	CCIT-16: X16+X12+X5+1.
CRC_16_DNP	6	CRC-16-DNP: X16+X13+X12+X11+X10+X8+X6+X5+X2+1.

CRC_POLYNOMIAL[3:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
NO_CRC	0	None
ITU_T_CRC8	1	ITU-T CRC8: X8+X2+X+1.
IEC_16	2	IEC-16: X16+X14+X12+X11+X9+X8+X7+X4+X+1.
BAICHEVA_16	3	Baicheva-16: X16+X15+X12+X7+X6+X4+X3+1.
CRC_16_IBM	4	CRC-16 (IBM): X16+X15+X2+1.
CCITT_16	5	CCIT-16: X16+X12+X5+1.
KOOPMAN	6	Koopman: X32+X30+X29+X28+X26+X20+X19+X17+X16+X15+X11+X10+X7+X6+X4+X2+X+1.
IEEE_802_3	7	IEEE 802.3: X32+X26+X23+X22+X16+X12+X11+X10+X8+X7+X5+X4+X2+X+1.
CASTAGNOLI	8	Castagnoli: X32+X28+X27+X26+X25+X23+X22+X20+X19+X18+X14+X13+X11+X10+X9+X8+X6+1.
CRC_16_DNP	9	CRC-16-DNP: X16+X13+X12+X11+X10+X8+X6+X5+X2+1.

PKT_WHT_POLY

Group: 0x12
Indexes: 0x01 ... 0x02

Summary: 16-bit polynomial value for the PN Generator (e.g., for Data Whitening)
Purpose:
- The chip contains a 16-bit linear feedback shift register (LFSR) for the purpose of generating a pseudo-random number (PN). The resulting PN sequence may be used for data whitening/de-whitening by XOR-ing the output with the data bits of specified fields.
- The PN sequence may also be used a modulation source for the TXDATA stream through configuration of the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property. This is often useful for test purposes (e.g., BER tests).
- The PN sequence generated by the LFSR is determined by the selected 16-bit polynomial and starting seed value. This property defines the polynomial.
- In general, it is desired to select a polynomial value that results in a maximal length run sequence, where the PN pattern length = 2^N - 1 (e.g., pattern length = 511 bits for a PN9 sequence). There may be more than one polynomial value that will result in a PN sequence of a desired length; the following polynomial values are provided as examples for a variety of popular PN sequence lengths.
- - PN6: PKT_WHT_POLY = 0x0030.
- - PN9: PKT_WHT_POLY = 0x0108.
- - PN11: PKT_WHT_POLY = 0x0500.
- - PN13: PKT_WHT_POLY = 0x1B00.
- - PN15: PKT_WHT_POLY = 0x6000.
- Additional properties related to the generation of the PN sequence are PKT_WHT_SEED and PKT_WHT_BIT_NUM.
Defaults: 0x01,0x08
Register View:

	PKT_WHT_POLY
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x01	WHT_POLY[15:8]
0x02	WHT_POLY[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x01	0x1
0x02	0x8

Field Details:

PKT_WHT_POLY

WHT_POLY[15:0]

Description:

Defines the 16-bit PN polynomial value.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xffff

Default:

0x108

PKT_WHT_SEED

Group: 0x12
Indexes: 0x03 ... 0x04

Summary: 16-bit seed value for the PN Generator (e.g., for Data Whitening)
Purpose:
- Defines the 16-bit PN seed value.
Defaults: 0xff,0xff
Register View:

	PKT_WHT_SEED
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x03	WHT_SEED[15:8]
0x04	WHT_SEED[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x03	0xff
0x04	0xff

Field Details:

PKT_WHT_SEED

WHT_SEED[15:0]

Description:

Defines the 16-bit PN seed value.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xffff

Default:

0xffff

PKT_WHT_BIT_NUM

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x05

Summary: Selects which bit of the LFSR (used to generate the PN / data whitening sequence) is used as the output bit for data scrambling.
Purpose:
- Enables software whitening over the packet.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_WHT_BIT_NUM
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x05	SW_WHT_CTRL	SW_CRC_CTRL	PN_DIRECTION	0	WHT_BIT_NUM
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_WHT_BIT_NUM

SW_WHT_CTRL

Description:

Enables software whitening over the packet.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLE	0	Disable the software based data whitening algorithm.
ENABLE	1	Enable the software based data whitening algorithm.

SW_CRC_CTRL

Description:

Enables software-based CRC calculation over the packet, and is only applicable when also using software-based data whitening by setting the SW_WHT_CTRL bit. If not using software-based whitening, CRC functionality must be configured in the Packet Handler (see PKT_CRC_CONFIG).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLE	0	Disable the software based CRC engine.
ENABLE	1	Enable the software based CRC engine.

PN_DIRECTION

Description:

This bit controls the direction data bits are shifted during the whitening operation.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
FORWARD	0	Data bits are shifted from bit 7 down to bit 0, in the same direction the polynomial bits are shifted from bit 8 down to bit 0.
REVERSED	1	Data bits are shifted from bit 0 up to bit 7, in the opposite direction the polynomial bits are shifted from bit 8 down to bit 0.

WHT_BIT_NUM[3:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	Bit 0 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.
ENUM_1	1	Bit 1 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.
ENUM_2	2	Bit 2 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.
ENUM_3	3	Bit 3 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.
ENUM_4	4	Bit 4 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.
ENUM_5	5	Bit 5 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.
ENUM_6	6	Bit 6 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.
ENUM_7	7	Bit 7 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.
ENUM_8	8	Bit 8 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.
ENUM_9	9	Bit 9 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.
ENUM_10	10	Bit 10 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.
ENUM_11	11	Bit 11 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.
ENUM_12	12	Bit 12 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.
ENUM_13	13	Bit 13 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.
ENUM_14	14	Bit 14 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.
ENUM_15	15	Bit 15 is selected as the output bit for data whitening.

PKT_CONFIG1

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x06

Summary: General configuration bits for transmission or reception of a packet.
Purpose:
- In many links, the flow of information is primarily in one direction with only brief acknowledgement (ACK) packets sent in the reverse direction. In such a case, it is inconvenient to re-define the field-level properties (e.g., field length, data whitening, etc.) in between each TX-to-RX-to-TX transition.
- The chip provides for "splitting" the definitions of field-level properties in TX and RX mode. That is, the chip is capable of using one shared set of field-level properties for both TX and RX, or separate sets of field-level properties in TX and RX.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_CONFIG1
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x06	PH_FIELD_SPLIT	PH_RX_DISABLE	4FSK_EN	0	MANCH_POL	CRC_INVERT	CRC_ENDIAN	BIT_ORDER
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_CONFIG1

PH_FIELD_SPLIT

Description:

In many links, the flow of information is primarily in one direction with only brief acknowledgement (ACK) packets sent in the reverse direction. In such a case, it is inconvenient to re-define the field-level properties (e.g., field length, data whitening, etc.) in between each TX-to-RX-to-TX transition.
The chip provides for "splitting" the definitions of field-level properties in TX and RX mode. That is, the chip is capable of using one shared set of field-level properties for both TX and RX, or separate sets of field-level properties in TX and RX.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
FIELD_SHARED	0	Field level properties are shared between TX and RX modes (defined in property addresses 0x120D to 0x1220).
FIELD_SPLIT	1	Field level properties are split between TX and RX modes. TX field-level properties are defined from property address 0x120D to 0x1220, RX field-level properties from 0x1221 to 0x1234.

PH_RX_DISABLE

Description:

This bit controls whether automatic Packet Handling functionality is enabled/disabled in RX mode. Certain data processing functions (e.g., variable length packets, CRC calculation/checking, data whitening, etc.) are not available unless Packet Handling is enabled. Note: Packet Handling is always available in TX mode; there is no similar bit for enabling/disabling Packet Handling in TX mode.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
RX_ENABLED	0	Packet Handler is enabled in RX mode.
RX_DISABLED	1	Packet Handler is disabled in RX mode.

4FSK_EN

Description:

If set, enables 4(G)FSK processing across the selected field. The Modem must be additionally configured for 4(G)FSK demodulation through appropriate setting of the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property; the 4FSK bit simply configures the PH to process the data stream to the RX FIFO as bit pairs (instead of as single bits for 2(G)FSK mode).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLE	0	The modem is not in 4(G)FSK mode.
ENABLE	1	The modem is in 4(G)FSK mode.

MANCH_POL

Description:

Manchester encoding operates by replacing each bit with a two-chip pattern. This bit selects the polarity of Manchester encoding/decoding.
The selected coding polarity is applied to all fields in the packet; it is not possible to select the coding polarity on a field-by-field basis.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
PATTERN_10	0	0 is encoded to/decoded from a 10 Manchester pattern, and a 1 is encoded to/decoded from a 01 Manchester pattern.
PATTERN_01	1	0 is encoded to/decoded from a 01 Manchester pattern, and a 1 is encoded to/decoded from a 10 Manchester pattern.

CRC_INVERT

Description:

This bit determines whether each bit in the transmitted or received CRC checksum is inverted in polarity.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
NO_INVERT	0	Transmit/receive each CRC checksum bit with non-inverted polarity.
INVERT_CRC	1	In TX mode, calculate the CRC checksum and then invert the polarity of each checksum bit before transmission. In RX mode, invert the polarity of each received CRC checksum bit prior to comparison. In both modes, the data in the FIFOs remains unaltered.

CRC_ENDIAN

Description:

This bit selects the order in which the bytes of the CRC checksum are transmitted or received.
Note: if a 16-bit CRC polynomial is selected (in PKT_CRC_CONFIG), the length of the resulting checksum is 2-bytes. If a 32-bit CRC polynomial is selected, the length of the resulting checksum is 4-bytes.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
LSBYTE_FIRST	0	The CRC bytes are received/transmitted in the order: lowest byte to highest byte.
MSBYTE_FIRST	1	The CRC bytes are received/transmitted in the order: highest byte to lowest byte.

BIT_ORDER

Description:

This bit selects the transmission/reception order for the bits in all data fields. Note: The Preamble and Sync Word fields are always transmitted or received LSB first (little-endian), regardless of the state of this bit.
This bit does not affect the transmission/reception order of the bytes. Example: the transmission of bytes will match the order in which they are stored in the TX FIFO. However, this bit selects whether each byte is transmitted or received in big-endian or little-endian fashion.
In RX mode, received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) always reflect their true time-wise sequence on the air interface; bit order inversion is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
MSBIT_FIRST	0	MSB first for all bytes in data fields (big-endian). Bit 7 is transmitted/received first, time-wise.
LSBIT_FIRST	1	LSB first for all bytes in data fields (little-endian). Bit 0 is transmitted/received first, time-wise.

PKT_CONFIG2

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x07

Summary: General packet configuration bits.
Purpose:
- Enables 3 of 6 encoding/decoding. The encoding/decoding is not applied to preamble and sync fields but for all five fields and the CRC.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_CONFIG2
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x07	CRC_BIT_ENDIAN	CRC_PADDING	ALT_CRC_SEED	EN_3_OF_6	0	0	0	0
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_CONFIG2

CRC_BIT_ENDIAN

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
MSBIT_FIRST	0	CRC is transmitted most significant bit first. Bit 7 transmitted first timewise.
LSBIT_FIRST	1	CRC is transmitted least significant bit first. Bit 0 transmitted first timewise.

CRC_PADDING

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
NO_PADDING	0	CRC engine does not pad if message length is less than 32 bits.
PAD_ZEROS	1	CRC engine pads zeros if the message length is less than 32 bits.

ALT_CRC_SEED

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ALT_CRC_SEED_0	0	Use all 0's for the CRC Seed.
ALT_CRC_SEED_1	1	Use all 1's for the CRC Seed.

EN_3_OF_6

Description:

Enables 3 of 6 encoding/decoding. The encoding/decoding is not applied to preamble and sync fields but for all five fields and the CRC.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Data encoding 3 of 6 is disabled.
ENABLED	1	Data encoding 3 of 6 is enabled.

PKT_LEN

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x08

Summary: Configuration bits for reception of a variable length packet.
Purpose:
- The chip supports reception of a variable length packet. This property configures parameters associated with variable length packet functionality.
- This property is applicable only in RX mode, and only when the automatic Packet Handler is enabled (i.e.,PKT_CONFIG1:PH_RX_DISABLE is cleared).
- The length value is received at the end of the field specified by the PKT_LEN_FIELD_SOURCE:SRC_FIELD value. The received length value always describes the variable length of the field pointed to by the DST_FIELD parameter. As the complete packet may consist of other fixed-length fields in addition to the variable-length field, the total packet length may be different than the received length value. The received length value of only the variable-length field may be extracted and returned using the PACKET_INFO command, or may be retrieved directly from the RX FIFO in the event the IN_FIFO bit is set. If using the PACKET_INFO command to retrieve the length value, the command must be issued prior to re-entering RX mode to receive the next packet, as the length value is cleared upon entering RX mode.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_LEN
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x08	0	INFINITE_LEN	ENDIAN	SIZE	IN_FIFO	DST_FIELD
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_LEN

INFINITE_LEN

Description:

Allows for a infinte length packet to be received. Useful for packets greater than can be supported using the 5 fields. If active, after sync detection, data will be placed into the RX FIFO until RX is exited manually by changing the state of the radio.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
NORMAL	0	Normal length packet handler mode. Total packet length is a sum of all lengths specified in the fields.
INFINITE	1	Infinite length packet rx active. The fields will be repeated continuously until RX is manually exited.

ENDIAN

Description:

The received field length value may be either one or two bytes in length. In the event the received field length value is two bytes in length (i.e., the SIZE bit is set), the ENDIAN bit determines whether the received field length value is considered as most significant byte first or least significant byte first.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
LITTLE	0	The received field length value is least significant byte first.
BIG	1	The received field length value is most significant byte first.

SIZE

Description:

The received field length value may be either one or two bytes in length. The SIZE bit determines the length of the received field length value.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	The received field length value is one byte in length.
ENUM_1	1	The received field length value is two bytes in length.

IN_FIFO

Description:

The chip provides the ability to strip off the received field length byte(s) and store only the Payload data bytes in the RX FIFO.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
CUT_OUT	0	The received data bytes containing the length field value are not put in the RX FIFO.
LEAVE_IN	1	The received data bytes containing the field length value are put in the RX FIFO. The stored value represents the value of the received length data bytes, prior to adjustment by the LEN_ADJUST value (if applicable).

DST_FIELD[2:0]

Description:

This value determines which data field will be configured as a variable length field. This value must be greater than the value in the PKT_LEN_FIELD_SOURCE:SRC_FIELD (i.e., the variable length field must be located after the field containing the field length bytes).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	Disables variable length packet mode; the chip receives fixed-length packets with the field lengths specified by the PKT_FIELD_X_LENGTH properties, or specified by the packet length value passed to the START_RX command.
ENUM_1	1	Disallowed value (Field 1 may not be configured as a variable length field).
ENUM_2	2	Field 2 is configured as the variable length field.
ENUM_3	3	Field 3 is configured as the variable length field.
ENUM_4	4	Field 4 is configured as the variable length field.
ENUM_5	5	Field 5 is configured as the variable length field.
ENUM_6	6	Disables variable length packet mode; the chip receives fixed-length packets with the field lengths specified by the PKT_FIELD_X_LENGTH properties. However, the received field length value is captured from the specified SRC_FIELD and may be retrieved with the PKT_INFO command.
ENUM_7	7	Disables variable length packet mode; the chip receives fixed-length packets with the field lengths specified by the PKT_FIELD_X_LENGTH properties. However, the received field length value is captured from the specified SRC_FIELD and may be retrieved with the PKT_INFO command.

PKT_LEN_FIELD_SOURCE

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x09

Summary: Field number containing the received packet length byte(s).
Purpose:
- This property configures the chip for reception of a variable length packet, and defines where the length field is in the packet. The packet length byte(s) must be the last byte(s) in a fixed length field and must precede the variable length field.
- This property is applicable only in RX mode, and only when the automatic Packet Handler is enabled (i.e., the PH_RX_DISABLE bit in the PKT_CONFIG1 property is cleared).
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_LEN_FIELD_SOURCE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x09	0	0	0	0	0	SRC_FIELD
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_LEN_FIELD_SOURCE

SRC_FIELD[2:0]

Description:

This value determines which data field will be processed as containing the packet length byte(s). The SRC_FIELD value must be less than the value of PKT_LEN:DST_FIELD (i.e., the variable length field must be located after the field containing the packet length bytes).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	Field 1 is processed as containing the packet length byte(s).
ENUM_1	1	Field 1 is processed as containing the packet length byte(s).
ENUM_2	2	Field 2 is processed as containing the packet length byte(s).
ENUM_3	3	Field 3 is processed as containing the packet length byte(s).
ENUM_4	4	Field 4 is processed as containing the packet length byte(s).
ENUM_5	5	Disallowed value (Field 5 may not be configured as containing the packet length bytes).

PKT_LEN_ADJUST

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x0a

Summary: Provides for adjustment/offset of the received packet length value (in order to accommodate a variety of methods of defining total packet length).
Purpose:
- It is possible to define the total length of a packet in a variety of ways (e.g., including/excluding the packet length bytes, including/excluding the CRC bytes, etc.) This property provides a means of adjusting/offsetting the received packet length value in order to comply with a wide range of packet length implementations.
- This property is applicable only in RX mode, and only when the automatic Packet Handler is enabled (i.e., the PH_RX_DISABLE bit in the PKT_CONFIG1 property is cleared).
- The value of the LEN_ADJUST field is added to the received value of the packet length byte(s), extracted from the field specified by the SRC_FIELD value in the PKT_LEN_FIELD_SOURCE property. The resulting value is then used to configure the length of the variable length field specified by the DST_FIELD value in the PKT_LEN property.
- The required constant value of the LEN_ADJUST field is typically defined in a protocol specification or regulatory standard, or can be derived from the specification.
- The default processing mode of the chip is that the received packet length value does NOT include the packet length bytes, and does NOT include CRC bytes. In such a case, the LEN_ADJUST field should be set to 0x00.
- If the received packet length value includes the packet length bytes and/or the CRC bytes, its effective value must be reduced by adding a negative offset. In such a case, the LEN_ADJUST field should be set to the negative value of the extra byte count (in 2's complement format). Example: the transmitted packet has a 2-byte packet length field followed by a 10-byte Payload field, and the value contained in the packet length bytes = 0x000C = 12 bytes. The value of LEN_ADJUST should be set = 0xFE = -2.
- The LEN_ADJUST field is a signed value.
- The value of the packet length byte(s) returned by the PACKET_INFO command reflects the value extracted from the received packet, prior to adjustment by the LEN_ADJUST value. The value stored in the RX FIFO (in the event the PKT_LEN:IN_FIFO bit is set) also represents the unadjusted length value.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_LEN_ADJUST
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x0a	LEN_ADJUST
	*Default*
	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_LEN_ADJUST

LEN_ADJUST[7:0]

Description:

The value of the LEN_ADJUST field is added to the received value of the packet length byte(s); the result is used to configure the length of the specified variable length field.

Type:

S8

Min:

-0x80

Max:

0x7f

Default:

0x0

PKT_TX_THRESHOLD

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x0b

Summary: TX FIFO almost empty threshold.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for two separate 64-byte FIFO memories for the purpose of storing transmit and receive data. (When the GLOBAL_CONFIG:FIFO_MODE bit is set, these two FIFOs are combined into a single 129-byte shared FIFO.)
- This property is used to set a threshold value for the TX FIFO. An interrupt event is generated when the amount of empty space in the TX FIFO is equal to or greater than this threshold.
- The TX_FIFO_ALMOST_EMPTY interrupt may be used to signal the host MCU to store more data bytes into the TX FIFO, thus providing a means for handling packets with lengths greater than the size of the TX FIFO (i.e., 64 bytes, or 129 bytes in shared FIFO mode).
Default: 0x30
Register View:

	PKT_TX_THRESHOLD
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x0b	TX_THRESHOLD
	*Default*
	0x30

Field Details:

PKT_TX_THRESHOLD

TX_THRESHOLD[7:0]

Description:

Sets the TX FIFO Almost Empty threshold, in number of bytes.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x40

Default:

0x30

PKT_RX_THRESHOLD

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x0c

Summary: RX FIFO Almost Full threshold.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for two separate 64-byte FIFO memories for the purpose of storing transmit and receive data. (When the GLOBAL_CONFIG:FIFO_MODE bit is set, these two FIFOs are combined into a single 129-byte shared FIFO.)
- This property is used to set a threshold value for the RX FIFO. An interrupt event is generated when the number of bytes stored in the RX FIFO is equal to or greater than this threshold.
- The RX_FIFO_ALMOST_FULL interrupt may be used to signal the host MCU to read more data bytes from the RX FIFO, thus providing a means for handling packets with lengths greater than the size of the RX FIFO (i.e., 64 bytes, or 129 bytes in shared FIFO mode).
Default: 0x30
Register View:

	PKT_RX_THRESHOLD
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x0c	RX_THRESHOLD
	*Default*
	0x30

Field Details:

PKT_RX_THRESHOLD

RX_THRESHOLD[7:0]

Description:

Sets the RX FIFO Almost Full threshold, in number of bytes.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x40

Default:

0x30

PKT_FIELD_1_LENGTH

Group: 0x12
Indexes: 0x0d ... 0x0e

Summary: Unsigned 13-bit Field 1 length value.
Purpose:
- The PKT_FIELD_1_LENGTH properties specify the length of Field 1 in bytes. The field length is an unsigned 13-bit value.
- Partitioning of the Payload into separate fields is provided to support variable length packets, and to allow different forms of data processing (e.g., Manchester encoding, data whitening, etc) across different fields.
- These properties are applicable in TX mode only if the START_TX command is sent with the parameter TX_LEN=0.
- These properties are applicable in RX mode only under the following conditions: a) RX Packet Handling is enabled by clearing PKT_CONFIG1:PH_RX_DISABLE, and b) The START_RX command is sent with the parameter RX_LEN=0, and c) PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is cleared. (If PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is set, the lengths of the various fields in RX mode are determined by the PKT_RX_FIELD_LENGTH_XX properties.)
- A value of zero in this property means that the field is not used. During TX mode, data will be retrieved from the TX FIFO until encountering the first field whose length has been set to zero. During RX mode, data will be stored in the RX FIFO until again encountering the first field whose length has been set to zero. It is possible (although not common) to set the length of Field 1 = 0 bytes, as this would indicate transmission/reception of a packet with no Payload data at all.
- Field 1 cannot be configured as a variable length field, as there is no preceding field that may contain the variable length byte(s).
Defaults: 0x00,0x00
Register View:

	PKT_FIELD_1_LENGTH
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x0d	0	0	0	FIELD_1_LENGTH[12:8]
0x0e	FIELD_1_LENGTH[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x0d	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0
0x0e	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_FIELD_1_LENGTH

FIELD_1_LENGTH[12:0]

Description:

Bits 12 to 0 of the field length.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1fff

Default:

0x0

PKT_FIELD_1_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x0f

Summary: General data processing and packet configuration bits for Field 1.
Purpose:
- Partitioning of the Payload into separate fields is provided to support features such as variable length packets and field-specific data processing (e.g., Manchester encoding, data whitening, etc). This property provides configuration bits for field-specific processing on Field 1.
- The configuration bits in this property are common to both TX and RX modes dependent on PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT; however, this property is only applicable when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when PKT_CONFIG1:PH_RX_DISABLE is cleared in RX mode).
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_FIELD_1_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x0f	0	0	0	4FSK	0	PN_START	WHITEN	MANCH
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
PKT_FIELD_1_CONFIG
4FSK

Description:

The chip supports field-specific configuration of (G)FSK modulation modes, i.e., 2(G)FSK across certain fields and 4(G)FSK across other fields. In such a case, the Modem must be configured for 4(G)FSK operation across the entire packet (by setting the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), and the Packet Handler is then configured on a field-by-field basis to process the data stream from the FIFO as bit pairs (for 4(G)FSK) or single bits (for 2(G)FSK).

When 4(G)FSK is enabled across a field, the PH pulls two bits from the FIFO and sends them to the TX Modulator to be transmitted as one-of-four deviation levels.

When 4(G)FSK is disabled across a field, the PH pulls one bit from the FIFO and replaces it with the appropriate two bits that map to the outer two deviation levels. Although the TX Modulator remains configured for four levels of deviation (by the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), using only the outer two deviation levels effectively results in 2(G)FSK modulation across that field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

PN_START

Description:

The chip contains a linear feedback shift register (LFSR) for the purpose of generating a pseudo-random number (PN). Data whitening/de-whitening may be obtained by XOR-ing the output from the resulting PN sequence with the data bits of specified fields.

This bit controls whether the PN engine is freshly loaded with its seed value (specified in PKT_WHT_SEED_XX) at the start of this field, or whether the PN engine continues calculation from its last state (i.e., from the previous packet). Note: the seed value for the PN engine may only be loaded at the start of Field 1; it is not possible to re-load the seed value at any other place in the packet.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 1 Continue PN generation using last state from previous packet.

ENUM_1 1 Load PN engine with the seed value at the start of Field 1.

WHITEN

Description:

The data whitening/de-whitening function is only available when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when the PH_RX_DISABLE bit in the PKT_CONFIG1 property is cleared in RX mode).

In RX mode, the data de-whitening function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to de-whitening.

Enabling data whitening does not affect the over-the-air data rate.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

MANCH

Description:

Manchester encoding operates by replacing each bit with a two-chip pattern (e.g., each '0' bit with a '10' pattern and each '1' bit with a '01' bit pattern, or vice versa). The desired encoding polarity is selected by PKT_CONFIG1:MANCH_POL.

Enabling Manchester encoding in one or more fields does not affect the over-the-air data rate; each bit/chip within the entire packet is transmitted at the same data rate (specified by the MODEM_DATA_RATE_X properties). Manchester encoding simply affects the number of bits/chips that are sent (e.g., by replacing one bit with two chips).

In RX mode, the Manchester decoding function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to decoding.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable manchester encoding/decoding on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable manchester encoding/decoding on this field.

PKT_FIELD_1_CRC_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x10

Summary: Configuration of CRC control bits across Field 1.
Purpose:
- This property is use to control the calculation, transmission, and checking of CRC across Field 1.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_FIELD_1_CRC_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x10	CRC_START	ALT_CRC_START	SEND_CRC	SEND_ALT_CRC	CHECK_CRC	CHECK_ALT_CRC	CRC_ENABLE	ALT_CRC_ENABLE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_FIELD_1_CRC_CONFIG

CRC_START

Description:

The chip contains a 32-bit CRC engine that may be configured for a variety of polynomials and seed values (refer to the PKT_CRC_CONFIG property). This bit controls whether the CRC engine is freshly loaded with its seed value (PKT_CRC_CONFIG:CRC_SEED) at the start of this field, or whether the CRC engine continues calculation from its last state (i.e., from the previous packet). Note: the seed value for the CRC engine may only be loaded at the start of Field 1; it is not possible to re-load the seed value at any other place in the packet.
This bit is applicable in both TX and RX modes.
If in RX mode and PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set, this bit is ignored and the CRC_START functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Continue CRC calculation using the last state from the previous packet.
ENUM_1	1	Load the CRC engine with the seed value at the start of this field using PKT_CRC_CONFIG:CRC_SEED.

ALT_CRC_START

Description:

The chip contains a 16-bit CRC engine that may be configured for a variety of polynomials and seed values (refer to the PKT_CRC_CONFIG property). This bit controls whether the CRC engine is freshly loaded with its seed value (PKT_CRC_CONFIG:CRC_SEED) at the start of this field, or whether the CRC engine continues calculation from its last state (i.e., from the previous packet). Note: the seed value for the ALT CRC engine may only be loaded at the start of Field 1; it is not possible to re-load the seed value at any other place in the packet.
This bit is applicable in both TX and RX modes.
If in RX mode and PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is set, this bit is ignored and the ALT_CRC_START functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
CONTINUE	0	Continue 16-bit CRC calculation using the last state from the previous packet.
LOAD	1	Load 16-bit CRC engine with seed value at the start of this field using PKT_CRC_CONFIG:CRC_SEED.

SEND_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in TX mode, and determines whether the accumulated CRC checksum will be transmitted at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Do not Transmit CRC at the end of this field.
ENUM_1	1	Transmit CRC at the end of this field.

SEND_ALT_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in TX mode, and determines whether the accumulated ALT CRC checksum will be transmitted at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Do not Transmit ALT CRC at the end of this field.
ENUM_1	1	Transmit ALT CRC at the end of this field.

CHECK_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in RX mode, and determines whether the accumulated CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.
If the PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is set, this bit is ignored and the CHECK_CRC functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Do not check CRC at the end of this field.
ENUM_1	1	Check CRC at the end of this field.

CHECK_ALT_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in RX mode, and determines whether the accumulated ALT CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.
If the PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is set, this bit is ignored and the CHECK_ALT_CRC functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Do not check ALT CRC at the end of this field.
ENUM_1	1	Check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit is applicable in both TX and RX modes, and enables CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the CRC checksum at the end of the field.
If in RX mode and PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set, this bit is ignored and the CRC_ENABLE functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Disable CRC calculation over this field.
ENUM_1	1	Enable CRC calculation over this field.

ALT_CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit is applicable in both TX and RX modes, and enables ALT CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling ALT CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the ALT CRC checksum at the end of the field.
If in RX mode and PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set, this bit is ignored and the ALT_CRC_ENABLE functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Disable ALT CRC calculation over this field.
ENUM_1	1	Enable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

PKT_FIELD_2_LENGTH

Group: 0x12
Indexes: 0x11 ... 0x12

Summary: Unsigned 13-bit Field 2 length value.
Purpose:
- The PKT_FIELD_2_LENGTH properties specify the length of Field 2 in bytes. The field length is an unsigned 13-bit value.
- Field 2 may be configured as a variable length field by setting the appropriate value of PKT_LEN:DST_FIELD; however, it is also necessary that a previous field contain the variable length byte(s). If configured as a variable length field, this property must be set with a value that represents the maximum expected length of the field.
- Please refer to the text description for PKT_FIELD_1_LENGTH for more details regarding field length configuration.
Defaults: 0x00,0x00
Register View:

	PKT_FIELD_2_LENGTH
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x11	0	0	0	FIELD_2_LENGTH[12:8]
0x12	FIELD_2_LENGTH[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x11	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0
0x12	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_FIELD_2_LENGTH

FIELD_2_LENGTH[12:0]

Description:

Bits 12 to 0 of the field length.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1fff

Default:

0x0

PKT_FIELD_2_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x13

Summary: General data processing and packet configuration bits for Field 2.
Purpose:
- Partitioning of the Payload into separate fields is provided to support features such as variable length packets and field-specific data processing (e.g., Manchester encoding, data whitening, etc). This property provides configuration bits for field-specific processing on Field 2.
- The configuration bits in this property are common to both TX and RX modes dependent on PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT; however, this property is only applicable when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when PKT_CONFIG1:PH_RX_DISABLE is cleared in RX mode).
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_FIELD_2_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x13	0	0	0	4FSK	0	0	WHITEN	MANCH
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
PKT_FIELD_2_CONFIG
4FSK

Description:

The chip supports field-specific configuration of (G)FSK modulation modes, i.e., 2(G)FSK across certain fields and 4(G)FSK across other fields. In such a case, the Modem must be configured for 4(G)FSK operation across the entire packet (by setting the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), and the Packet Handler is then configured on a field-by-field basis to process the data stream from the FIFO as bit pairs (for 4(G)FSK) or single bits (for 2(G)FSK).

When 4(G)FSK is enabled across a field, the PH pulls two bits from the FIFO and sends them to the TX Modulator to be transmitted as one-of-four deviation levels.

When 4(G)FSK is disabled across a field, the PH pulls one bit from the FIFO and replaces it with the appropriate two bits that map to the outer two deviation levels. Although the TX Modulator remains configured for four levels of deviation (by the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), using only the outer two deviation levels effectively results in 2(G)FSK modulation across that field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

WHITEN

Description:

The data whitening/de-whitening function is only available when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when the PH_RX_DISABLE bit in the PKT_CONFIG1 property is cleared in RX mode).

In RX mode, the data de-whitening function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to de-whitening.

Enabling data whitening does not affect the over-the-air data rate.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

MANCH

Description:

Manchester encoding operates by replacing each bit with a two-chip pattern (e.g., each '0' bit with a '10' pattern and each '1' bit with a '01' bit pattern, or vice versa). The desired encoding polarity is selected by PKT_CONFIG1:MANCH_POL.

Enabling Manchester encoding in one or more fields does not affect the over-the-air data rate; each bit/chip within the entire packet is transmitted at the same data rate (specified by the MODEM_DATA_RATE_X properties). Manchester encoding simply affects the number of bits/chips that are sent (e.g., by replacing one bit with two chips).

In RX mode, the Manchester decoding function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to decoding.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable manchester encoding/decoding on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable manchester encoding/decoding on this field.

PKT_FIELD_2_CRC_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x14

Summary: Configuration of CRC control bits across Field 2.
Purpose:
- This property is use to control the calculation, transmission, and checking of CRC across Field 2.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_FIELD_2_CRC_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x14	0	0	SEND_CRC	SEND_ALT_CRC	CHECK_CRC	CHECK_ALT_CRC	CRC_ENABLE	ALT_CRC_ENABLE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
PKT_FIELD_2_CRC_CONFIG
SEND_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in TX mode, and determines whether the accumulated CRC checksum will be transmitted at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not Transmit CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Transmit CRC at the end of this field.

SEND_ALT_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in TX mode, and determines whether the accumulated ALT CRC checksum will be transmitted at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not Transmit ALT CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Transmit ALT CRC at the end of this field.

CHECK_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in RX mode, and determines whether the accumulated CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

If the PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is set, this bit is ignored and the CHECK_CRC functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check CRC at the end of this field.

CHECK_ALT_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in RX mode, and determines whether the accumulated ALT CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

If the PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is set, this bit is ignored and the CHECK_ALT_CRC functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit is applicable in both TX and RX modes, and enables CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the CRC checksum at the end of the field.

If in RX mode and PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set, this bit is ignored and the CRC_ENABLE functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable CRC calculation over this field.

ALT_CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit is applicable in both TX and RX modes, and enables ALT CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling ALT CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the ALT CRC checksum at the end of the field.

If in RX mode and PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set, this bit is ignored and the ALT_CRC_ENABLE functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

PKT_FIELD_3_LENGTH

Group: 0x12
Indexes: 0x15 ... 0x16

Summary: Unsigned 13-bit Field 3 length value.
Purpose:
- The PKT_FIELD_3_LENGTH properties specify the length of Field 3 in bytes. The field length is an unsigned 13-bit value.
- Field 3 may be configured as a variable length field by setting the appropriate value of PKT_LEN:DST_FIELD; however, it is also necessary that a previous field contain the variable length byte(s). If configured as a variable length field, this property must be set with a value that represents the maximum expected length of the field.
- Please refer to the text description for PKT_FIELD_1_LENGTH for more details regarding field length configuration.
Defaults: 0x00,0x00
Register View:

	PKT_FIELD_3_LENGTH
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x15	0	0	0	FIELD_3_LENGTH[12:8]
0x16	FIELD_3_LENGTH[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x15	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0
0x16	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_FIELD_3_LENGTH

FIELD_3_LENGTH[12:0]

Description:

Bits 12 to 0 of the field length.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1fff

Default:

0x0

PKT_FIELD_3_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x17

Summary: General data processing and packet configuration bits for Field 3.
Purpose:
- Partitioning of the Payload into separate fields is provided to support features such as variable length packets and field-specific data processing (e.g., Manchester encoding, data whitening, etc). This property provides configuration bits for field-specific processing on Field 3.
- The configuration bits in this property are common to both TX and RX modes dependent on PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT; however, this property is only applicable when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when PKT_CONFIG1:PH_RX_DISABLE is cleared in RX mode).
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_FIELD_3_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x17	0	0	0	4FSK	0	0	WHITEN	MANCH
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
PKT_FIELD_3_CONFIG
4FSK

Description:

The chip supports field-specific configuration of (G)FSK modulation modes, i.e., 2(G)FSK across certain fields and 4(G)FSK across other fields. In such a case, the Modem must be configured for 4(G)FSK operation across the entire packet (by setting the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), and the Packet Handler is then configured on a field-by-field basis to process the data stream from the FIFO as bit pairs (for 4(G)FSK) or single bits (for 2(G)FSK).

When 4(G)FSK is enabled across a field, the PH pulls two bits from the FIFO and sends them to the TX Modulator to be transmitted as one-of-four deviation levels.

When 4(G)FSK is disabled across a field, the PH pulls one bit from the FIFO and replaces it with the appropriate two bits that map to the outer two deviation levels. Although the TX Modulator remains configured for four levels of deviation (by the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), using only the outer two deviation levels effectively results in 2(G)FSK modulation across that field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

WHITEN

Description:

The data whitening/de-whitening function is only available when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when the PH_RX_DISABLE bit in the PKT_CONFIG1 property is cleared in RX mode).

In RX mode, the data de-whitening function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to de-whitening.

Enabling data whitening does not affect the over-the-air data rate.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

MANCH

Description:

Manchester encoding operates by replacing each bit with a two-chip pattern (e.g., each '0' bit with a '10' pattern and each '1' bit with a '01' bit pattern, or vice versa). The desired encoding polarity is selected by PKT_CONFIG1:MANCH_POL.

Enabling Manchester encoding in one or more fields does not affect the over-the-air data rate; each bit/chip within the entire packet is transmitted at the same data rate (specified by the MODEM_DATA_RATE_X properties). Manchester encoding simply affects the number of bits/chips that are sent (e.g., by replacing one bit with two chips).

In RX mode, the Manchester decoding function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to decoding.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable manchester encoding/decoding on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable manchester encoding/decoding on this field.

PKT_FIELD_3_CRC_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x18

Summary: Configuration of CRC control bits across Field 3.
Purpose:
- This property is use to control the calculation, transmission, and checking of CRC across Field 3.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_FIELD_3_CRC_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x18	0	0	SEND_CRC	SEND_ALT_CRC	CHECK_CRC	CHECK_ALT_CRC	CRC_ENABLE	ALT_CRC_ENABLE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
PKT_FIELD_3_CRC_CONFIG
SEND_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in TX mode, and determines whether the accumulated CRC checksum will be transmitted at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not Transmit CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Transmit CRC at the end of this field.

SEND_ALT_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in TX mode, and determines whether the accumulated ALT CRC checksum will be transmitted at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not Transmit ALT CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Transmit ALT CRC at the end of this field.

CHECK_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in RX mode, and determines whether the accumulated CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

If the PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is set, this bit is ignored and the CHECK_CRC functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check CRC at the end of this field.

CHECK_ALT_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in RX mode, and determines whether the accumulated ALT CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

If the PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is set, this bit is ignored and the CHECK_ALT_CRC functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit is applicable in both TX and RX modes, and enables CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the CRC checksum at the end of the field.

If in RX mode and PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set, this bit is ignored and the CRC_ENABLE functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable CRC calculation over this field.

ALT_CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit is applicable in both TX and RX modes, and enables ALT CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling ALT CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the ALT CRC checksum at the end of the field.

If in RX mode and PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set, this bit is ignored and the ALT_CRC_ENABLE functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

PKT_FIELD_4_LENGTH

Group: 0x12
Indexes: 0x19 ... 0x1a

Summary: Unsigned 13-bit Field 4 length value.
Purpose:
- The PKT_FIELD_4_LENGTH properties specify the length of Field 4 in bytes. The field length is an unsigned 13-bit value.
- Field 4 may be configured as a variable length field by setting the appropriate value of PKT_LEN:DST_FIELD; however, it is also necessary that a previous field contain the variable length byte(s). If configured as a variable length field, this property must be set with a value that represents the maximum expected length of the field.
- Please refer to the text description for PKT_FIELD_1_LENGTH for more details regarding field length configuration.
Defaults: 0x00,0x00
Register View:

	PKT_FIELD_4_LENGTH
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x19	0	0	0	FIELD_4_LENGTH[12:8]
0x1a	FIELD_4_LENGTH[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x19	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0
0x1a	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_FIELD_4_LENGTH

FIELD_4_LENGTH[12:0]

Description:

Bits 12 to 0 of the field length.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1fff

Default:

0x0

PKT_FIELD_4_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x1b

Summary: General data processing and packet configuration bits for Field 4.
Purpose:
- Partitioning of the Payload into separate fields is provided to support features such as variable length packets and field-specific data processing (e.g., Manchester encoding, data whitening, etc). This property provides configuration bits for field-specific processing on Field 4.
- The configuration bits in this property are common to both TX and RX modes dependent on PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT; however, this property is only applicable when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when PKT_CONFIG1:PH_RX_DISABLE is cleared in RX mode).
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_FIELD_4_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x1b	0	0	0	4FSK	0	0	WHITEN	MANCH
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
PKT_FIELD_4_CONFIG
4FSK

Description:

The chip supports field-specific configuration of (G)FSK modulation modes, i.e., 2(G)FSK across certain fields and 4(G)FSK across other fields. In such a case, the Modem must be configured for 4(G)FSK operation across the entire packet (by setting the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), and the Packet Handler is then configured on a field-by-field basis to process the data stream from the FIFO as bit pairs (for 4(G)FSK) or single bits (for 2(G)FSK).

When 4(G)FSK is enabled across a field, the PH pulls two bits from the FIFO and sends them to the TX Modulator to be transmitted as one-of-four deviation levels.

When 4(G)FSK is disabled across a field, the PH pulls one bit from the FIFO and replaces it with the appropriate two bits that map to the outer two deviation levels. Although the TX Modulator remains configured for four levels of deviation (by the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), using only the outer two deviation levels effectively results in 2(G)FSK modulation across that field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

WHITEN

Description:

The data whitening/de-whitening function is only available when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when the PH_RX_DISABLE bit in the PKT_CONFIG1 property is cleared in RX mode).

In RX mode, the data de-whitening function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to de-whitening.

Enabling data whitening does not affect the over-the-air data rate.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

MANCH

Description:

Manchester encoding operates by replacing each bit with a two-chip pattern (e.g., each '0' bit with a '10' pattern and each '1' bit with a '01' bit pattern, or vice versa). The desired encoding polarity is selected by PKT_CONFIG1:MANCH_POL.

Enabling Manchester encoding in one or more fields does not affect the over-the-air data rate; each bit/chip within the entire packet is transmitted at the same data rate (specified by the MODEM_DATA_RATE_X properties). Manchester encoding simply affects the number of bits/chips that are sent (e.g., by replacing one bit with two chips).

In RX mode, the Manchester decoding function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to decoding.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable manchester encoding/decoding on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable manchester encoding/decoding on this field.

PKT_FIELD_4_CRC_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x1c

Summary: Configuration of CRC control bits across Field 4.
Purpose:
- This property is use to control the calculation, transmission, and checking of CRC across Field 4.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_FIELD_4_CRC_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x1c	0	0	SEND_CRC	SEND_ALT_CRC	CHECK_CRC	CHECK_ALT_CRC	CRC_ENABLE	ALT_CRC_ENABLE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
PKT_FIELD_4_CRC_CONFIG
SEND_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in TX mode, and determines whether the accumulated CRC checksum will be transmitted at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not Transmit CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Transmit CRC at the end of this field.

SEND_ALT_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in TX mode, and determines whether the accumulated ALT CRC checksum will be transmitted at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not Transmit ALT CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Transmit ALT CRC at the end of this field.

CHECK_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in RX mode, and determines whether the accumulated CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

If the PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is set, this bit is ignored and the CHECK_CRC functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check CRC at the end of this field.

CHECK_ALT_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in RX mode, and determines whether the accumulated ALT CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

If the PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is set, this bit is ignored and the CHECK_ALT_CRC functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit is applicable in both TX and RX modes, and enables CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the CRC checksum at the end of the field.

If in RX mode and PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set, this bit is ignored and the CRC_ENABLE functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable CRC calculation over this field.

ALT_CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit is applicable in both TX and RX modes, and enables ALT CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling ALT CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the ALT CRC checksum at the end of the field.

If in RX mode and PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set, this bit is ignored and the ALT_CRC_ENABLE functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

PKT_FIELD_5_LENGTH

Group: 0x12
Indexes: 0x1d ... 0x1e

Summary: Unsigned 13-bit Field 5 length value.
Purpose:
- The PKT_FIELD_5_LENGTH properties specify the length of Field 5 in bytes. The field length is an unsigned 13-bit value.
- Field 5 may be configured as a variable length field by setting the appropriate value of PKT_LEN:DST_FIELD; however, it is also necessary that a previous field contain the variable length byte(s). If configured as a variable length field, this property must be set with a value that represents the maximum expected length of the field.
- Please refer to the text description for PKT_FIELD_1_LENGTH for more details regarding field length configuration.
Defaults: 0x00,0x00
Register View:

	PKT_FIELD_5_LENGTH
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x1d	0	0	0	FIELD_5_LENGTH[12:8]
0x1e	FIELD_5_LENGTH[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x1d	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0
0x1e	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_FIELD_5_LENGTH

FIELD_5_LENGTH[12:0]

Description:

Bits 12 to 0 of the field length.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1fff

Default:

0x0

PKT_FIELD_5_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x1f

Summary: General data processing and packet configuration bits for Field 5.
Purpose:
- Partitioning of the Payload into separate fields is provided to support features such as variable length packets and field-specific data processing (e.g., Manchester encoding, data whitening, etc). This property provides configuration bits for field-specific processing on Field 5.
- The configuration bits in this property are common to both TX and RX modes dependent on PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT; however, this property is only applicable when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when PKT_CONFIG1:PH_RX_DISABLE is cleared in RX mode).
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_FIELD_5_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x1f	0	0	0	4FSK	0	0	WHITEN	MANCH
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
PKT_FIELD_5_CONFIG
4FSK

Description:

The chip supports field-specific configuration of (G)FSK modulation modes, i.e., 2(G)FSK across certain fields and 4(G)FSK across other fields. In such a case, the Modem must be configured for 4(G)FSK operation across the entire packet (by setting the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), and the Packet Handler is then configured on a field-by-field basis to process the data stream from the FIFO as bit pairs (for 4(G)FSK) or single bits (for 2(G)FSK).

When 4(G)FSK is enabled across a field, the PH pulls two bits from the FIFO and sends them to the TX Modulator to be transmitted as one-of-four deviation levels.

When 4(G)FSK is disabled across a field, the PH pulls one bit from the FIFO and replaces it with the appropriate two bits that map to the outer two deviation levels. Although the TX Modulator remains configured for four levels of deviation (by the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), using only the outer two deviation levels effectively results in 2(G)FSK modulation across that field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

WHITEN

Description:

The data whitening/de-whitening function is only available when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when the PH_RX_DISABLE bit in the PKT_CONFIG1 property is cleared in RX mode).

In RX mode, the data de-whitening function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to de-whitening.

Enabling data whitening does not affect the over-the-air data rate.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

MANCH

Description:

Manchester encoding operates by replacing each bit with a two-chip pattern (e.g., each '0' bit with a '10' pattern and each '1' bit with a '01' bit pattern, or vice versa). The desired encoding polarity is selected by PKT_CONFIG1:MANCH_POL.

Enabling Manchester encoding in one or more fields does not affect the over-the-air data rate; each bit/chip within the entire packet is transmitted at the same data rate (specified by the MODEM_DATA_RATE_X properties). Manchester encoding simply affects the number of bits/chips that are sent (e.g., by replacing one bit with two chips).

In RX mode, the Manchester decoding function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to decoding.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable manchester encoding/decoding on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable manchester encoding/decoding on this field.

PKT_FIELD_5_CRC_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x20

Summary: Configuration of CRC control bits across Field 5.
Purpose:
- This property is use to control the calculation, transmission, and checking of CRC across Field 5.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_FIELD_5_CRC_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x20	0	0	SEND_CRC	SEND_ALT_CRC	CHECK_CRC	CHECK_ALT_CRC	CRC_ENABLE	ALT_CRC_ENABLE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
PKT_FIELD_5_CRC_CONFIG
SEND_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in TX mode, and determines whether the accumulated CRC checksum will be transmitted at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not Transmit CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Transmit CRC at the end of this field.

SEND_ALT_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in TX mode, and determines whether the accumulated ALT CRC checksum will be transmitted at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not Transmit ALT CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Transmit ALT CRC at the end of this field.

CHECK_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in RX mode, and determines whether the accumulated CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

If the PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is set, this bit is ignored and the CHECK_CRC functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check CRC at the end of this field.

CHECK_ALT_CRC

Description:

This bit is applicable only in RX mode, and determines whether the accumulated ALT CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

If the PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is set, this bit is ignored and the CHECK_ALT_CRC functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit is applicable in both TX and RX modes, and enables CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the CRC checksum at the end of the field.

If in RX mode and PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set, this bit is ignored and the CRC_ENABLE functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable CRC calculation over this field.

ALT_CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit is applicable in both TX and RX modes, and enables ALT CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling ALT CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the ALT CRC checksum at the end of the field.

If in RX mode and PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set, this bit is ignored and the ALT_CRC_ENABLE functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_RX_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

PKT_RX_FIELD_1_LENGTH

Group: 0x12
Indexes: 0x21 ... 0x22

Summary: Unsigned 13-bit RX Field 1 length value.
Purpose:
- The PKT_RX_FIELD_1_LENGTH properties specify the length of Field 1 in bytes. The field length is an unsigned 13-bit value.
- Partitioning of the Payload into separate fields is provided to support variable length packets, and to allow different forms of data processing (e.g., Manchester encoding, data whitening, etc) across different fields.
- These properties are applicable in RX mode only under the following conditions: a) RX Packet Handling is enabled by clearing the PH_RX_DISABLE bit in the PKT_CONFIG1 property, and b) The START_RX command is sent with the parameter RX_LEN=0, and c) PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set. (If PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is cleared, the lengths of the various fields in RX mode are determined by the PKT_FIELD_LENGTH_XX properties, shared between TX and RX modes.)
- A value of zero in this property means that the field is not used. During RX mode, data will be stored in the RX FIFO until again encountering the first field whose length has been set to zero.
- It is possible (although not common) to set the length of Field 1 = 0 bytes, as this would indicate transmission/reception of a packet with no Payload data at all.
- Field 1 cannot be configured as a variable length field, as there is no preceding field that may contain the variable length byte(s).
Defaults: 0x00,0x00
Register View:

	PKT_RX_FIELD_1_LENGTH
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x21	0	0	0	RX_FIELD_1_LENGTH[12:8]
0x22	RX_FIELD_1_LENGTH[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x21	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0
0x22	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_RX_FIELD_1_LENGTH

RX_FIELD_1_LENGTH[12:0]

Description:

rx_field_length

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1fff

Default:

0x0

PKT_RX_FIELD_1_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x23

Summary: General data processing and packet configuration bits for RX Field 1.
Purpose:
- Partitioning of the Payload into separate fields is provided to support features such as variable length packets and field-specific data processing (e.g., Manchester encoding, data whitening, etc). This property provides configuration bits for field-specific processing on RX Field 1.
- This property is not applicable in TX mode.
- This property is applicable in RX mode only under the following conditions:
- RX Packet Handling is enabled by clearing PKT_CONFIG1:PH_RX_DISABLE, and
- PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set. If the PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is cleared, the general packet configuration bits for the various fields in RX mode are determined by the PKT_FIELD_X_CONFIG properties (shared between TX and RX modes).
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_RX_FIELD_1_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x23	0	0	0	4FSK	0	PN_START	WHITEN	MANCH
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
PKT_RX_FIELD_1_CONFIG
4FSK

Description:

The chip supports field-specific configuration of (G)FSK modulation modes, i.e., 2(G)FSK across certain fields and 4(G)FSK across other fields. In such a case, the Modem must be configured for 4(G)FSK operation across the entire packet (by setting the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), and the Packet Handler is then configured on a field-by-field basis to process the data stream from the FIFO as bit pairs (for 4(G)FSK) or single bits (for 2(G)FSK).

When 4(G)FSK is enabled across a field, the PH pulls two bits from the FIFO and sends them to the TX Modulator to be transmitted as one-of-four deviation levels.

When 4(G)FSK is disabled across a field, the PH pulls one bit from the FIFO and replaces it with the appropriate two bits that map to the outer two deviation levels. Although the TX Modulator remains configured for four levels of deviation (by the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), using only the outer two deviation levels effectively results in 2(G)FSK modulation across that field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

PN_START

Description:

The chip contains a linear feedback shift register (LFSR) for the purpose of generating a pseudo-random number (PN). Data whitening/de-whitening may be obtained by XOR-ing the output from the resulting PN sequence with the data bits of specified fields.

This bit controls whether the PN engine is freshly loaded with its seed value (specified in PKT_WHT_SEED_XX) at the start of this field, or whether the PN engine continues calculation from its last state (i.e., from the previous packet). Note: the seed value for the PN engine may only be loaded at the start of Field 1; it is not possible to re-load the seed value at any other place in the packet.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 1 Continue PN generation using last state from previous packet.

ENUM_1 1 Load PN engine with the seed value at the start of Field 1.

WHITEN

Description:

The data whitening/de-whitening function is only available when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when the PH_RX_DISABLE bit in the PKT_CONFIG1 property is cleared in RX mode).

In RX mode, the data de-whitening function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to de-whitening.

Enabling data whitening does not affect the over-the-air data rate.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

MANCH

Description:

Manchester encoding operates by replacing each bit with a two-chip pattern (e.g., each '0' bit with a '10' pattern and each '1' bit with a '01' bit pattern, or vice versa). The desired encoding polarity is selected by PKT_CONFIG1:MANCH_POL.

Enabling Manchester encoding in one or more fields does not affect the over-the-air data rate; each bit/chip within the entire packet is transmitted at the same data rate (specified by the MODEM_DATA_RATE_X properties). Manchester encoding simply affects the number of bits/chips that are sent (e.g., by replacing one bit with two chips).

In RX mode, the Manchester decoding function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to decoding.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable Manchester decoding on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable Manchester decoding on this field.

PKT_RX_FIELD_1_CRC_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x24

Summary: Configuration of CRC control bits across RX Field 1.
Purpose:
- This property is use to control the calculation, transmission, and checking of CRC across RX Field 1.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_RX_FIELD_1_CRC_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x24	CRC_START	ALT_CRC_START	0	0	CHECK_CRC	CHECK_ALT_CRC	CRC_ENABLE	ALT_CRC_ENABLE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_RX_FIELD_1_CRC_CONFIG

CRC_START

Description:

The chip contains a 32-bit CRC engine that may be configured for a variety of polynomials and seed values (refer to the PKT_CRC_CONFIG property). This bit controls whether the CRC engine is freshly loaded with its seed value (PKT_CRC_CONFIG:CRC_SEED) at the start of this field, or whether the CRC engine continues calculation from its last state (i.e., from the previous packet). Note: the seed value for the CRC engine may only be loaded at the start of Field 1. It is not possible to re-load the seed value at any other place in the packet.
This bit is only applicable if in RX mode and PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set. If the PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is cleared, this bit is ignored and the CRC_START functionality is obtained from the appropriate PKT_FIELD_X_CRC_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Continue CRC calculation using the last state from the previous packet.
ENUM_1	1	Load the CRC engine with the seed value at the start of this field using PKT_CRC_CONFIG:CRC_SEED.

ALT_CRC_START

Description:

The chip contains a 16-bit CRC engine that may be configured for a variety of polynomials and seed values (refer to the PKT_CRC_CONFIG property). This bit controls whether the CRC engine is freshly loaded with its seed value (PKT_CRC_CONFIG:CRC_SEED) at the start of this field, or whether the CRC engine continues calculation from its last state (i.e., from the previous packet). Note: the seed value for the ALT CRC engine may only be loaded at the start of Field 1. It is not possible to re-load the seed value at any other place in the packet.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
CONTINUE	0	Continue 16-bit CRC calculation using the last state from the previous packet.
LOAD	1	Load 16-bit CRC engine with seed value at the start of this field using PKT_CRC_CONFIG:CRC_SEED.

CHECK_CRC

Description:

This determines whether the accumulated CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Do not check CRC at the end of this field.
ENUM_1	1	Check CRC at the end of this field.

CHECK_ALT_CRC

Description:

This bit determines whether the accumulated ALT CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Do not check ALT CRC at the end of this field.
ENUM_1	1	Check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit enables CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the CRC checksum at the end of the field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Disable CRC calculation over this field.
ENUM_1	1	Enable CRC calculation over this field.

ALT_CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit enables ALT CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling ALT CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the ALT CRC checksum at the end of the field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Disable ALT CRC calculation over this field.
ENUM_1	1	Enable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

PKT_RX_FIELD_2_LENGTH

Group: 0x12
Indexes: 0x25 ... 0x26

Summary: Unsigned 13-bit RX Field 2 length value.
Purpose:
- The PKT_RX_FIELD_2_LENGTH properties specify the length of Field 2 in bytes. The field length is an unsigned 13-bit value.
- RX Field 2 may be configured as a variable length field by setting the appropriate value of PKT_LEN:DST_FIELD; however, it is also necessary that a previous field contain the variable length byte(s). If configured as a variable length field, this property must be set with a value that represents the maximum expected length of the field.
- Please refer to the text description for PKT_RX_FIELD_1_LENGTH for more details regarding field length configuration.
Defaults: 0x00,0x00
Register View:

	PKT_RX_FIELD_2_LENGTH
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x25	0	0	0	RX_FIELD_2_LENGTH[12:8]
0x26	RX_FIELD_2_LENGTH[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x25	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0
0x26	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_RX_FIELD_2_LENGTH

RX_FIELD_2_LENGTH[12:0]

Description:

rx_field_length

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1fff

Default:

0x0

PKT_RX_FIELD_2_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x27

Summary: General data processing and packet configuration bits for RX Field 2.
Purpose:
- Partitioning of the Payload into separate fields is provided to support features such as variable length packets and field-specific data processing (e.g., Manchester encoding, data whitening, etc). This property provides configuration bits for field-specific processing on RX Field 2.
- This property is not applicable in TX mode.
- This property is applicable in RX mode only under the following conditions:
- RX Packet Handling is enabled by clearing PKT_CONFIG1:PH_RX_DISABLE, and
- PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set. If the PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is cleared, the general packet configuration bits for the various fields in RX mode are determined by the PKT_FIELD_X_CONFIG properties (shared between TX and RX modes).
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_RX_FIELD_2_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x27	0	0	0	4FSK	0	0	WHITEN	MANCH
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
PKT_RX_FIELD_2_CONFIG
4FSK

Description:

The chip supports field-specific configuration of (G)FSK modulation modes, i.e., 2(G)FSK across certain fields and 4(G)FSK across other fields. In such a case, the Modem must be configured for 4(G)FSK operation across the entire packet (by setting the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), and the Packet Handler is then configured on a field-by-field basis to process the data stream from the FIFO as bit pairs (for 4(G)FSK) or single bits (for 2(G)FSK).

When 4(G)FSK is enabled across a field, the PH pulls two bits from the FIFO and sends them to the TX Modulator to be transmitted as one-of-four deviation levels.

When 4(G)FSK is disabled across a field, the PH pulls one bit from the FIFO and replaces it with the appropriate two bits that map to the outer two deviation levels. Although the TX Modulator remains configured for four levels of deviation (by the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), using only the outer two deviation levels effectively results in 2(G)FSK modulation across that field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

WHITEN

Description:

The data whitening/de-whitening function is only available when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when the PH_RX_DISABLE bit in the PKT_CONFIG1 property is cleared in RX mode).

In RX mode, the data de-whitening function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to de-whitening.

Enabling data whitening does not affect the over-the-air data rate.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

MANCH

Description:

Manchester encoding operates by replacing each bit with a two-chip pattern (e.g., each '0' bit with a '10' pattern and each '1' bit with a '01' bit pattern, or vice versa). The desired encoding polarity is selected by PKT_CONFIG1:MANCH_POL.

Enabling Manchester encoding in one or more fields does not affect the over-the-air data rate; each bit/chip within the entire packet is transmitted at the same data rate (specified by the MODEM_DATA_RATE_X properties). Manchester encoding simply affects the number of bits/chips that are sent (e.g., by replacing one bit with two chips).

In RX mode, the Manchester decoding function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to decoding.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable Manchester decoding on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable Manchester decoding on this field.

PKT_RX_FIELD_2_CRC_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x28

Summary: Configuration of CRC control bits across RX Field 2.
Purpose:
- This property is use to control the calculation, transmission, and checking of CRC across RX Field 2.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_RX_FIELD_2_CRC_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x28	0	0	0	0	CHECK_CRC	CHECK_ALT_CRC	CRC_ENABLE	ALT_CRC_ENABLE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_RX_FIELD_2_CRC_CONFIG

CHECK_CRC

Description:

This determines whether the accumulated CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check CRC at the end of this field.

CHECK_ALT_CRC

Description:

This bit determines whether the accumulated ALT CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit enables CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the CRC checksum at the end of the field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable CRC calculation over this field.

ALT_CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit enables ALT CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling ALT CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the ALT CRC checksum at the end of the field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

PKT_RX_FIELD_3_LENGTH

Group: 0x12
Indexes: 0x29 ... 0x2a

Summary: Unsigned 13-bit RX Field 3 length value.
Purpose:
- The PKT_RX_FIELD_3_LENGTH properties specify the length of Field 3 in bytes. The field length is an unsigned 13-bit value.
- RX Field 3 may be configured as a variable length field by setting the appropriate value of PKT_LEN:DST_FIELD; however, it is also necessary that a previous field contain the variable length byte(s). If configured as a variable length field, this property must be set with a value that represents the maximum expected length of the field.
- Please refer to the text description for PKT_RX_FIELD_1_LENGTH for more details regarding field length configuration.
Defaults: 0x00,0x00
Register View:

	PKT_RX_FIELD_3_LENGTH
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x29	0	0	0	RX_FIELD_3_LENGTH[12:8]
0x2a	RX_FIELD_3_LENGTH[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x29	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0
0x2a	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_RX_FIELD_3_LENGTH

RX_FIELD_3_LENGTH[12:0]

Description:

rx_field_length

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1fff

Default:

0x0

PKT_RX_FIELD_3_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x2b

Summary: General data processing and packet configuration bits for RX Field 3.
Purpose:
- Partitioning of the Payload into separate fields is provided to support features such as variable length packets and field-specific data processing (e.g., Manchester encoding, data whitening, etc). This property provides configuration bits for field-specific processing on RX Field 3.
- This property is not applicable in TX mode.
- This property is applicable in RX mode only under the following conditions:
- RX Packet Handling is enabled by clearing PKT_CONFIG1:PH_RX_DISABLE, and
- PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set. If the PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is cleared, the general packet configuration bits for the various fields in RX mode are determined by the PKT_FIELD_X_CONFIG properties (shared between TX and RX modes).
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_RX_FIELD_3_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x2b	0	0	0	4FSK	0	0	WHITEN	MANCH
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
PKT_RX_FIELD_3_CONFIG
4FSK

Description:

The chip supports field-specific configuration of (G)FSK modulation modes, i.e., 2(G)FSK across certain fields and 4(G)FSK across other fields. In such a case, the Modem must be configured for 4(G)FSK operation across the entire packet (by setting the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), and the Packet Handler is then configured on a field-by-field basis to process the data stream from the FIFO as bit pairs (for 4(G)FSK) or single bits (for 2(G)FSK).

When 4(G)FSK is enabled across a field, the PH pulls two bits from the FIFO and sends them to the TX Modulator to be transmitted as one-of-four deviation levels.

When 4(G)FSK is disabled across a field, the PH pulls one bit from the FIFO and replaces it with the appropriate two bits that map to the outer two deviation levels. Although the TX Modulator remains configured for four levels of deviation (by the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), using only the outer two deviation levels effectively results in 2(G)FSK modulation across that field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

WHITEN

Description:

The data whitening/de-whitening function is only available when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when the PH_RX_DISABLE bit in the PKT_CONFIG1 property is cleared in RX mode).

In RX mode, the data de-whitening function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to de-whitening.

Enabling data whitening does not affect the over-the-air data rate.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

MANCH

Description:

Manchester encoding operates by replacing each bit with a two-chip pattern (e.g., each '0' bit with a '10' pattern and each '1' bit with a '01' bit pattern, or vice versa). The desired encoding polarity is selected by PKT_CONFIG1:MANCH_POL.

Enabling Manchester encoding in one or more fields does not affect the over-the-air data rate; each bit/chip within the entire packet is transmitted at the same data rate (specified by the MODEM_DATA_RATE_X properties). Manchester encoding simply affects the number of bits/chips that are sent (e.g., by replacing one bit with two chips).

In RX mode, the Manchester decoding function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to decoding.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable Manchester decoding on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable Manchester decoding on this field.

PKT_RX_FIELD_3_CRC_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x2c

Summary: Configuration of CRC control bits across RX Field 3.
Purpose:
- This property is use to control the calculation, transmission, and checking of CRC across RX Field 3.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_RX_FIELD_3_CRC_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x2c	0	0	0	0	CHECK_CRC	CHECK_ALT_CRC	CRC_ENABLE	ALT_CRC_ENABLE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_RX_FIELD_3_CRC_CONFIG

CHECK_CRC

Description:

This determines whether the accumulated CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check CRC at the end of this field.

CHECK_ALT_CRC

Description:

This bit determines whether the accumulated ALT CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit enables CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the CRC checksum at the end of the field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable CRC calculation over this field.

ALT_CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit enables ALT CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling ALT CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the ALT CRC checksum at the end of the field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

PKT_RX_FIELD_4_LENGTH

Group: 0x12
Indexes: 0x2d ... 0x2e

Summary: Unsigned 13-bit RX Field 4 length value.
Purpose:
- The PKT_RX_FIELD_4_LENGTH properties specify the length of Field 4 in bytes. The field length is an unsigned 13-bit value.
- RX Field 4 may be configured as a variable length field by setting the appropriate value of PKT_LEN:DST_FIELD; however, it is also necessary that a previous field contain the variable length byte(s). If configured as a variable length field, this property must be set with a value that represents the maximum expected length of the field.
- Please refer to the text description for PKT_RX_FIELD_1_LENGTH for more details regarding field length configuration.
Defaults: 0x00,0x00
Register View:

	PKT_RX_FIELD_4_LENGTH
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x2d	0	0	0	RX_FIELD_4_LENGTH[12:8]
0x2e	RX_FIELD_4_LENGTH[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x2d	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0
0x2e	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_RX_FIELD_4_LENGTH

RX_FIELD_4_LENGTH[12:0]

Description:

rx_field_length

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1fff

Default:

0x0

PKT_RX_FIELD_4_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x2f

Summary: General data processing and packet configuration bits for RX Field 4.
Purpose:
- Partitioning of the Payload into separate fields is provided to support features such as variable length packets and field-specific data processing (e.g., Manchester encoding, data whitening, etc). This property provides configuration bits for field-specific processing on RX Field 4.
- This property is not applicable in TX mode.
- This property is applicable in RX mode only under the following conditions:
- RX Packet Handling is enabled by clearing PKT_CONFIG1:PH_RX_DISABLE, and
- PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set. If the PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is cleared, the general packet configuration bits for the various fields in RX mode are determined by the PKT_FIELD_X_CONFIG properties (shared between TX and RX modes).
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_RX_FIELD_4_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x2f	0	0	0	4FSK	0	0	WHITEN	MANCH
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
PKT_RX_FIELD_4_CONFIG
4FSK

Description:

The chip supports field-specific configuration of (G)FSK modulation modes, i.e., 2(G)FSK across certain fields and 4(G)FSK across other fields. In such a case, the Modem must be configured for 4(G)FSK operation across the entire packet (by setting the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), and the Packet Handler is then configured on a field-by-field basis to process the data stream from the FIFO as bit pairs (for 4(G)FSK) or single bits (for 2(G)FSK).

When 4(G)FSK is enabled across a field, the PH pulls two bits from the FIFO and sends them to the TX Modulator to be transmitted as one-of-four deviation levels.

When 4(G)FSK is disabled across a field, the PH pulls one bit from the FIFO and replaces it with the appropriate two bits that map to the outer two deviation levels. Although the TX Modulator remains configured for four levels of deviation (by the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), using only the outer two deviation levels effectively results in 2(G)FSK modulation across that field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

WHITEN

Description:

The data whitening/de-whitening function is only available when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when the PH_RX_DISABLE bit in the PKT_CONFIG1 property is cleared in RX mode).

In RX mode, the data de-whitening function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to de-whitening.

Enabling data whitening does not affect the over-the-air data rate.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

MANCH

Description:

Manchester encoding operates by replacing each bit with a two-chip pattern (e.g., each '0' bit with a '10' pattern and each '1' bit with a '01' bit pattern, or vice versa). The desired encoding polarity is selected by PKT_CONFIG1:MANCH_POL.

Enabling Manchester encoding in one or more fields does not affect the over-the-air data rate; each bit/chip within the entire packet is transmitted at the same data rate (specified by the MODEM_DATA_RATE_X properties). Manchester encoding simply affects the number of bits/chips that are sent (e.g., by replacing one bit with two chips).

In RX mode, the Manchester decoding function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to decoding.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable Manchester decoding on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable Manchester decoding on this field.

PKT_RX_FIELD_4_CRC_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x30

Summary: Configuration of CRC control bits across RX Field 4.
Purpose:
- This property is use to control the calculation, transmission, and checking of CRC across RX Field 4.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_RX_FIELD_4_CRC_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x30	0	0	0	0	CHECK_CRC	CHECK_ALT_CRC	CRC_ENABLE	ALT_CRC_ENABLE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_RX_FIELD_4_CRC_CONFIG

CHECK_CRC

Description:

This determines whether the accumulated CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check CRC at the end of this field.

CHECK_ALT_CRC

Description:

This bit determines whether the accumulated ALT CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit enables CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the CRC checksum at the end of the field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable CRC calculation over this field.

ALT_CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit enables ALT CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling ALT CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the ALT CRC checksum at the end of the field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

PKT_RX_FIELD_5_LENGTH

Group: 0x12
Indexes: 0x31 ... 0x32

Summary: Unsigned 13-bit RX Field 5 length value.
Purpose:
- The PKT_RX_FIELD_5_LENGTH properties specify the length of Field 5 in bytes. The field length is an unsigned 13-bit value.
- RX Field 5 may be configured as a variable length field by setting the appropriate value of PKT_LEN:DST_FIELD; however, it is also necessary that a previous field contain the variable length byte(s). If configured as a variable length field, this property must be set with a value that represents the maximum expected length of the field.
- Please refer to the text description for PKT_RX_FIELD_1_LENGTH for more details regarding field length configuration.
Defaults: 0x00,0x00
Register View:

	PKT_RX_FIELD_5_LENGTH
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x31	0	0	0	RX_FIELD_5_LENGTH[12:8]
0x32	RX_FIELD_5_LENGTH[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x31	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0
0x32	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_RX_FIELD_5_LENGTH

RX_FIELD_5_LENGTH[12:0]

Description:

rx_field_length

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1fff

Default:

0x0

PKT_RX_FIELD_5_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x33

Summary: General data processing and packet configuration bits for RX Field 5.
Purpose:
- Partitioning of the Payload into separate fields is provided to support features such as variable length packets and field-specific data processing (e.g., Manchester encoding, data whitening, etc). This property provides configuration bits for field-specific processing on RX Field 5.
- This property is not applicable in TX mode.
- This property is applicable in RX mode only under the following conditions:
- RX Packet Handling is enabled by clearing PKT_CONFIG1:PH_RX_DISABLE, and
- PKT_CONFIG1:PH_FIELD_SPLIT is set. If the PH_FIELD_SPLIT bit is cleared, the general packet configuration bits for the various fields in RX mode are determined by the PKT_FIELD_X_CONFIG properties (shared between TX and RX modes).
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_RX_FIELD_5_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x33	0	0	0	4FSK	0	0	WHITEN	MANCH
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
PKT_RX_FIELD_5_CONFIG
4FSK

Description:

The chip supports field-specific configuration of (G)FSK modulation modes, i.e., 2(G)FSK across certain fields and 4(G)FSK across other fields. In such a case, the Modem must be configured for 4(G)FSK operation across the entire packet (by setting the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), and the Packet Handler is then configured on a field-by-field basis to process the data stream from the FIFO as bit pairs (for 4(G)FSK) or single bits (for 2(G)FSK).

When 4(G)FSK is enabled across a field, the PH pulls two bits from the FIFO and sends them to the TX Modulator to be transmitted as one-of-four deviation levels.

When 4(G)FSK is disabled across a field, the PH pulls one bit from the FIFO and replaces it with the appropriate two bits that map to the outer two deviation levels. Although the TX Modulator remains configured for four levels of deviation (by the MODEM_MOD_TYPE property), using only the outer two deviation levels effectively results in 2(G)FSK modulation across that field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable 4(G)FSK data processing on this field.

WHITEN

Description:

The data whitening/de-whitening function is only available when automatic Packet Handling is enabled (e.g., when using the TX FIFO as the modulation source in TX mode, or when the PH_RX_DISABLE bit in the PKT_CONFIG1 property is cleared in RX mode).

In RX mode, the data de-whitening function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to de-whitening.

Enabling data whitening does not affect the over-the-air data rate.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

MANCH

Description:

Manchester encoding operates by replacing each bit with a two-chip pattern (e.g., each '0' bit with a '10' pattern and each '1' bit with a '01' bit pattern, or vice versa). The desired encoding polarity is selected by PKT_CONFIG1:MANCH_POL.

Enabling Manchester encoding in one or more fields does not affect the over-the-air data rate; each bit/chip within the entire packet is transmitted at the same data rate (specified by the MODEM_DATA_RATE_X properties). Manchester encoding simply affects the number of bits/chips that are sent (e.g., by replacing one bit with two chips).

In RX mode, the Manchester decoding function is performed only on bits stored in the RX FIFO; received data bits observed in real-time (on a GPIO pin) are output prior to decoding.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable Manchester decoding on this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable Manchester decoding on this field.

PKT_RX_FIELD_5_CRC_CONFIG

Group: 0x12
Index: 0x34

Summary: Configuration of CRC control bits across RX Field 5.
Purpose:
- This property is use to control the calculation, transmission, and checking of CRC across RX Field 5.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PKT_RX_FIELD_5_CRC_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x34	0	0	0	0	CHECK_CRC	CHECK_ALT_CRC	CRC_ENABLE	ALT_CRC_ENABLE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_RX_FIELD_5_CRC_CONFIG

CHECK_CRC

Description:

This determines whether the accumulated CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check CRC at the end of this field.

CHECK_ALT_CRC

Description:

This bit determines whether the accumulated ALT CRC checksum will be checked at the end of this field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

ENUM_1 1 Check ALT CRC at the end of this field.

CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit enables CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the CRC checksum at the end of the field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable CRC calculation over this field.

ALT_CRC_ENABLE

Description:

This bit enables ALT CRC checksum calculation over this field. Note: enabling ALT CRC calculation across a field does not automatically result in transmission/checking of the ALT CRC checksum at the end of the field.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

ENUM_1 1 Enable ALT CRC calculation over this field.

PKT_CRC_SEED

Group: 0x12
Indexes: 0x36 ... 0x39

Summary: 32-bit seed value for the 32-bit CRC engine
Purpose:
- This property defines the starting seed value for the 32-bit CRC engine.
- The value in this field is used when PKT_CRC_CONFIG:CRC_SEED is set to zero.
Defaults: 0x00,0x00,0x00,0x00
Register View:

	PKT_CRC_SEED
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x36	CRC_SEED[31:24]
0x37	CRC_SEED[23:16]
0x38	CRC_SEED[15:8]
0x39	CRC_SEED[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x36	0x0
0x37	0x0
0x38	0x0
0x39	0x0

Field Details:

PKT_CRC_SEED

CRC_SEED[31:0]

Description:

Defines the 32-bit PN seed value.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xffffffff

Default:

0x0

MODEM

MODEM_MOD_TYPE

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x00

Summary: Selects the type of modulation. In TX mode, additionally selects the source of the modulation.
Purpose:
- This property configures the Modem in the chip for transmission/reception of the following modulation types: OOK, 2(G)FSK, and 4(G)FSK (if supported) modulation.
- In TX mode, this property is additionally used to select the source of the TX data stream, and whether that TX data stream is from a synchronous or asynchronous source (in Direct mode only).
- The Modem must be configured for transmission/reception of only one type of modulation throughout the entire packet; it is not possible (for example) to use OOK modulation over certain fields and (G)FSK modulation over other fields. If 4(G)FSK is supported, it is possible to switch between 2(G)FSK and 4(G)FSK on a field-specific basis; however, this is accomplished by configuring the Modem to 4(G)FSK mode for the entire packet and then performing special data processing in the Packet Handler.
Default: 0x02
Register View:

	MODEM_MOD_TYPE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	TX_DIRECT_MODE_TYPE	TX_DIRECT_MODE_GPIO		MOD_SOURCE		MOD_TYPE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0		0x0		0x2

Field Details:

MODEM_MOD_TYPE

TX_DIRECT_MODE_TYPE

Description:

This bit determines whether a real-time TX data stream (applied to the chip on a selected GPIO input pin) is processed in synchronous or asynchronous fashion. This bit is applicable only in TX mode, and only when the MOD_SOURCE field is also set for TX Direct mode.
In TX Direct Synchronous mode, the chip controls the transmit data rate by outputting a TX bit clock (GPIO_PIN_CFG=0x10). The host MCU receives the rising edge of the TX clock and responds by outputting one bit for each clock tick; the chip clocks in this new data bit on the subsequent falling edge of the TX clock. All 2-level modulation modes (OOK, 2FSK, 2GFSK) are supported.
In TX Direct Asynchronous mode, the host MCU controls the transmit data rate; the RFIC has no knowledge of the rate of the incoming TX data stream but simply oversamples the data as fast as possible to determine the bit edge transitions. OOK and 2FSK are supported, but 2GFSK is not supported in this mode.
4(G)FSK is not supported in either TX Direct Synchronous or TX Direct Asynchronous modes.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
SYNC	0	Direct mode operates in synchronous mode, applies to TX only.
ASYNC	1	Direct mode operates in asynchronous mode, applies to TX only. GFSK is not supported.

TX_DIRECT_MODE_GPIO[1:0]

Description:

This field determines which GPIO pin is selected by the Modem as the modulation data source during TX Direct mode. This bit is applicable only in TX mode, and only when the MOD_SOURCE field is also set for TX Direct mode.
This field does not automatically configure the selected GPIO pin as a digital input pin; it remains necessary to additionally configure the desired GPIO pin as a CMOS-compatible input pin by setting GPIO_PIN_CFG=0x04.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
GPIO0	0	TX direct mode uses GPIO0 as data source.
GPIO1	1	TX direct mode uses GPIO1 as data source.
GPIO2	2	TX direct mode uses GPIO2 as data source.
GPIO3	3	TX direct mode uses GPIO3 as data source.

MOD_SOURCE[1:0]

Description:

This bit selects the source of modulation during TX mode. It is applicable only in TX mode.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
PACKET	0	The modulation is sourced from the TX FIFO in the packet handler.	revB1A
DIRECT	1	The modulation is sourced in real-time (i.e., TX Direct Mode) from a GPIO pin, as selected by the TX_DIRECT_MODE_GPIO field.	revB1A
PSEUDO	2	The modulation is sourced from the internal pseudo-random generator.	revB1A

MOD_TYPE[2:0]

Description:

This field configures the Modem for transmission or reception of the desired type of modulation.
With the exception of CW mode (a TX-only function), this bit is applicable in both TX and RX modes.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
CW	0	CW.
OOK	1	OOK.
2FSK	2	2FSK.
2GFSK	3	2GFSK.
4FSK	4	4FSK.
4GFSK	5	4GFSK.

MODEM_MAP_CONTROL

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x01

Summary: Controls polarity and mapping of transmit and receive bits.
Purpose:
- The chip provides the ability to invert the polarity of the TX and RX data bits. This flexibility is provided to ensure compatibility of the chip with other legacy systems that may have a different definition of data bit polarity.
- The ENMANCH bit signals the chip to adjust the "search for Sync Word" timeout period in the event that the Sync Word is configured for simultaneous Manchester coding and 4(G)FSK coding. This configuration is currently not supported and thus the setting of the ENMANCH bit is internally ignored.
Default: 0x80
Register View:

	MODEM_MAP_CONTROL
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x01	ENMANCH	ENINV_RXBIT	ENINV_TXBIT	ENINV_FD	0	0	0	0
	*Default*
	0x1	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
MODEM_MAP_CONTROL
ENMANCH

Description:

When set, signals the chip adjust the "search for Sync Word" timeout period in the event that the Sync Word field is simultaneously configured for Manchester coding and 4(G)FSK coding.

This configuration is currently not supported; the setting of the ENMANCH bit is internally ignored.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not adjust Sync Word timeout for Manchester coding.

ENUM_1 1 Adjust Sync Word timeout for Manchester coding.

ENINV_RXBIT

Description:

Enables/disables inversion of the entire RX data bit stream, occurring at the circuit point just after the Demodulator and prior to any subsequent decoding (e.g., Manchester decoding or data de-whitening).

The data bits appearing in real-time on a GPIO pin (if selected) will be inverted, as will the data bytes stored in the RX FIFO.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not invert RX data bits.

ENUM_1 1 Invert RX data bits.

ENINV_TXBIT

Description:

Enables/disables inversion of the entire TX data bit stream, occurring at the circuit point just prior to injection into the Modulator. The inversion of the data bit stream applies to all three possible sources of TX modulation (FIFO, Direct from GPIO pin, or PN generator).

In OOK mode, this has the obvious effect of changing a TX-ON bit to a TX-OFF bit, and vice versa.

In 2(G)FSK mode, this has the obvious effect of changing a +Fdev bit to a -Fdev bit, and vice versa.

The default setting of this bit (i.e., non-inversion) results in a '1' TX data bit mapping to the +Fdev deviation level.

In 4(G)FSK mode, the resulting effect depends upon the selected symbol mapping; that is, inverting a pair of TX data bits (that previously mapped to one 4(G)FSK deviation level) may not result in transmission of the opposite deviation level.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not invert TX data bits.

ENUM_1 1 Invert TX data bits.

ENINV_FD

Description:

Enables/disables inversion of the polarity of frequency deviation in TX 2(G)FSK or 4(G)FSK mode. This bit has no effect in TX OOK mode or RX mode.

In 2(G)FSK mode, this bit has the same effect as inverting the TX data bit stream through the ENINV_TXBIT.

In 4(G)FSK mode, this bit results in inversion of the modulation waveform; this may differ from inverting the TX data bit stream (through the ENINV_TXBIT), depending upon the selected symbol mapping.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not invert the polarity of the frequency deviation.

ENUM_1 1 Invert the polarity of the frequency deviation.

MODEM_DSM_CTRL

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x02

Summary: Miscellaneous control bits for the Delta-Sigma Modulator (DSM) in the PLL Synthesizer.
Purpose:
- This property provides several miscellaneous control bits for DSM functions such as clock source, dithering, and modulator order. These control bits are primarily intended for engineering diagnostic purposes, and Silicon Labs does not recommend altering the values suggested by the WDS Calculator (with the possible exception of the DSM_LSB bit).
- Some DSM Fractional-N PLL Synthesizers may exhibit discrete tones or pattern-related spurs for certain fractional values of the frequency control word. A common method of breaking up these tones or patterns is to add a noise-like (pseudo-random) bit sequence to the LSB of the frequency control word; this is known as "dithering". The chip provides for enabling dithering and selection of two different types of dithering; however, Silicon Labs has not observed a need to enable this functionality and recommends that dithering remain disabled.
- The fractional frequency values that commonly give rise to pattern-related spurs in many DSMs are exact powers-of-2 (e.g., 0.5, 0.25, 0.125, etc). In addition to dithering, another common method of eliminating pattern-related spurs is to simply ensure that the frequency control word is always an odd value, and thus can never be an exact power-of-2. The chip provides for internally forcing the LSB of the frequency control word to always be set high, thus resulting in an odd value (regardless of the frequency control word programmed by the user). This functionality is controlled by the DSM_LSB bit. The downside of obtaining only odd values of the frequency control word is that the frequency tuning resolution is effectively degraded by a factor of 2x (e.g., 57.22 Hz tuning resolution in the 915M band instead of 28.61 Hz tuning resolution). Silicon Labs is not aware of a need for enabling this functionality as no significant pattern-related spurs have been observed; however, the WDS Calculator currently suggests setting this bit and absent a need for extremely fine frequency tuning resolution, Silicon Labs recommends not altering this setting.
Default: 0x07
Register View:

	MODEM_DSM_CTRL
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x02	DSMCLK_SEL	DSM_MODE	DSMDT_EN	DSMDTTP	DSM_RST	DSM_LSB	DSM_ORDER
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x1	0x3

Field Details:

MODEM_DSM_CTRL

DSMCLK_SEL

Description:

Selects the clock source for the DSM.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	DSM clock comes from 30 MHz PLL feedback clock.
ENUM_1	1	DSM clock comes from 30 MHz crystal clock.

DSM_MODE

Description:

Selects the type of DSM used in the PLL Synthesizer.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	MASH 1-1-1 DSM will be selected.
ENUM_1	1	A single loop DSM will be selected.

DSMDT_EN

Description:

Selects whether dithering is enabled in the DSM.
When enabled, the type of dithering is controlled by the DSMDTTP bit.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	DSM dithering is disabled.
ENUM_1	1	DSM dithering is enabled.

DSMDTTP

Description:

Selects the type of dithering added to the DSM.
The bits of the pseudo-random dithering sequence may be viewed as +1/0 bits or as +1/-1 bits; the latter method is DC-balanced while the former method effectively adds ½ LSB of frequency offset to the frequency control word.
This bit has no effect unless dithering is enabled by setting the DSMDT_EN bit.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	+1/0 is added to DSM input LSB.
ENUM_1	1	+1/-1 is added to DSM input LSB.

DSM_RST

Description:

Provides a method of resetting the DSM.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENABLE	0	DSM is in operational state (reset is not active).
RESET	1	DSM will be in reset state until it is clear.

DSM_LSB

Description:

Selects whether the LSB of the DSM frequency control word is always forced high, resulting in odd values of the frequency control word.
If enabled, the effective frequency tuning resolution is degraded.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	The LSB of the DSM input is unaltered
ENUM_1	1	The LSB of the DSM input is internally forced high (i.e., the frequency control word is forced to always be an odd value).

DSM_ORDER[1:0]

Description:

Selects the order of the DSM.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	0 order, with 0 output continuously.
ENUM_1	1	1st order, with no noise shaping.
ENUM_2	2	2nd order, MASH 1-1.
ENUM_3	3	3rd order, MASH 1-1-1.

MODEM_DATA_RATE

Group: 0x20
Indexes: 0x03 ... 0x05

Summary: Unsigned 24-bit value used to determine the TX data rate
Purpose:
- The TX data rate is derived from an internal clock signal from the TX Numerically Controlled Oscillator (NCO).
- The TX NCO provides a clock signal at a configurable multiple of the final desired TX data rate; the exact oversampling ratio depends upon the modulation mode (OOK / FSK / GFSK) and selected data rate.
- The value of the MODEM_DATA_RATE property works in conjunction with the MODEM_TX_NCO_MODE property and TXOSR field to provide the desired data rate. As a result, the units of the MODEM_DATA_RATE property are not fixed. However, as a general guideline, the value of the MODEM_DATA_RATE property will be either 1x, 2x, 4x, 10x, 20x, or 40x the desired data rate (in bits per second).
- Please refer to the text description for MODEM_TX_NCO_MODE for more details regarding the TX Numerically Controlled Oscillator (NCO), and the roles of the MODEM_TX_NCO_MODE and MODEM_DATA_RATE properties in setting the TX data rate.
- The default values of the MODEM_DATA_RATE and MODEM_TX_NCO_MODE properties result in a data rate of 100 kbps.
Defaults: 0x0f,0x42,0x40
Register View:

	MODEM_DATA_RATE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x03	DATA_RATE[23:16]
0x04	DATA_RATE[15:8]
0x05	DATA_RATE[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x03	0xf
0x04	0x42
0x05	0x40

Field Details:

MODEM_DATA_RATE

DATA_RATE[23:0]

Description:

Data rate

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xffffff

Default:

0xf4240

MODEM_TX_NCO_MODE

Group: 0x20
Indexes: 0x06 ... 0x09

Summary: TX Gaussian filter oversampling ratio and Byte 3 of unsigned 26-bit TX Numerically Controlled Oscillator (NCO) modulus.
Purpose:
- The chip contains a TX Numerically Controlled Oscillator (NCO) for the purpose of creating an internal clock signal at a configurable multiple of the desired data rate.
- For 2GFSK and 4GFSK modes of operation, the oversampling ratio is configured by the TXOSR field and is selectable between 10x, 20x, and 40x. The oversampled NCO clock signal is used to synthesize the individual deviation steps of the Gaussian filtered modulation waveform, and thus necessarily must be at a higher multiple of the desired data rate.
- For OOK, 2FSK, and 4FSK modes of operation, there is no inherent need to create an oversampled clock; the only required signal is the TXCLK signal at the desired data rate. However, it is convenient to use the same NCO clock circuitry and thus the TXCLK data rate signal is obtained by first generating an NCO clock signal at an oversampling ratio of 10x and then subsequently dividing-by-10.
- The NCO is comprised of an accumulator that is clocked by the crystal oscillator frequency (Fxtal), has a maximum count limit (modulus) equal to the value of the MODEM_TX_NCO_MODE property, and on each clock tick accumulates a value set by the MODEM_DATA_RATE property. Thus the accumulator wraps over its maximum count limit at a rate given by the formula:
  $NCO\_CLK\_FREQ = (\frac{MODEM\_DATA\_RATE \times Fxtal\_Hz}{MODEM\_TX\_NCO\_MODE}) (150 DPI)$
  
  The overflow pulses generated by the accumulator are the TX NCO clock signal.
- The actual TX data rate (and frequency of the TXCLK signal) is given by the formula:
  $TX\_DATA\_RATE = (\frac{NCO\_CLK\_FREQ}{TXOSR}) (150 DPI)$
- In 2GFSK or 4GFSK mode, the TXOSR value may be increased to 20x or 40x (from its nominal value of 10x). This increase in oversampling rate results in a Gaussian filtered modulation waveform with finer deviation steps, and thus reduces the modulation sideband artifacts. The 20x or 40x oversampling rate options are only available at lower data rates; the WDS Calculator will automatically suggest the highest possible value of TXOSR for the selected data rate. If an oversampling rate of 20x or 40x is selected, the value entered for the MODEM_DATA_RATE property should also be scaled by 2x or 4x (respectively), in order to maintain the desired TX data rate.
- The value entered for the MODEM_TX_NCO_MODE property is recommended to be either Fxtal or Fxtal/10 (e.g., 0x1C9C380 = 30M decimal, or 0x02DC6C0 =3M decimal, assuming the crystal frequency is 30 MHz). The WDS Calculator will automatically suggest the appropriate value as a function of data rate (Fxtal for DR > 200kbps, and Fxtal/10 for DR ≥ 200kbps). This provides a different adjustment resolution of the data rate.
- The MODEM_TX_NCO_MODE and MODEM_DATA_RATE properties affect only the TX data rate, and have no effect in configuring the data rate in RX mode.
- The default values of the MODEM_DATA_RATE and MODEM_TX_NCO_MODE properties result in a data rate of 100 kbps.
Defaults: 0x01,0xc9,0xc3,0x80
Register View:

	MODEM_TX_NCO_MODE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x06	0	0	0	0	TXOSR[1:0]		NCOMOD[25:24]
0x07	NCOMOD[23:16]
0x08	NCOMOD[15:8]
0x09	NCOMOD[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x06	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0		0x1
0x07	0xc9
0x08	0xc3
0x09	0x80

Field Details:

MODEM_TX_NCO_MODE

TXOSR[1:0]

Description:

Sets the oversampling ratio of the internal NCO clock signal used to synthesize the Gaussian filtered modulation waveform. This field is only effective in GFSK mode.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	TX Gaussian filter oversampling ratio is 10x.
ENUM_1	1	TX Gaussian filter oversampling ratio is 40x.
ENUM_2	2	TX Gaussian filter oversampling ratio is 20x.
ENUM_3	3	Reserved, do not use.

NCOMOD[25:0]

Description:: Sets the modulus (maximum count value) of the accumulator used in the TX NCO clock generation circuitry.
Min:: 0x0
Max:: 0x3ffffff
Default:: 0x1c9c380

MODEM_FREQ_DEV

Group: 0x20
Indexes: 0x0a ... 0x0c

Summary: 17-bit unsigned TX frequency deviation word.
Purpose:
- The TX frequency deviation is specified by an unsigned 17-bit value. This property defines the frequency deviation value.
- The units of the MODEM_FREQ_DEV property are in increments of the LSB tuning resolution of the PLL Synthesizer, and are therefore a function of the crystal frequency and output frequency band. The formula for calculating the value of the MODEM_FREQ_DEV property is given by the following equation:
  
  $MODEM\_FREQ\_DEV=\left(\frac{2^{19} \times outdiv \times Desired\_Dev\_Hz}{N_{PRESC} \times freq\_xo}\right) (150 DPI)$
- The output divider value OUTDIV is configured as a function of the desired frequency band, and is specified in property MODEM_CLKGEN_BAND:BAND.
- The prescaler divider value NPRESC is configured as a function of the selected synthesizer performance mode and may take on the values NPRESC=2 or NPRESC=4, as specified in property MODEM_CLKGEN_BAND:SY_SEL.
- For 2(G)FSK mode, the specified value is the peak deviation. For 4(G)FSK mode (if supported), the specified value is the inner deviation (i.e., between channel center frequency and the nearest symbol deviation level).
- The MODEM_FREQ_DEV property are only used in TX mode.
Defaults: 0x00,0x06,0xd3
Register View:

	MODEM_FREQ_DEV
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x0a	0	0	0	0	0	0	0	FREQDEV
0x0b	FREQDEV[15:8]
0x0c	FREQDEV[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x0a	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0
0x0b	0x6
0x0c	0xd3

Field Details:

MODEM_FREQ_DEV

FREQDEV[16:0]

Default:

0x6d3

MODEM_FREQ_OFFSET

Group: 0x20
Indexes: 0x0d ... 0x0e

Summary: Frequency offset adjustment (a 16-bit signed number).
Purpose:
- In TX mode, the MODEM_FREQ_OFFSET value is used to provide an offset to the programmed TX frequency. This allows fine tuning of the TX frequency to account for the variability of the TX reference frequency (e.g., crystal oscillator frequency error).
- In RX mode when PLL AFC is disabled, the MODEM_FREQ_OFFSET value is used to provide an offset for the programmed RX frequency. This property has no function in RX mode with PLL AFC enabled. Specifically, reading this property does NOT return the estimated AFC frequency error in RX mode; that frequency error value may be obtained from the GET_MODEM_STATUS command.
- The frequency offset adjustment is a signed 16-bit value. This property defines the frequency offset value.
- The units of the MODEM_FREQ_OFFSET property are in increments of the LSB tuning resolution of the PLL Synthesizer, and are therefore a function of the crystal reference frequency and output frequency band. The formula for calculating the value of the MODEM_FREQ_OFFSET property is given by the following equation:
  
  $MODEM\_FREQ\_OFFSET=\left(\frac{2^{19} \times outdiv \times Desired\_Offset\_Hz}{N_{PRESC} \times freq\_xo}\right) (150 DPI)$
- Please refer to the text description for FREQ_CONTROL_INTE for more details regarding frequency calculation.
- The absolute range of this property expressed in Hz is a function of the crystal reference frequency and output frequency band, but ranges from +/-937.5 kHz in the 915M band to +/-468.7 kHz in the 450M band, etc.
Defaults: 0x00,0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_FREQ_OFFSET
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x0d	FREQOFFSET[15:8]
0x0e	FREQOFFSET[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x0d	0x0
0x0e	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_FREQ_OFFSET

FREQOFFSET[15:0]

Default:

0x0

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_8

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x0f

Summary: The 8th coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
Purpose:
- The chip can apply a spectral shaping filter function (e.g., Gaussian filtering) to the TX data stream. The filter is implemented as a 17-tap digital FIR filter, and thus internally there are a total of 17 filter coefficients. However, the values of the tap coefficients are symmetrical: Coeff16=Coeff0, Coeff15=Coeff1, etc. Thus it is only necessary to store a total of 9 coefficients (Coeff8 thru Coeff0); the internal circuitry obtains the remaining coefficients through symmetry.
- This property specifies the 8th coefficient of the TX shaping filter.
- The filtering function provided by the default suggested coefficient values is Gaussian filtering with B*T=0.5. Other filtering functions are possible; please contact Silicon Labs for filter coefficient values.
- The spectral shaping filter function is used only in TX mode, and is not available when using TX Direct Asynchronous mode.
Default: 0x67
Register View:

	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_8
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x0f	TXCOE8
	*Default*
	0x67

Field Details:

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_8

TXCOE8[7:0]

Default:

0x67

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_7

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x10

Summary: The 7th coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
Purpose:
- This property specifies the 7th coefficient of the TX shaping filter.
- Please refer to the text description for MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_8 for more details regarding TX spectral shaping filtering.
Default: 0x60
Register View:

	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_7
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x10	TXCOE7
	*Default*
	0x60

Field Details:

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_7

TXCOE7[7:0]

Default:

0x60

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_6

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x11

Summary: The 6th coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
Purpose:
- This property specifies the 6th coefficient of the TX shaping filter.
- Please refer to the text description for MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_8 for more details regarding TX spectral shaping filtering.
Default: 0x4d
Register View:

	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_6
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x11	TXCOE6
	*Default*
	0x4d

Field Details:

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_6

TXCOE6[7:0]

Default:

0x4d

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_5

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x12

Summary: The 5th coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
Purpose:
- This property specifies the 5th coefficient of the TX shaping filter.
- Please refer to the text description for MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_8 for more details regarding TX spectral shaping filtering.
Default: 0x36
Register View:

	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_5
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x12	TXCOE5
	*Default*
	0x36

Field Details:

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_5

TXCOE5[7:0]

Default:

0x36

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_4

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x13

Summary: The 4th coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
Purpose:
- This property specifies the 4th coefficient of the TX shaping filter.
- Please refer to the text description for MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_8 for more details regarding TX spectral shaping filtering.
Default: 0x21
Register View:

	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_4
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x13	TXCOE4
	*Default*
	0x21

Field Details:

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_4

TXCOE4[7:0]

Default:

0x21

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_3

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x14

Summary: The 3rd coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
Purpose:
- This property specifies the 3rd coefficient of the TX shaping filter.
- Please refer to the text description for MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_8 for more details regarding TX spectral shaping filtering.
Default: 0x11
Register View:

	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_3
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x14	TXCOE3
	*Default*
	0x11

Field Details:

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_3

TXCOE3[7:0]

Default:

0x11

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_2

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x15

Summary: The 2nd coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
Purpose:
- This property specifies the 2nd coefficient of the TX shaping filter.
- Please refer to the text description for MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_8 for more details regarding TX spectral shaping filtering.
Default: 0x08
Register View:

	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_2
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x15	TXCOE2
	*Default*
	0x8

Field Details:

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_2

TXCOE2[7:0]

Default:

0x8

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_1

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x16

Summary: The 1st coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
Purpose:
- This property specifies the 1st coefficient of the TX shaping filter.
- Please refer to the text description for MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_8 for more details regarding TX spectral shaping filtering.
Default: 0x03
Register View:

	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_1
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x16	TXCOE1
	*Default*
	0x3

Field Details:

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_1

TXCOE1[7:0]

Default:

0x3

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_0

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x17

Summary: The 0th coefficient of TX spectral shaping filter.
Purpose:
- This property specifies the 0th coefficient of the TX shaping filter.
- Please refer to the text description for MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_8 for more details regarding TX spectral shaping filtering.
Default: 0x01
Register View:

	MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_0
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x17	TXCOE0
	*Default*
	0x1

Field Details:

MODEM_TX_FILTER_COEFF_0

TXCOE0[7:0]

Default:

0x1

MODEM_TX_RAMP_DELAY

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x18

Summary: TX ramp-down delay setting.
Purpose:
- This property specifies the delay time between transmission of the final symbol of a 2(G)FSK or 4(G)FSK packet and the start of the ramp-down of the PA output power. This configurable delay time ensures that all symbols have been fully transmitted before any reduction in output power occurs.
- This property applies only in TX mode, and has no effect when using OOK modulation.
- Units of the delay are in bit/symbol periods. The WDS Calculator suggests an appropriate delay value as a function of the selected modulation type and data rate.
Default: 0x01
Register View:

	MODEM_TX_RAMP_DELAY
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x18	0	0	0	0	0	RAMP_DLY
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x1

Field Details:

MODEM_TX_RAMP_DELAY

RAMP_DLY[2:0]

Min:

0x1

Max:

0x7

Default:

0x1

MODEM_MDM_CTRL

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x19

Summary: MDM control.
Purpose:
- Detector selection and PM pattern configuration.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_MDM_CTRL
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x19	PH_SRC_SEL	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_MDM_CTRL

PH_SRC_SEL

Description:

BCR/Slicer phase source selection.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Input from phase computer output.

ENUM_1 1 Input from detector's output.

MODEM_IF_CONTROL

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x1a

Summary: Selects Fixed-IF, Scaled-IF, or Zero-IF mode of RX Modem operation.
Purpose:
- The chip normally operates with a fixed IF frequency of Fxtal / 64 (e.g., 30.0 MHz / 64 = 468.75 kHz). As a low-side Mixer injection scheme is used, this places the image response at 2*468.75 kHz = 937.5 kHz below the desired channel.
- It is possible to configure the chip to operate with a lower IF frequency, given by the formula: Fif = Fxtal / (64 * N). As this value is related to the fixed IF frequency by the scale factor 'N', it is referred to as Scaled-IF mode.
- The scale factor 'N' (and thus also the resulting scaled IF frequency) is automatically suggested by the WDS Calculator as a function of the selected data rate, with lower IF frequencies resulting for lower data rates. The scale factor 'N' is always an integer value, and is usually (but not always) a power of 2 (e.g.,N = 2^M).
- Scaled-IF mode may be useful when it is desired to position the image response at a frequency other than that normally resulting from the Fixed-IF mode of operation.
- It is also possible to configure the chip to operate with zero IF frequency, with the benefit that image response frequency is eliminated. However, the RX sensitivity of the chip is somewhat degraded in Zero-IF mode. Also, the RFIC currently does not support reception of an OOK modulated signal in Zero-IF mode.
- The value of the MODEM_IF_FREQ property should set be in accordance with this property (i.e., to the appropriate value of IF frequency for Fixed-IF or Scaled-IF mode, or to a value of zero for Zero-IF mode).
- If the ZEROIF bit is set, the FIXIF bit should be cleared.
Default: 0x08
Register View:

	MODEM_IF_CONTROL
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x1a	0	0	0	ZEROIF	FIXIF	0	ETSI_MODE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x1	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_IF_CONTROL

ZEROIF

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
NORMAL	0	Non zero-IF mode (i.e., fixed IF or scalable IF mode).
ZERO	1	Zero-IF mode.

FIXIF

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
SCALED	0	Scaled-IF mode.
FIXED	1	Fixed-IF mode.

ETSI_MODE[1:0]

Description:

Set the modem into a particular ETSI configuration.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
DISABLE	0	Disables ETSI mode.
ETSI_868	1	Enables ETSI mode for the 868 MHz frequency band low phase noise.
ETSI_169	2	Enables ETSI mode for the 169 MHz frequency band without SAW.

MODEM_IF_FREQ

Group: 0x20
Indexes: 0x1b ... 0x1d

Summary: the IF frequency setting (an 18-bit signed number).
Purpose:
- In RX mode, the chip uses a low-side Mixer injection scheme (except when in Zero-IF mode). The FREQ_CONTROL_INTE and FREQ_CONTROL_FRAC properties define the channel center frequency; in order to receive on this frequency the chip automatically shifts the RX LO frequency downwards by an amount equal to the IF frequency.
- The MODEM_IF_FREQ property defines the amount by which the RX LO frequency is shifted.
- This value is a signed 18-bit number. It is summed with the frequency control word for the PLL Synthesizer, and thus must contain a negative value in order to provide a downwards shift in frequency.
- In Fixed-IF and Scaled-IF mode, the IF frequency is given by the following equation:
  
  $IF\_FREQ\_Hz = (\frac{freq\_xo}{64\times{N}}) (150 DPI)$
  
  where N=1 for Fixed-IF mode and N=2,3,4... for Scaled-IF mode. Example: in Fixed-IF mode with the nominal crystal frequency of 30.0 MHz, the IF frequency is 30 MHz / 64 = 468.75 kHz. In Scaled-IF mode, the scale factor 'N' is always an integer value and is usually (but not always) a power of 2 (e.g., N = 2^M).
- In Zero-IF mode, the MODEM_IF_FREQ should be set = 0x00000.
- The units of the MODEM_IF_FREQ property are in increments of the LSB tuning resolution of the PLL Synthesizer, and are therefore a function of the crystal reference frequency and output frequency band. The formula for calculating the positive representation of the MODEM_IF_FREQ property is given by the following equation:
  
  $MODEM\_IF\_FREQ = (\frac{2^{19}\times{outdiv}\times{IF\_FREQ\_HZ}}{Npresc\times{freq\_xo}}) (150 DPI)$
- The output divider value OUTDIV is configured as a function of the desired frequency band, and is specified in property MODEM_CLKGEN_BAND:BAND.
- The prescaler divider value NPRESC is configured as a function of the selected synthesizer performance mode and may take on the values NPRESC=2 or NPRESC=4, as specified in property MODEM_CLKGEN_BAND:SY_SEL.
- Example: for the nominal Fixed-IF mode IF frequency of 468.75kHz when operating in the 915 MHz band (OUTDIV=4) with a 30 MHz crystal, the calculated positive representation of MODEM_IF_FREQ = 16384 = 0x4000.
- The appropriate value to program into the MODEM_IF_FREQ property is the complement of the calculated positive representation, e.g., 0x3C000.
Defaults: 0x03,0xc0,0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_IF_FREQ
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x1b	0	0	0	0	0	0	IF_FREQ[17:16]
0x1c	IF_FREQ[15:8]
0x1d	IF_FREQ[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x1b	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x3
0x1c	0xc0
0x1d	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_IF_FREQ

IF_FREQ[17:0]

Description:

18-bit IF frequency.

Default:

0x3c000

MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG1

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x1e

Summary: Specifies three decimator ratios for the Cascaded Integrator Comb (CIC) filter.
Purpose:
- The RX channel selection bandpass filtering is provided by a digital filter within the RX Modem circuit block. The filter bandwidth is a function of the filter tap coefficients and the clock or sample rate of the filter. That is, using the same set of filter tap coefficients with different filter clock rates will result in different filter bandwidths.
- The high-speed I/Q data samples from the RX A/D Converters are decimated by a programmable ratio in order to provide the desired sample rate at the input of the digital filter. The decimation ratio is determined by the NDEC0, NDEC1, and NDEC2 values in this property, and thus these values (in conjunction with the filter tap coefficients specified in MODEM_CHFLT_RX1_CHFLT_COEXX) determine the RX channel selection filter bandwidth.
- The decimation ratio of each decimator circuit block is 2^NDEC. In (G)FSK mode the RX data samples pass through two cascaded decimator blocks, and thus the decimation ratio is 2^{(NDEC1+NDEC2)}. In OOK mode, the post-demodulated RX data samples pass through an additional decimator block with decimation ratio 2^NDEC0. If not in OOK mode, this decimation coefficient should be set NDEC0 = 0.
- There is an additional polyphase filter and decimator circuit block, located prior to the decimators controlled by the NDEC0/1/2 coefficients. The decimation ratio of this "pre-decimator" block is controlled by bits within the MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG0 property. The total decimation ratio is the product of the ratios of the individual circuit blocks.
Default: 0x10
Register View:

	MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG1
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x1e	NDEC2		NDEC1		NDEC0			0
	*Default*
	0x0		0x1		0x0			0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG1

NDEC2[1:0]

Description:

Decimation coefficient for the second of two cascaded decimation circuit blocks in the CIC filter.
Decimating rate is 2^NDEC2.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	Decimate by 1.
ENUM_1	1	Decimate by 2.
ENUM_2	2	Decimate by 4.
ENUM_3	3	Decimate by 8.

NDEC1[1:0]

Description:

Decimation coefficient for the first of two cascading decimation circuit blocks in the CIC filter.
Decimating rate is 2^NDEC1.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	Decimate by 1.
ENUM_1	1	Decimate by 2.
ENUM_2	2	Decimate by 4.
ENUM_3	3	Decimate by 8.

NDEC0[2:0]

Description:

Decimation coefficient for the additional decimation circuit block used in the RX Modem during OOK reception.
Decimating rate is 2^NDEC0.
NDEC0 should be set to 0 when not in OOK mode.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	Decimate by 1.
ENUM_1	1	Decimate by 2.
ENUM_2	2	Decimate by 4.
ENUM_3	3	Decimate by 8.
ENUM_4	4	Decimate by 16.
ENUM_5	5	Decimate by 32.
ENUM_6	6	Decimate by 64.
ENUM_7	7	Decimate by 128.

MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG0

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x1f

Summary: Specifies miscellaneous parameters and decimator ratios for the Cascaded Integrator Comb (CIC) filter.
Purpose:
- The RX channel selection bandpass filter is a digital filter that is nominally 27 taps in length. By setting the CHFLT_LOPW bit, it is possible to configure the filter with only 15 taps; the advantage of the 15-tap filter is a reduction in current consumption and filter processing delay at the expense of reduced filtering performance (e.g., adjacent channel selectivity). The reduction in current consumption depends upon the selected data rate, but is typically ~100 to 200 uA.
- As the channel selection bandpass filter is a digital filter, it inherently has a SIN(X)/X response which introduces some slope in amplitude across the passband. The effect is negligible for low bandwidth filters; for higher bandwidth filters the amplitude slope across the passband can approach 1 dB. The chip has a droop compensation filter that provides an inverse SIN(X)/X response; when enabled (by clearing the DROOPFLTBYP bit), this compensation filter effectively flattens the amplitude response across the passband. This bit is cleared by default (compensation filter is enabled), and Silicon Labs does not recommend altering this configuration.
- The RFIC provides a configurable polyphase filter that is located prior to the decimation circuit blocks and CIC digital filter. This "pre-decimation" filter may be configured (by the DWN3BYP and DWN2BYP) bits to select an additional decimation factor of 2 or 3 (in addition to the decimation factor selected by the NDEC0/1/2 coefficients in the MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG1 property). If no additional decimation factor is desired, both the decimate-by-2 and decimate-by-3 circuits may be bypassed by setting both the DWN2BYP and DWN3BYP bits.
- At very low data rates, the sensitivity may be improved by increasing the digital gain of the RX Modem. Setting the RXGAINX2 bit accomplishes this by doubling the gain of the fixed decimate-by-8 stage that immediately follows the RX A/D Converters. The WDS Calculator automatically suggests setting this bit when working with data rates below 1 kbps.
Default: 0x20
Register View:

	MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG0
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x1f	CHFLT_LOPW	DROOPFLTBYP	DWN3BYP	DWN2BYP	0	0	0	RXGAINX2
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x1	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG0
CHFLT_LOPW

Description:

Selects the operating mode of the channel selection filter (normal mode, or low-power mode with reduced performance).

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Normal mode (27 tap filter)

ENUM_1 1 Low power mode with reduced performance (15 tap filter)

DROOPFLTBYP

Description:

Enables or bypasses the droop compensation filter.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Enables the droop compensation filter.

ENUM_1 1 Bypass the droop compensation filter.

DWN3BYP

Description:

Selects or bypasses the decimate-by-3 polyphase filter (located prior to the normal decimation stages and CIC filter).

The DWN3BYP and DWN2BYP bits may be simultaneously set (both filters bypassed), but the bits should not be simultaneously cleared.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Enables the decimate-by-3 polyphase filter

ENUM_1 1 Bypass the decimate-by-3 polyphase filter.

DWN2BYP

Description:

Selects or bypasses the decimate-by-2 polyphase filter (located prior to the normal decimation stages and CIC filter).

The DWN3BYP and DWN2BYP bits may be simultaneously set (both filters bypassed), but the bits should not be simultaneously cleared.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Select the decimate-by-2 polyphase filter.

ENUM_1 1 Bypass the decimate-by-2 polyphase filter.

RXGAINX2

Description:

Doubles the gain of the fixed decimate-by-8 filter stage (following the RX A/D Converters) for the purpose of improving sensitivity at low data rates.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Normal decimate-by-8 filter gain.

ENUM_1 1 Doubel the decimate-by-8 filter gain

MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG2

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x20

Summary: Specifies miscellaneous decimator filter selections.
Purpose:
- Need to fill in.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG2
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x20	0	NDEC3		NDEC2GAIN		NDEC2AGC	0	0
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0		0x0		0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG2

NDEC3[1:0]

Description:

The third state CIC filter decimation index. Decimation rate is 2^ndec3[1:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
NDEC3_1	0	Decimation Ratio is 1.
NDEC3_2	1	Decimation Ratio is 2
NDEC3_4	2	Decimation Ratio is 4.
NDEC3_8	3	Decimation Ratio is 8

NDEC2GAIN[1:0]

Description:

If ndec2agc is disabled, the second stage CIC filter's gain is manually controlled by this register. Otherwise it defines the second stage CIC filter's max gain.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
NDEC2_GAIN0	0	Second state CIC filter decimation gain is 0dB and AGC filter is disabled.
NDEC2_GAIN12	1	Second state CIC filter decimation gain is 12dB.
NDEC2_GAIN24	2	Second state CIC filter decimation gain is 24dB

NDEC2AGC

Description:

If set, the second state CIC filter's gain is automatically controlled

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disable automatic control of the second stage CIC filter's gain..
ENABLED	1	Enable automatic control of the second stage CIC filter's gain..

MODEM_IFPKD_THRESHOLDS

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x21

Summary:
Purpose:
Default: 0xe8
Register View:

	MODEM_IFPKD_THRESHOLDS
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x21	0000				0000
	*Default*
	0xe				0x8

Field Details:

MODEM_IFPKD_THRESHOLDS

MODEM_BCR_OSR

Group: 0x20
Indexes: 0x22 ... 0x23

Summary: RX BCR/Slicer oversampling rate (12-bit unsigned number).
Purpose:
- The RX Modem in the chip contains a Numerically Controlled Oscillator (NCO) for the purpose of synchronizing a local bit clock to the received data stream. The timing of this NCO is maintained by a feedback loop called the Bit Clock Recovery (BCR) loop.
- The BCR loop is sampled at a rate higher than the RX data rate. The ratio between the sampling rate and the RX data rate is called the BCR oversampling rate (OSR), with typical values of OSR = 8 to 12. The desired value of OSR is calculated as a function of the channel filter bandwidth and RX data rate, and reflects a compromise between low clock jitter (high sample rate) and lower current consumption and improved adjacent channel filter attenuation (low sample rate).
- The BCR loop sampling clock is derived from the crystal oscillator through a series of decimations, and thus the sampling rate is controlled by the NDEC2, NDEC1, NDEC0, DWN3BYP, and DWN2BYP bits in the MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG properties. In (G)FSK mode, the channel filter and BCR loop use the same sampling clock rate; in OOK mode, the BCR loop uses a lower sampling clock rate by additionally configuring the NDEC0 parameter.
- The 12-bit value programmed into the MODEM_BCR_OSR properties represents the target value of OSR multiplied by 8x (alternatively, the 12-bit value may be viewed as a 9-bit integer portion and 3-bit fractional portion). Example: for a target value of OSR = 11.75, the value of MODEM_BCR_OSR = 0x5E.
- This property defines the RX BCR/Slicer oversampling rate.
Defaults: 0x00,0x4b
Register View:

	MODEM_BCR_OSR
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x22	0	0	0	0	RXOSR[11:8]
0x23	RXOSR[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x22	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0
0x23	0x4b

Field Details:

MODEM_BCR_OSR

RXOSR[11:0]

Description:

RX symbol oversampling rate at the BCR/Slicer.

Default:

0x4b

MODEM_BCR_NCO_OFFSET

Group: 0x20
Indexes: 0x24 ... 0x26

Summary: RX BCR NCO offset value (an unsigned 22-bit number).
Purpose:
- The RX Modem in the chip contains a Numerically Controlled Oscillator (NCO) for the purpose of synchronizing a local bit clock to the received data stream. The timing of this NCO is maintained by a feedback loop called the Bit Clock Recovery (BCR) loop.
- The NCO operates by accumulating a programmed offset value on each tick of the BCR oversampling clock signal (see MODEM_BCR_OSR for more details of the BCR/Slicer oversampling clock). The rate at which the accumulator overflows is therefore a function of the word-width of the accumulator, the programmed offset value, and the BCR oversampling clock rate.
- The NCO accumulator generates a pulse each time it overflows; the programmed offset value is selected such that the rate of pulses produced by the accumulator equals the desired RX data rate.
- The 22-bit value programmed into the MODEM_BCR_NCO_OFFSET property represents the target offset value multiplied by 64x (alternatively, the 22-bit value may be viewed as a 16-bit integer portion and 6-bit fractional portion). Example: for a target offset value of OFFSET = 5592.40625, the value of MODEM_BCR_NCO_OFFSET = 0x05761A.
Defaults: 0x06,0xd3,0xa0
Register View:

	MODEM_BCR_NCO_OFFSET
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x24	0	0	NCOFF[21:16]
0x25	NCOFF[15:8]
0x26	NCOFF[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x24	0x0	0x0	0x6
0x25	0xd3
0x26	0xa0

Field Details:

MODEM_BCR_NCO_OFFSET

NCOFF[21:0]

Description:

The RX BCR NCO offset value.

Default:

0x6d3a0

MODEM_BCR_GAIN

Group: 0x20
Indexes: 0x27 ... 0x28

Summary: The unsigned 11-bit RX BCR loop gain value.
Purpose:
- The RX Modem in the chip contains a Numerically Controlled Oscillator (NCO) for the purpose of synchronizing a local bit clock to the received data stream. The timing of this NCO is maintained by a feedback loop called the Bit Clock Recovery (BCR) loop. (Please refer to the text description for MODEM_BCR_NCO_OFFSET for more details regarding the BCR NCO.)
- The BCR NCO provides a local clock signal that is at the desired data rate; however, a method of synchronizing the phase of the local clock signal to that of the received data stream is also required. This phase alignment is accomplished by measuring the phase difference between the local bit clock and the received data stream, and adjusting the phase of the bit clock by means of a feedback loop.
- This property adjusts the gain of the BCR feedback loop. A large value of gain results in fast acquisition of timing but increased clock jitter, while a low value of gain provides lower clock jitter but slower timing acquisition.
- The chip provides for switching the loop gain (i.e., "gear shifting") at a configurable point during the packet. This allows the chip to initially use a high loop gain value (resulting in fast acquisition of timing during reception of the Preamble), followed by a lower loop gain value (resulting in low clock jitter during reception of the Payload).
- The clock recovery gain in MODEM_BCR_GAIN is an unsigned 11-bit value that serves as a common "baseline" gain value; it is further scaled by individually selectable scale factors to determine the effective loop gain values to be used prior to and after gear shifting. These scale factors are specified by MODEM_BCR_GEAR:CRFAST and MODEM_BCR_GEAR:CRSLOW.
Defaults: 0x06,0xd3
Register View:

	MODEM_BCR_GAIN
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x27	0	0	0	0	0	CRGAIN[10:8]
0x28	CRGAIN[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x27	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x6
0x28	0xd3

Field Details:

MODEM_BCR_GAIN

CRGAIN[10:0]

Description:

The clock recovery timing loop gain.

Default:

0x6d3

MODEM_BCR_GEAR

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x29

Summary: RX BCR loop gear control.
Purpose:
- RX BCR loop gear control.
- A reduced value of bit clock recovery gain is often desired after gear shifting (to reduce clock jitter). The BCR loop gain in both gear modes is obtained from a baseline clock recovery gain value (crgain in the MODEM_BCR_GAIN_x properties), scaled by the crfast and crslow values specified in this property. NOTE: larger values of crfast or crslow result in lower values of bit clock recovery gain.
Default: 0x02
Register View:

	MODEM_BCR_GEAR
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x29	0	0	CRFAST			CRSLOW
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0			0x2

Field Details:

MODEM_BCR_GEAR

CRFAST[2:0]

Description:

The fast timing gain applies before gear switching occurs. The effective BCR loop gain is calculated as: crgain/(2^crfast).

Default:

0x0

CRSLOW[2:0]

Description:

The slow timing gain applies after gear switching occurs. The effective BCR loop gain is calculated as: crgain/(2^crslow).

Default:

0x2

MODEM_BCR_MISC1

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x2a

Summary: Miscellaneous control bits for the RX BCR loop.
Purpose:
- This property configures miscellaneous options within the RX BCR loop.
Default: 0xc0
Register View:

	MODEM_BCR_MISC1
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x2a	BCRFBBYP	SLICEFBBYP	0	RXNCOCOMP	RXCOMP_LAT	CRGAINX2	DIS_MIDPT	ESC_MIDPT
	*Default*
	0x1	0x1	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_BCR_MISC1

BCRFBBYP

Description:

The frequency of the down-converted signal in the IF may not be perfectly centered in the IF (e.g. PLL-based AFC correction is disabled or settles with some small residual frequency error).
If left uncompensated, this residual frequency error may degrade the ability of the BCR and Slicer to track and slice the data bits (respectively).
In normal operation, the measured residual frequency error is provided as feedback to the BCR and Slicer to compensate their performance.
This bit disables the feedback term to the BCR tracking loop. This is normally used only for diagnostics purposes or during reception of special test signals (e.g., BER tests).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENABLED	0	Feedback of the compensation term to the BCR tracking loop is enabled (normal operation).
DISABLED	1	Feedback of the compensation term to the BCR tracking loop is bypassed (disabled).

SLICEFBBYP

Description:

Please refer to the text description for MODEM_BCR_MISC1:BCRFBBYP for further details regarding this functionality.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENABLED	0	Feedback of the compensation term to the slicer is enabled (normal operation).
DISABLED	1	Feedback of the compensation term to the slicer is bypassed (disabled).

RXNCOCOMP

Description:

The RX Modem in the chip contains a Numerically Controlled Oscillator (NCO) for the purpose of synchronizing a local bit clock to the received data stream. (Please refer to the text description for MODEM_BCR_NCO_OFFSET for more details regarding the BCR NCO.)
The free-running frequency of the NCO is normally set to a fixed value (appropriate for the selected data rate) and used throughout the entire packet.
In the event of receiving a packet with a large error in the data rate, the BCR loop may not be able to maintain tracking without first obtaining a more accurate estimate of the actual received data rate.
This bit allows the chip to compensate for data rate error by acquiring a new estimate for the NCO frequency from the received data itself. This new NCO frequency estimate is obtained during the Preamble field, and then used for the remainder of the packet.
This compensation is typically needed only when the data rate error is greater than 1%.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Compensation of the BCR NCO frequency is disabled (normal operation).
ENABLED	1	Compensation of the BCR NCO frequency is enabled.

RXCOMP_LAT

Description:

This bit determines the location in the packet at which the new estimation of BCR NCO frequency is taken.
This bit has no effect if RXNCOCOMP is not also set; please refer to the text description for RXNCOCOMP for further details.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
SAMP_PREAMBLE_END	0	BCR NCO compensation is sampled upon detection of the end of the Preamble (i.e., boundary between Preamble and Sync Word).
SAMP_PREAMBLE_VALID	1	BCR NCO compensation is sampled upon detection of PREAMBLE_VALID.

CRGAINX2

Description:

Selects whether the BCR loop gain will be increased by a factor of 2x.
This gain increase applies to all modes of operation (i.e., both high-gear and low-gear modes).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
NORMAL	0	BCR loop gain is not doubled (normal operation).
DOUBLED	1	BCR loop gain is doubled.

DIS_MIDPT

Description:

The BCR loop attempts to synchronize the local RX bit clock to the edge transitions of the received data bits by sampling the phase at 1*Tb intervals.
The sensitivity of the phase sampling process may be reduced if the BCR loop accidentally aligns to sampling at the mid-point of the data bits instead of at bit boundaries. In extreme conditions, the sampled phase information may not be sufficient to drive the BCR loop away from the mid-point condition and towards the optimal bit boundary sampling condition.
This mid-point sampling condition may be detected and corrected by deliberately "kicking" the BCR loop slightly.
This functionality only applies to demodulation of a 2(G)FSK signal with a standard '1010...' Preamble pattern using the Synchronous Demodulator.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENABLED	0	Correction of a BCR mid-point phase sampling condition by resetting the NCO is enabled (normal operation).
DISABLED	1	Correction of a BCR mid-point phase sampling condition by resetting the NCO is disabled.

ESC_MIDPT

Description:

Selects the method of "kicking" the BCR loop to escape a mid-point phase sampling condition, as described for the DIS_MIDPT bit.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ESCAPE_1CLK	0	Upon detection of a BCR mid-point phase sampling condition, the NCO will stop running for one sample clock to escape.
ESCAPE_PHASE_ERR	1	Upon detection of a BCR mid-point phase sampling condition, the current phase error is added to the NCO to escape.

MODEM_BCR_MISC0

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x2b

Summary: Miscellaneous RX BCR loop controls.
Purpose:
- This property configures miscellaneous options within the RX BCR loop.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_BCR_MISC0
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x2b	ADCWATCH	ADCRST	DISTOGG	PH0SIZE	0	0	0	0
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_BCR_MISC0

ADCWATCH

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	ADC watch dog is disabled.
ENUM_1	1	ADC watch dog is enabled. If the invalid preamble is detected and no 1010 pattern is detected, ADC reset will be generated.

ADCRST

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	ADC watch dog is disabled.
ENUM_1	1	Enable ADC reset from AGC loop. If IF-PD's current and previous high threshold exceed, ADC reset will be generated.

DISTOGG

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Normal.
ENUM_1	1	Enabled. If the phase differential output is zero, the discriminator output will be toggling.

PH0SIZE

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	5 consecutive zeros of phase differential output will cause RX machine reset.
ENUM_1	1	3 consecutive zeros of phase differential output will cause RX machine reset.

MODEM_AFC_GEAR

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x2c

Summary: RX AFC loop gear control.
Purpose:
- Selection of gear switching source for both RX AFC and BCR.
- Control of gain for RX AFC in both FAST and SLOW modes (i.e., before and after gear switching)
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_AFC_GEAR
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x2c	GEAR_SW		AFC_FAST			AFC_SLOW
	*Default*
	0x0		0x0			0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_AFC_GEAR

GEAR_SW[1:0]

Description:

Selects the event upon which gear switching will occur. Gear switching simultaneously affects the BCR tracking loop as well as the PLL-based AFC loop (if enabled).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	Preamble detection - switch gears after detection of Preamble.
ENUM_1	1	Sync word detection - switch gears after detection of Sync Word.
ENUM_2	2	Mid-Point frequency error detection - switch gears when the estimated frequency error of the Min-Max detector in the Asynchronous Demodulator is less than the half eye-threshold for a consecutive number of search periods. NOTE: The consecutive number of search periods is defined MODEM_RAW_SEARCH:SCH_FRZTH, while the length of each search period (in bits) is defined by MODEM_RAW_SEARCH:SCHPRD_HI.
ENUM_3	3	Preamble detection - switch gears after detection of Preamble (same as gear_sw = 0)

AFC_FAST[2:0]

Description:

Sets the gain of the PLL-based AFC acquisition loop prior to gear switching (i.e., during Fast tracking mode).
The gain of the AFC loop is the product of a baseline gain value and a scale factor that differs according to gear switching. The baseline gain value is specified by MODEM_AFC_GAIN while the scale factors are held by the AFC_FAST and AFC_SLOW parameters.
The gain of the AFC loop in Fast tracking mode is MODEM_AFC_GAIN * 2^-AFC_FAST, and thus a larger value of AFC_FAST results in slower AFC tracking speed prior to gear switching.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x7

Default:

0x0

AFC_SLOW[2:0]

Description:

Sets the gain of the PLL-based AFC acquisition loop after gear switching (i.e., during Slow tracking mode).
The gain of the AFC loop is the product of a baseline gain value and a scale factor that differs according to gear switching. The baseline gain value is specified by MODEM_AFC_GAIN while the scale factors are held by the AFC_FAST and AFC_SLOW parameters.
The gain of the AFC loop in Slow tracking mode is MODEM_AFC_GAIN * 2^-AFC_SLOW, and thus a larger value of AFC_SLOW results in slower AFC tracking speed after gear switching.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x7

Default:

0x0

MODEM_AFC_WAIT

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x2d

Summary: RX AFC loop wait time control.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC) in RX mode to improve reception of the signal in the presence of frequency error in the link. The frequency error is measured and corrected during the initial acquisition of the packet (e.g., during the Preamble), allowing optimized reception of the remainder of the packet.
- One form of AFC provided by the chip operates by adjusting the frequency of the RX LO signal from the PLL Synthesizer, and strives to position the down-converted IF signal in the center of the IF passband. This PLL-based form of AFC thus operates in the analog domain; the chip also provides for other forms of AFC that operate in the digital domain of the RX Modem. The SHWAIT and LGWAIT parameters in the MODEM_AFC_WAIT property affect only PLL-based AFC.
- Each AFC correction cycle consists of: a) measuring the frequency error, b) adjusting the frequency of the PLL, and c) allowing the PLL to settle prior to taking another measurement of frequency error.
- The SHWAIT and LGWAIT parameters determine the periods of time allowed for the PLL to settle after each AFC adjustment cycle. Two different waiting periods (short and long) are provided, depending upon whether the AFC algorithm is operating before or after gear switching.
- The waiting time is in multiples of the symbol period, and thus changes as a function of the data rate. At higher data rates (i.e., shorter symbol periods), the values of the SHWAIT and LGWAIT parameters may need to be increased to provide sufficient time for the PLL to re-settle after correction. The WDS Calculator automatically suggests appropriate values as a function of the selected data rate.
Default: 0x23
Register View:

	MODEM_AFC_WAIT
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x2d	SHWAIT				LGWAIT
	*Default*
	0x2				0x3

Field Details:
MODEM_AFC_WAIT
SHWAIT[3:0]

Description:

This specifies the wait period per PLL AFC correction cycle before gear switching has occurred. The SHWAIT parameter is typically set to a value smaller than the LGWAIT parameter, as fast acquisition speed prior to gear switching is usually desirable.

The effective wait time is (SHWAIT+1)*2Tb.

When set to '0' then no PLL AFC correction will occur before gear switching, i.e., PLL AFC is disabled before gear switching.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xf

Default:

0x2

LGWAIT[3:0]

Description:

This specifies the wait period per PLL AFC correction cycle after gear switching has occurred. The LGWAIT parameter is typically set to a value larger than the SHWAIT parameter, as robust tracking of unbalanced data after gear switching is usually desirable.

The effective wait time is (LGWAIT+1)*2Tb.

When set to '0' then no PLL AFC correction will occur after gear switching, i.e., PLL AFC is disabled after gear switching.

If MODEM_AFC_MISC:ENAFCFRZ is set, there will be no PLL AFC correction after gear switching, regardless of the value of LGWAIT.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xf

Default:

0x3

MODEM_AFC_GAIN

Group: 0x20
Indexes: 0x2e ... 0x2f

Summary: Sets the gain of the PLL-based AFC acquisition loop, and provides miscellaneous control bits for AFC functionality.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC) functionality in which the frequency error of the received signal is measured and used to adjust the PLL Synthesizer to position the down-converted IF signal in the center of the IF bandwidth.
- The AFC algorithm uses a feedback loop to track the frequency of the incoming signal. The gain of the AFC loop is the product of a baseline gain value and a scale factor that differs according to gear switching. The baseline gain value is specified by this property (an unsigned 13-bit value) while the scale factors are held by the MODEM_AFC_GEAR:AFC_FAST and MODEM_AFC_GEAR:AFC_SLOW parameters.
- The ENAFC parameter enables the frequency error estimation circuitry.
- The AFCBD parameter enables dynamic switching of the RX bandwidth during the packet. Please refer to MODEM_CHFLT_RX2_CHFLT_COE for further details regarding the use of adaptive RX bandwidth.
Defaults: 0x83,0x69
Register View:

	MODEM_AFC_GAIN
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x2e	ENAFC	AFCBD	AFC_GAIN_DIV	AFCGAIN[12:8]
0x2f	AFCGAIN[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x2e	0x1	0x0	0x0	0x3
0x2f	0x69

Field Details:

MODEM_AFC_GAIN

ENAFC

Description:

When set, enables estimation of the frequency error.
Estimated frequency error is made available to feedback to the Frac-N PLL, BCR and Slicer. NOTE: enabling of each individual AFC function is performed in the MODEM_BCR_MISC1 and MODEM_AFC_MISC properties.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLE	0	Estimation of frequency error is disabled. This effectively disables all forms of AFC (both PLL-based AFC as well as Slicer and BCR compensation).
ENABLE	1	Estimation of frequency error is enabled.

AFCBD

Description:

If set, enables the use of adaptive RX bandwidth across the packet.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLE	0	Adaptive RX bandwidth is disabled. The RX channel filter coefficients specified in MODEM_CHFLT_RX1_CHFLT_COE are used across the entire packet.
ENABLE	1	Adaptive RX bandwidth is enabled. The RX channel filter coefficients specified in MODEM_CHFLT_RX1_CHFLT_COE are used prior to gear switching, and the coefficients specified in MODEM_CHFLT_RX2_CHFLT_COE are used after gear switching.

AFC_GAIN_DIV

Description:

Reduces AFC loop gain by half when set.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
NO_REDUCTION	0	AFC loop gain is not reduced (normal operation).
REDUCTION_BY_HALF	1	AFC loop gain is reduced by half.

AFCGAIN[12:0]

Description:: 13-bit AFC loop gain value.
Min:: 0x0
Max:: 0x1fff
Default:: 0x369

MODEM_AFC_LIMITER

Group: 0x20
Indexes: 0x30 ... 0x31

Summary: Set the AFC limiter value.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for Automatic Frequency Correction (AFC) functionality in which the frequency error of the received signal is measured and used to adjust the PLL Synthesizer to position the down-converted IF signal in the center of the IF bandwidth.
- This property provides a "watchdog" upper limit on how far the AFC tracking loop may vary from the commanded channel center frequency (i.e., due to tracking on noise). Upon reaching this limit, the AFC algorithm is reset to begin reacquisition from the channel center frequency.
Defaults: 0x00,0x40
Register View:

	MODEM_AFC_LIMITER
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x30	0	AFCLIM[14:8]
0x31	AFCLIM[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x30	0x0	0x0
0x31	0x40

Field Details:
MODEM_AFC_LIMITER
AFCLIM[14:0]

Description:

15-bit AFC limiter value. If the frequency error measured by the AFC correction algorithm exceeds this value, the AFC algorithm is reset to begin reacquisition from channel center frequency.

The AFC limiter value should be viewed as a 14-bit value plus an additional bit that enables an 8x scale factor. If AFCLIM[14] = '0', then the AFC limiter value is AFCLIM[13:0]. If AFCLIM[14] = '1', then the AFC limiter value is AFCLIM[13:0]*8.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x7fff

Default:

0x40

MODEM_AFC_MISC

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x32

Summary: Specifies miscellaneous AFC control bits.
Purpose:
- Specifies miscellaneous bits for control of AFC functionality.
Default: 0xa0
Register View:

	MODEM_AFC_MISC
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x32	ENAFCFRZ	ENFBPLL	EN2TB_EST	ENFZPMEND	ENAFC_CLKSW	0	NON_FRZEN	LARGE_FREQ_ERR
	*Default*
	0x1	0x0	0x1	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_AFC_MISC

ENAFCFRZ

Description:

Selects whether the AFC will operate over the entire packet, or will be frozen after gear switching.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
AFC_PKT	0	AFC will operate over the entire packet.
AFC_FRZN_AFTER_GEAR_SW	1	AFC will be frozen after the gear switching.

ENFBPLL

Description:

Selects whether the estimation of frequency error (i.e., AFC correction value) will be provided as feedback to adjust the PLL Synthesizer frequency.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLE_AFC_COR_PLL	0	Disable AFC correction value feedback to the PLL.
ENABLE_AFC_COR_PLL	1	Enable AFC correction value feedback to the PLL.

EN2TB_EST

Description:

Selects whether AFC correction uses the estimation of frequency error developed by the Moving Average or Min-Max detector in the Asynchronous Demodulator, or the 2*Tb estimator in the Synchronous Demodulator.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
AFC_COR_MA	0	AFC correction uses the frequency estimation developed by the Moving Average or Min-Max detector in the Asynchronous Demodulator.
AFC_COR_2TB	1	AFC correction uses the frequency estimation developed by the 2*Tb estimator in the Synchronous Demodulator. This bit must be set for proper reception of a standard packet using the Synchronous Demodulator.

ENFZPMEND

Description:

Selects whether the AFC will freeze at the end of the '...10101...' Preamble pattern (i.e., boundary between Preamble and Sync Word).
This functionality may be useful if a very long Preamble is used and very good frequency error correction is desired. Setting the ENAFCFRZ bit will take precedence over setting this bit (i.e., the AFC may be frozen earlier, as determined by the gear switching source).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
NO_AFC_FRZN	0	AFC will not be frozen at the end of the Preamble.
AFC_FRZN_PREAMBLE	1	AFC will be frozen at the end of the Preamble.

ENAFC_CLKSW

Description:

Selects whether the clock source for the 2*Tb frequency estimator is switched from a free-running bit clock to the BCR's bit clock upon detection of PREAMBLE_VALID.
This bit is most useful when used together with the ENFZPMEND bit; that is, when a long Preamble is available and very good frequency error correction is desired.
This bit has no effect if the EN2TB_EST bit is not also set (i.e., if the Asynchronous Demodulator is in use.)

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
NO_CLK_SW	0	The clock source for the 2*Tb frequency estimator is not switched.
CLK_SW_TO_BCR_BCLK	1	The clock source for the 2*Tb frequency estimator is switched to the BCR's bit clock upon detection of PREAMBLE_VALID.

NON_FRZEN

Description:

Selects whether AFC correction to the PLL is frozen.
This bit only has an effect for a very specific chip configuration: a) the Asynchronous Demodulator is in use, b) the modulation type is not OOK, and c) the Min-Max detector is used to develop the slicing threshold level (as configured in the MODEM_OOK_MISC property).
When configured in this fashion, the chip will normally freeze AFC correction to the PLL when a sufficient length of consecutive 1's or 0's is encountered, as the chip may not be able to correctly estimate the frequency error within the given search period.
The consecutive number of search periods is defined by MODEM_RAW_SEARCH:SCH_FRZTH, while the length of each search period is defined by MODEM_RAW_SEARCH:SCHPRD_HI.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
AFC_FRZN_CONSEC_BITS	0	AFC correction of the PLL will be frozen if a consecutive string of 1's or 0's that exceed the search period is encountered.
AFC_ALWAYS_EN	1	AFC correction of the PLL will remain enabled if a consecutive string of 1's or 0's that exceed the search period is encountered.

LARGE_FREQ_ERR

Description:

Setting this bit expands the range of the AFC acquisition algorithm. It is recommended to set this bit when the expected frequency error is larger than 12*Symbol_Rate.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Expected range of frequency error is normal (less than 12*Symbol_Rate)
ENABLED	1	Expected range of frequency error is large (greater than 12*Symbol_Rate)

MODEM_AFC_ZIFOFF

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x33

Summary: AFC fixed frequency offset in zero IF mode.
Purpose:
- AFC fixed frequency offset in zero IF mode.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_AFC_ZIFOFF
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x33	ZEROFF
	*Default*
	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_AFC_ZIFOFF

ZEROFF[7:0]

Default:

0x0

MODEM_ADC_CTRL

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x34

Summary: Sigma Delta ADC controls.
Purpose:
- This property configures various options in the sigma delta ADC.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_ADC_CTRL
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x34	0	0	0	HGAIN	EN_DRST	0	REALADC	0
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_ADC_CTRL

HGAIN

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 1 Adds 12 dB gain to ADC input for IR calibration.

EN_DRST

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

DISABLE 0 Disable direct reset by modem.

ENABLE 1 Enable direct reset by modem.

REALADC

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

COMPLEX 0 ADC complex mode.

REAL 1 ADC real mode.

MODEM_AGC_CONTROL

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x35

Summary: Miscellaneous control bits for the Automatic Gain Control (AGC) function in the RX Chain.
Purpose:
- This property provides several miscellaneous control bits for the AGC functionality. These control bits are primarily intended for engineering diagnostic purposes; Silicon Labs does not recommend altering the values suggested by the WDS Calculator, unless required to accommodate unusual customer applications.
Default: 0xe0
Register View:

	MODEM_AGC_CONTROL
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x35	AGCOVPKT	IFPDSLOW	RFPDSLOW	SGI_N	AGC_SLOW	0	ADC_GAIN_COR_EN	RST_PKDT_PERIOD
	*Default*
	0x1	0x1	0x1	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_AGC_CONTROL

AGCOVPKT

Description:

Selects whether the AGC operates over the entire packet, or only during acquisition of the Preamble.
Reductions in gain (in the event of signal level increases) are always allowed at any time, regardless of the state of this bit.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	The full AGC operates only during acquisition of the Preamble. Gain increases (in the event of a decrease in signal level) over the remainder of packet are not allowed.
ENUM_1	1	AGC function operates over the entire packet.

IFPDSLOW

Description:

The chip contains peak detectors in the IF chain for the purpose of sensing the signal level at the outputs of the IF PGAs. The information from these peak detectors is used by the AGC algorithm to adjust the gain of the RX chain (PGA and LNA).
In the event the signal level increases abruptly, it is desirable to decrease the gain rapidly else compression may occur in the RX chain. The IFPDSLOW bit controls the step size of gain reductions to the PGA, and thus affects the slope or speed of the AGC attack time.
This bit affects only the rate of gain decreases; increases in gain are always performed in 3 dB steps.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	The IF programmable gain loop will perform the first required gain decrease in a -3 dB step, but if further gain reductions are required (due to successive indications of the signal level exceeding the peak detector threshold) will switch to -6 dB steps.
ENUM_1	1	The IF programmable gain loop will always perform gain decreases in -3 dB steps.

RFPDSLOW

Description:

The chip contains RF peak detectors for the purpose of sensing the signal level at the output of the LNA. The information from these peak detectors is used by the AGC algorithm to adjust the gain of the RX chain (PGA and LNA).
In the event the signal level increases abruptly, it is desirable to decrease the gain rapidly else compression may occur in the RX chain. The RFPDSLOW bit controls the step size of gain reductions to the LNA, and thus affects the slope or speed of the AGC attack time.
This bit affects only the rate of gain decreases; increases in gain are always performed in 3 dB steps.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	The RF programmable gain loop will perform the first required gain decrease in a -3 dB step, but if further gain reductions are required (due to successive indications of the signal level exceeding the peak detector threshold) will switch to -6 dB steps.
ENUM_1	1	The RF programmable gain loop will always perform gain decreases in -3 dB steps.

SGI_N

Description:

Selects whether gain increases are allowed due to selection of a weak antenna during the Antenna Diversity algorithm.
This bit is effective only in ANT-DIV mode, and only during acquisition of the Preamble (when the signal strength of the two antennas is being evaluated).
This functionality is provided to prevent temporary overload of the RX Chain due to final selection of a strong antenna, after first adjusting the gain to a high value as a result of evaluation of a low signal on a weak antenna.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	AGC gain increases during signal reductions are prevented.
ENUM_1	1	AGC gain increases during signal reductions are allowed.

AGC_SLOW

Description:

The period of the AGC cycle (including both a measurement window period and a gain settling window period) is normally configured by the MODEM_AGC_WINDOW_SIZE property.
In the event that the AGC cycle speed cannot be configured to a sufficiently low value, the AGC speed may be reduced by an additional factor of 8x by setting the AGC_SLOW bit.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Normal AGC speed.
ENUM_1	1	AGC speed is reduced by a factor of 8.

ADC_GAIN_COR_EN

Description:

Selects whether the input gain of the RX A/D Converter is reduced when the condition of minimum AGC gain is detected.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ADC_GAIN_DIS	0	Adjustment of the ADC input gain is disabled.
ADC_GAIN_VIA_AGC	1	ADC input gain is reduced by 6 dB, when the condition of minimum AGC gain is detected.

RST_PKDT_PERIOD

Description:

Selects the period at which the IF and RF peak detectors are reset.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	The peak detectors are reset only when a change in gain is indicated by the peak detector output.
ENUM_1	1	The peak detectors are reset on each and every cycle of the AGC algorithm.

MODEM_AGC_WINDOW_SIZE

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x38

Summary: Specifies the size of the measurement and settling windows for the AGC algorithm.
Purpose:
- One cycle of the AGC algorithm consists of a measurement window period, a (potential) gain adjustment, and a gain settling window period.
- During the measurement window period, the signal level is measured by peak detectors located at the outputs of the LNA and PGA gain stages. Gain adjustments (up or down) are performed depending upon whether the measured signal level falls within an amplitude threshold window.
- The periods of both the measurement window and the gain settling window are adjustable. It is necessary that the measurement window is sufficient in length to allow capture of a peak of the sinusoidal IF signal. As the IF frequency used by the chip is configurable, the measurement window must also be configurable.
- The units of the MEASWIN and SETTLEWIN fields are in periods of the oversampling clock for the Bit Clock Recovery (BCR) loop (e.g., typically 8 to 12 times the received data rate).
- In the event that the window times obtained for the maximum values of MEASWIN and SETTLEWIN are not sufficiently long, their effective values may be simultaneously increased by a factor of 8x by setting the AGC_SLOW bit in the MODEM_AGC_CONTROL property. (This need is unlikely to occur.)
Default: 0x11
Register View:

	MODEM_AGC_WINDOW_SIZE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x38	MEASWIN				SETTLEWIN
	*Default*
	0x1				0x1

Field Details:
MODEM_AGC_WINDOW_SIZE
MEASWIN[3:0]

Description:

Size of the signal level measurement window for the AGC algorithm.

Effective measurement time is:
$MEAS\_TIME = (\frac{MEASWIN \times 2^{3 \times AGCSLOW}}{F_{S BCR}}) (150 DPI)$

Min:

0x1

Max:

0xf

Default:

0x1

SETTLEWIN[3:0]

Description:

Size of the gain settling window for the AGC algorithm.

Effective settling time is:
$SETTLE\_TIME = (\frac{SETTLEWIN \times 2^{3 \times AGCSLOW}}{F_{S BCR}}) (150 DPI)$

Min:

0x1

Max:

0xf

Default:

0x1

MODEM_AGC_RFPD_DECAY

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x39

Summary: Sets the decay time of the RF peak detectors.
Purpose:
- The chip contains RF peak detectors in the LNA for the purpose of sensing the signal level at the output of the LNA. The information from these peak detectors is used by the AGC algorithm to adjust the gain of the RX chain (PGA and LNA).
- It is usually desirable for AGC circuitry to attack quickly (rapidly decrease the gain when the signal level increases) but decay slowly (slowly increase the gain when the signal level decreases).
- To accomplish the slow decay, the chip requires that the peak detectors indicate a consecutive number of "signal below threshold" conditions before the gain is increased. The requirement for consistent indication for gain increase is advisable to prevent gain chattering. The required number of consecutive indications is set by the RFPD_DECAY value.
- It is usually recommended to set the MODEM_AGC_IFPD_DECAY and MODEM_AGC_RFPD_DECAY properties to identical values.
Default: 0x10
Register View:

	MODEM_AGC_RFPD_DECAY
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x39	RFPD_DECAY
	*Default*
	0x10

Field Details:

MODEM_AGC_RFPD_DECAY

RFPD_DECAY[7:0]

Description:

Specifies the consecutive number of AGC cycles for which the RF peak detectors must give a consistent increase gain indication, before the gain increase is allowed.

Min:

0x1

Max:

0xff

Default:

0x10

MODEM_AGC_IFPD_DECAY

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x3a

Summary: Sets the decay time of the IF peak detectors.
Purpose:
- The chip contains peak detectors in the IF chain for the purpose of sensing the signal level at the outputs of the IF PGAs. The information from these peak detectors is used by the AGC algorithm to adjust the gain of the RX chain (PGA and LNA).
- It is usually desirable for AGC circuitry to attack quickly (rapidly decrease the gain when the signal level increases) but decay slowly (slowly increase the gain when the signal level decreases).
- To accomplish the slow decay, the chip requires that the peak detectors indicate a consecutive number of "signal below threshold" conditions before the gain is increased. The requirement for consistent indication for gain increase is advisable to prevent gain chattering. The required number of consecutive indications is set by the IFPD_DECAY value.
- It is usually recommended to set the MODEM_AGC_IFPD_DECAY and MODEM_AGC_RFPD_DECAY properties to identical values.
Default: 0x10
Register View:

	MODEM_AGC_IFPD_DECAY
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x3a	IFPD_DECAY
	*Default*
	0x10

Field Details:

MODEM_AGC_IFPD_DECAY

IFPD_DECAY[7:0]

Description:

Specifies the consecutive number of AGC cycles for which the IF peak detectors must give a consistent increase gain indication, before the gain increase is allowed.

Min:

0x1

Max:

0xff

Default:

0x10

MODEM_FSK4_GAIN1

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x3b

Summary: Specifies the gain factor of the secondary branch in 4(G)FSK ISI-suppression.
Purpose:
- Controls 4(G)FSK suppression gain.
Default: 0x0b
Register View:

	MODEM_FSK4_GAIN1
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x3b	4FSK_ISIS_DISABLE	4FSK_GAIN1
	*Default*
	0x0	0xb

Field Details:

MODEM_FSK4_GAIN1

4FSK_ISIS_DISABLE

Description:

Second phase compensation factor for 4(G)FSK.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Normal.

ENUM_1 1 Disable 4(G)FSK ISI-suppression.

4FSK_GAIN1[6:0]

Description:

Gain factor of the secondary branch in 4(G)FSK ISI-suppression.

Default:

0xb

MODEM_FSK4_GAIN0

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x3c

Summary: Specifies the gain factor of the primary branch in 4(G)FSK ISI-suppression.
Purpose:
- Controls 4(G)FSK suppression gain.
Default: 0x1c
Register View:

	MODEM_FSK4_GAIN0
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x3c	PHASE_COMP_2FSK	4FSK_GAIN0
	*Default*
	0x0	0x1c

Field Details:

MODEM_FSK4_GAIN0

PHASE_COMP_2FSK

Description:

If set, phase compensation is enabled.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

DISABLED 0 Disable phase compenstation for 2fsk..

ENABLED 1 Enable phase compenstation for 2fsk..

4FSK_GAIN0[6:0]

Default:

0x1c

MODEM_FSK4_TH

Group: 0x20
Indexes: 0x3d ... 0x3e

Summary: 16 bit 4(G)FSK slicer threshold.
Purpose:
- 16 bit4(G)FSK slicer threshold.
Defaults: 0x40,0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_FSK4_TH
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x3d	4FSKTH[15:8]
0x3e	4FSKTH[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x3d	0x40
0x3e	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_FSK4_TH

4FSKTH[15:0]

Default:

0x4000

MODEM_FSK4_MAP

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x3f

Summary: 4(G)FSK symbol mapping code.
Purpose:
- The chip is capable of transmitting and receiving 4(G)FSK modulation. In this type of modulation, pairs of data bits are encoded/decoded into 1-of-4 possible frequency deviation levels. This property controls the mapping of bit pairs into deviation levels.
- The four deviation levels are evenly spaced and symmetrical around the channel center frequency. As an example, the deviation levels for a 4(G)FSK modulation protocol with 10kHz spacing between levels would be: -15kHz, -5kHz, +5 kHz, and +15 kHz.
- By convention, these four deviation levels are often referred to as the -3ΔF, -1ΔF, +1ΔF, and +3ΔF levels. This naming convention arises from the fact that the outer deviation (i.e., the difference between channel center frequency and the outer-most deviation levels) is always 3x the inner deviation.
- There are 24 unique ways in which pairs of bits may be mapped to the four deviation levels. These methods are enumerated below. The coding of the enumerations is read (left to right) as: -3ΔF, -1ΔF, +1ΔF, and +3ΔF.
- Using MODEM_FSK4_MAP = 0x00 as an example, the bit pair '00' would be mapped to the -3ΔF level, the bit pair '01' would be mapped to the -1ΔF level, the bit pair '11' to the +1ΔF level, and the '10' bit pair to the +3ΔF level.
- It is important that the TX and RX sides of the link use the same 4(G)FSK symbol mapping, else establishment of the link may not be possible. Also, test equipment vendors may not all use the same default symbol mapping; settings that work with one piece of lab test equipment may not work with another.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_FSK4_MAP
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x3f	4FSKMAP
	*Default*
	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_FSK4_MAP

4FSKMAP[7:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	`00 `01 `11 `10
ENUM_1	1	`00 `01 `10 `11
ENUM_2	2	`00 `11 `01 `10
ENUM_3	3	`00 `11 `10 `01
ENUM_4	4	`00 `10 `01 `11
ENUM_5	5	`00 `10 `11 `01
ENUM_6	6	`01 `00 `11 `10
ENUM_7	7	`01 `00 `10 `11
ENUM_8	8	`01 `11 `00 `10
ENUM_9	9	`01 `11 `10 `00
ENUM_10	10	`01 `10 `00 `11
ENUM_11	11	`01 `10 `11 `00
ENUM_12	12	`11 `00 `01 `10
ENUM_13	13	`11 `00 `10 `01
ENUM_14	14	`11 `01 `00 `10
ENUM_15	15	`11 `01 `10 `00
ENUM_16	16	`11 `10 `00 `01
ENUM_17	17	`11 `10 `01 `00
ENUM_18	18	`10 `00 `01 `11
ENUM_19	19	`10 `00 `11 `01
ENUM_20	20	`10 `01 `00 `11
ENUM_21	21	`10 `01 `11 `00
ENUM_22	22	`10 `11 `00 `01
ENUM_23	23	`10 `11 `01 `00

MODEM_OOK_PDTC

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x40

Summary: Configures the attack and decay times of the OOK Peak Detector.
Purpose:
- The chip provides two different methods of developing the slicing reference level for demodulation of an OOK signal: Peak Detection, and a Moving Average Filter. This property configures the attack and decay times of the OOK peak detector.
- The rate at which the peak detector charges or discharges is proportional to 2^-ATTACK or 2^-DECAY. As a result, larger values of the ATTACK and DECAY parameters result in slower attack and decay times, respectively.
- Please refer to MODEM_OOK_MISC for more details regarding configuration of the detector(s) used in OOK demodulation.
Default: 0x2b
Register View:

	MODEM_OOK_PDTC
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x40	0	ATTACK			DECAY
	*Default*
	0x0	0x2			0xb

Field Details:

MODEM_OOK_PDTC

ATTACK[2:0]

Description:

Selection of the attack time of the OOK peak detector. The peak detector charges at a rate proportional to 2^-ATTACK.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x7

Default:

0x2

DECAY[3:0]

Description:

Selection of the decay time of the OOK peak detector. The peak detector discharges at a rate proportional to 2^-DECAY.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xf

Default:

0xb

MODEM_OOK_BLOPK

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x41

Summary: Configures the slicing reference level of the OOK Peak Detector.
Purpose:
- The chip provides two different methods of developing the slicing reference level for demodulation of an OOK signal: Peak Detection, and a Moving Average Filter. This property configures the slicing reference level of the OOK peak detector.
- The slicing reference level is defined as a selectable number of dB below the peak measured signal level.
Default: 0x0c
Register View:

	MODEM_OOK_BLOPK
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x41	BW_PK
	*Default*
	0xc

Field Details:

MODEM_OOK_BLOPK

BW_PK[7:0]

Description:

Sets the slicing reference level of the OOK peak detector at a selectable number of dB below the peak measured level.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

Default:

0xc

MODEM_OOK_CNT1

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x42

Summary: OOK control.
Purpose:
- OOK control.
Default: 0xa4
Register View:

	MODEM_OOK_CNT1
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x42	S2P_MAP		OOKFRZEN	MA_FREQDWN	RAW_SYN	SLICER_FAST	SQUELCH
	*Default*
	0x2		0x1	0x0	0x0	0x1	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_OOK_CNT1

S2P_MAP[1:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	S2p_mapping 0.
ENUM_1	1	S2p_mapping 1.
ENUM_2	2	S2p_mapping 2.
ENUM_3	3	S2p_mapping 3.

OOKFRZEN

Description:

This bit only has an effect after preamble is detected.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Normal.
ENUM_1	1	AGC and OOK moving average detector's threshold output will be frozen after the preamble is detected.

MA_FREQDWN

Description:

If set, estimated frequency from MA detector will be trunked 4 bits to avoid overflow.
AFC gain should be increased 16 times if this bit is set.
It is recommended to set this bit for Rb smaller than 1kbps and/or hModInd greater than 50 if MA detector's frequency error estimator is selected.

Default:

0x0

RAW_SYN

Description:: If set, raw data output is synchronized to bit clock.
Default:: 0x0

SLICER_FAST

Description:

This bit effects 2(G)FSK/OOK mode only.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Discriminator's slicer output is de-glitched by bit clock.
ENUM_1	1	Discriminator's slicer output is de-glitched by sample clock to reduce turn-around time.

SQUELCH[1:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	Squelch function is off.
ENUM_1	1	When no signal is received, there is no toggling of RX data output.
ENUM_2	2	When PM is not detected, there is no toggling of RX data output.
ENUM_3	3	When no signal or PM is not detected, there is no toggling of RX data output.

MODEM_OOK_MISC

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x43

Summary: Selects the detector(s) used for demodulation of an OOK signal, or for demodulation of a (G)FSK signal when using the asynchronous demodulator.
Purpose:
- The chip internally implements two different types of demodulator circuits: a synchronous demodulator and an asynchronous demodulator. The synchronous demodulator is typically used for reception of (G)FSK signals with a standard Preamble and packet structure, while the asynchronous demodulator is typically used for reception of (G)FSK signals with non-standard Preamble and packet structures, as well as for all OOK signals.
- Within the asynchronous demodulator, several different types of detectors may be selected to establish the voltage reference level for slicing the received data bits.
- This property is used to select among the following types of detectors: a moving average filter, a peak detector, and a min-max detector.
- The moving average filter detector establishes the slicing threshold level based upon the average of the previous data bits, and thus works best when the data stream is balanced and contains numerous bit transitions (e.g., a Preamble pattern or Manchester-coded data). This type of detector may be used with both OOK and (G)FSK signals.
- The peak detector establishes the slicing threshold level as a selectable number of dB below the peak measured signal level. This type of detector is applicable only for OOK signals.
- The min-max detector establishes the slicing threshold level as the mid-point between the maximum and minimum detected frequency deviation levels. This type of detector is applicable only for (G)FSK signals.
Default: 0x03
Register View:

	MODEM_OOK_MISC
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x43	OOKFASTMA	0	OOK_LIMIT_DISCHG	OOK_SQUELCH_EN	OOK_DISCHG_DIV		DETECTOR
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0		0x3

Field Details:

MODEM_OOK_MISC

OOKFASTMA

Description:

Selects whether the length of the moving average filter window (used to establish the slicing threshold value from the previous data bits) is as specified directly by the MODEM_RAW_SEARCH property, or the value in MODEM_RAW_SEARCH is effectively increased by 2x.
This bit is effective only when demodulating an OOK signal, and allows trading off accuracy of the slicing threshold with response time to the first bit(s) of the OOK packet.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
NORMAL_MA_WINDOW	0	Normal.
LONG_MA_WINDOW	1	Deploy longer MA filter window.

OOK_LIMIT_DISCHG

Description:

Configures if the peak detector discharge is limited.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ALWAYS_DISCHG	0	Peak detector discharges always.
LIMIT_DISCHG	1	Peak detector discharge is disabled when the detected peak is lower than the input signal for low input levels.

OOK_SQUELCH_EN

Description:

When set, squelches the RXDATA bit stream output in real-time on a selected GPIO pin until signal arrival is detected. This squelch functionality is only applicable when demodulating an OOK signal.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disable OOK Squelch functionality..
ENABLED	1	Enable OOK Squelch functionality..

OOK_DISCHG_DIV[1:0]

Description:

OOK Peak Detector discharge divider.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
NO_DISCHG_DIV	0	Does not affect OOK decay rate specified in decay[3:0] in MODEM_OOK_PDTC.
DISCHG_HALF	1	OOK PK Detector discharges at half of the OOK decay rate specified in decay[3:0] in MODEM_OOK_PDTC.
DISCHG_QUARTER	2	OOK PK Detector discharges at a quarter of the OOK decay rate specified in decay[3:0] in MODEM_OOK_PDTC.
DISCHG_EIGHTH	3	OOK PK Detector discharges at an 8th of the decay rate specified in decay[3:0] in MODEM_OOK_PDTC.

DETECTOR[1:0]

Description:

Selects the type of detector used to establish the slicing threshold for asynchronous demodulation of the data.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
MA_PK	0	Both the peak detector and the moving average filter detector are used; the outputs of the two detectors are logically AND'ed together to provide the final RX data stream. This option is applicable only when demodulating an OOK signal.
PK	1	PThe peak detector is selected to establish the slicing threshold level. Selection of the peak detector is only applicable when demodulating an OOK signal. The attack and decay times of the peak detector are controlled through the MODEM_OOK_PDTC property.
MA	2	The moving average filter detector is selected to establish the slicing threshold level. Selection of the MA filter detector is appropriate for demodulation of either an OOK signal or a (G)FSK signal with an unconventional (i.e., "legacy") packet structure. The MA filter window length is configured through the MODEM_RAW_SEARCH property.
MEAN	3	The min-max detector is selected to establish the slicing threshold level as the mid-point between the measured extreme frequency deviation levels. Selection of the min-max detector is applicable when demodulating a (G)FSK signal with an unconventional (i.e., "legacy") packet structure. The search window length (over which the min-max frequency values are measured) is configured through the MODEM_RAW_SEARCH property.

MODEM_RAW_CONTROL

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x45

Summary: Defines gain and enable controls for raw / nonstandard mode.
Purpose:
- Defines gain and enable controls for raw / nonstandard mode.
Default: 0x02
Register View:

	MODEM_RAW_CONTROL
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x45	UNSTDPK	CONSCHK_BYP	0	0	PM_PATTERN		RAWGAIN
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0		0x2

Field Details:

MODEM_RAW_CONTROL

UNSTDPK

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Standard packet mode.
ENUM_1	1	MA or mean frequency error estimator.

CONSCHK_BYP

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	If unstdpk is '1', and conschk_byp= '0', the consecutive '1' or '0' of payload data during 'Sch_Period' will stop the mean value being updated.
ENUM_1	1	Normal.

PM_PATTERN[1:0]

Description:

PM pattern configuration. The preamble detection is done inside modem.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
1010	0	If preamble has '1010' pattern, modem is recommended to work on standard packet mode.
CONSECUTIVE_ONE	1	If preamble has more than 32-bit consecutive '1' pattern, modem is recommended to work on un-standard packet mode.
CONSECUTIVE_ZERO	2	If preamble has more than 32-bit consecutive '0' pattern, modem is recommended work on un-standard packet mode.
RANDOM	3	If preamble is random data, modem is recommended to work on un-standard packet mode.

RAWGAIN[1:0]

Description:

Raw data MA filter gain.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	Gain = 8.
ENUM_1	1	Gain = 4.
ENUM_2	2	Gain = 2.
ENUM_3	3	Gain = 1.

MODEM_RAW_EYE

Group: 0x20
Indexes: 0x46 ... 0x47

Summary: 11 bit eye-open detector threshold.
Purpose:
- 11 bit eye-open detector threshold.
Defaults: 0x00,0xa3
Register View:

	MODEM_RAW_EYE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x46	0	0	0	0	0	RAWEYE[10:8]
0x47	RAWEYE[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x46	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0
0x47	0xa3

Field Details:

MODEM_RAW_EYE

RAWEYE[10:0]

Description:

Eye-open detector threshold.

Default:

0xa3

MODEM_ANT_DIV_MODE

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x48

Summary: Antenna diversity mode settings.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for automatic Antenna Diversity (AntDiv) functionality. During AntDiv operation, the signal strength on two spatially-separated antennas is evaluated and the stronger antenna is selected for reception over the remainder of the packet, thus improving link quality in the presence of fading due to multi-path propagation. This property configures various control bits for the AntDiv algorithm.
- AntDiv functionality is only possible during reception of a packet with a Standard Preamble (i.e., 1010 or 0101 pattern).
- Enabling the AntDiv algorithm creates the signals required for control of an external RF switch, but does not output them on GPIO pin(s). It remains necessary to additionally configure the appropriate GPIO pin(s) to output the ANTENNA_1_SW and ANTENNA_2_SW control signals.
- As the stronger antenna is not known prior to the arrival of the packet, the AntDiv algorithm toggles between antennas with a period determined by the ANWAIT parameter. This toggling action continues until a PREAMBLE_VALID signal is detected on one of the antennas.
- The RSSI level for that antenna is evaluated and stored in memory. The algorithm then briefly selects the alternate antenna and again evaluates the RSSI level. The two RSSI levels are compared and the chip selects the stronger antenna for the remainder of the packet.
- As there may be some slight loss of bit synchronization during the antenna switching process, the chip qualifies the Preamble for a second time after selection of the good antenna. During this 2^nd phase evaluation, the Preamble detection threshold is reduced to a smaller value as specified in the MODEM_ANT_DIV_CONTROL:ANT2PM_THD parameter.
- If the signal strength on the 1^st antenna is sufficiently strong, there is no need to evaluate the signal strength on the alternate antenna as no further improvement in link quality would be gained by selecting an even stronger signal. In such a case, the evaluation phase on the 2^nd antenna may be skipped entirely, as controlled by the SKIP2PH and SKIP2PHTH parameters.
Default: 0x02
Register View:

	MODEM_ANT_DIV_MODE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x48	SWANT_TIMER		BYP1P5	SKIP2PH	SKIP2PHTH	ANWAIT
	*Default*
	0x0		0x0	0x0	0x0	0x2

Field Details:

MODEM_ANT_DIV_MODE

SWANT_TIMER[1:0]

Description:

Selects the number of bit periods to wait for the RSSI value to stabilize during the 2^nd phase antenna evaluation of the AntDiv algorithm.
Some amount of delay is necessary to allow the new signal level on the 2^nd antenna to travel through the entire RX chain and to become stable (i.e., RX processing delay).
This field has no effect if not in AntDiv mode of operation.
The delay time (in bit periods) depends upon the amount of averaging performed on the RSSI signal (selected by the MODEM_ANT_DIV_CONTROL:MATAP bit) and is given by the following formulas:

$T = (SWANT\_TIMER \times 2) + 9 bit periods (150 DPI)$

(MATAP = 0)

$T = (SWANT\_TIMER \times 2) + 13 bit periods (150 DPI)$

(MATAP = 1)

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	9 bit periods (MATAP = 0), 13 bit periods (MATAP = 1)
ENUM_1	1	11 bit periods (MATAP = 0), 15 bit periods (MATAP = 1)
ENUM_2	2	13 bit periods (MATAP = 0), 17 bit periods (MATAP = 1)
ENUM_3	3	15 bit periods (MATAP = 0), 19 bit periods (MATAP = 1)

BYP1P5

Description:

Enables/disables a bias against the 2^nd phase antenna evaluation.
By definition, a PREAMBLE_VALID signal was detected during the initial (1^st phase) antenna evaluation, and indicates the signal strength on that antenna is likely sufficient to receive the packet. With this parameter, the chip may be configured to select the alternate antenna only if the 2^nd phase antenna evaluation exceeds the signal strength on the 1^st antenna by the selected amount of bias.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Bias = 0 dB (2^nd antenna will be selected if its signal strength exceeds the 1^st antenna by any amount).
ENUM_1	1	Bias = 1.5 dB (2^nd antenna will be selected if its signal strength exceeds the 1^st antenna by more than 1.5 dB).

SKIP2PH

Description:

Enables skipping of the 2^nd phase of antenna evaluation on packets where the relative signal strength of the 1^st phase of antenna evaluation exceeds the threshold value selected in SKIP2PHTH, thus reducing packet acquisition time.
If the signal strength of the 1^st phase of antenna evaluation does not exceed the threshold value, the AntDiv algorithm proceeds with the 2^nd phase of antenna evaluation.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	The AntDiv algorithm always evaluates the signal strength on both antennas.
ENUM_1	1	The AntDiv algorithm evaluates the signal strength on the initial antenna (i.e., the antenna on which a PREAMBLE_VALID signal is first detected), but skips evaluation of the alternate antenna when the relative signal strength (above background noise level) exceeds the threshold specified in SKIP2PHTH.

SKIP2PHTH

Description:

Selects the signal strength threshold for determining when the 2^nd phase of antenna evaluation may be skipped.
This threshold is not an absolute value, but is a relative value measured between the RSSI on the initial antenna (i.e., on which the 1^st PREAMBLE_VALID indication was found) and the RSSI value on the previous antenna (presumably taken on noise prior to the arrival of the packet). As a result, this value serves as an approximate "dB above background noise level" threshold.
This parameter has no effect if the SKIP2PH bit is not also set.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	16 dB threshold is set for skipping 2^nd phase antenna detection.
ENUM_1	1	11 dB threshold is set for skipping 2^nd phase antenna detection.

ANWAIT[2:0]

Description:

Configures the time period between toggling selection of antennas prior to arrival of the packet. (Periodic toggling is necessary during the initial search phase as the stronger antenna is not known prior to arrival of the packet.)
This field has no effect if not in AntDiv mode of operation.
The time period between antenna toggling is in increments of bit periods, and depends upon whether AFC is enabled in MODEM_AFC_GAIN:ENAFC according to the following formulas:
$T = (ANWAIT + 2) \times 4 + 3 bit periods (150 DPI)$

(AFC enabled)
$T = (ANWAIT + 2) \times 2 + 3 bit periods (150 DPI)$

(AFC disabled)

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x7

Default:

0x2

MODEM_ANT_DIV_CONTROL

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x49

Summary: Specifies controls for the Antenna Diversity algorithm.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for automatic Antenna Diversity (AntDiv) functionality. This property configures various control bits for the AntDiv algorithm.
- Please refer to the text description for MODEM_ANT_DIV_MODE for more details regarding the Antenna Diversity functionality.
Default: 0x80
Register View:

	MODEM_ANT_DIV_CONTROL
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x49	ANT2PM_THD				MATAP	ANTDIV		RESERVED
	*Default*
	0x8				0x0	0x0		0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_ANT_DIV_CONTROL

ANT2PM_THD[3:0]

Description:

Some slight loss of bit synchronization may be introduced during the antenna switching process. As a result, it is necessary to re-acquire bit timing and re-qualify the Preamble after final selection of the best antenna.
During this re-qualification process, the Preamble detection threshold is reduced (from the value specified in the PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_1:RX_THRESH field) to the smaller value specified in the ANT2PM_THD parameter.
This field has no effect if not in AntDiv mode of operation.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xf

Default:

0x8

MATAP

Description:

Configures the amount of averaging performed on the RSSI measurement by selecting the number of taps for a moving average.
Greater averaging allows for reduced noise variation on the measured RSSI value, but results in a longer required measurement time.
This bit has no effect if not in AntDiv mode of operation.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Moving average filter tap length is 8Tb prior to acquisition of the first PREAMBLE_VALID signal, and 4Tb thereafter.
ENUM_1	1	Moving average filter tap length is 8*Tb.

ANTDIV[1:0]

Description:

"Enables/disables operation of the AntDiv algorithm, resulting in generation of control signals appropriate for control of an antenna switch.
GPIO pin(s) must be additionally configured using GPIO_PIN_CFG to output the ANTENNA_1_SW and ANTENNA_2_SW control signals generated by the AntDiv algorithm.
The functionality of the ANTENNA_1_SW and ANTENNA_2_SW control signals also depends upon the operating mode of the chip (i.e., in RX mode, non-RX mode, or SLEEP mode).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
FIXED	0	RX state: ANTENNA_1_SW=1 and ANTENNA_2_SW=0 Non-RX state: ANTENNA_1_SW=1 and ANTENNA_2_SW = 0 SLEEP state: ANTENNA_1_SW=0 and ANTENNA_2_SW=0.
FIXED_INV	1	RX state: ANTENNA_1_SW=1 and ANTENNA_2_SW=0 Non-RX state: ANTENNA_1_SW=0 and ANTENNA_2_SW = 1 SLEEP state: ANTENNA_1_SW=0 and ANTENNA_2_SW=0.
AUTO	2	RX state: ANTENNA_1_SW and ANTENNA_2_SW = AntDiv algorithm Non-RX state: ANTENNA_1_SW and ANTENNA_2_SW = Selected Antenna SLEEP state: ANTENNA_1_SW=0 and ANTENNA_2_SW=0.
AUTO_INV	3	RX state: ANTENNA_1_SW and ANTENNA_2_SW = AntDiv algorithm Non-RX state: ANTENNA_1_SW and ANTENNA_2_SW = Inverse of selected Antenna SLEEP state: ANTENNA_1_SW=0 and ANTENNA_2_SW=0.

RESERVED

Description:: Reserved bits (should always be written to 0).
Default:: 0x0

MODEM_RSSI_THRESH

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x4a

Summary: Configures the RSSI threshold.
Purpose:
- Selects the threshold for Clear Channel Assessment (CCA) and generation of the RSSI interrupt.
- If the Current RSSI value is above this threshold, a GPIO pin configured to output the CCA signal will be high.
- If the Current RSSI value crosses above this threshold, the RSSI interrupt will be generated.
- If the Latched RSSI value crosses above this threshold, the Latched RSSI interrupt will be generated.
- If enabled in the MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL property, the Latched RSSI value may also be compared against this threshold. The purpose of the comparison is to determine if the Latched RSSI value is below (not above) the threshold; if so, the chip proceeds to the specified START_RX:NEXT_STATE1:RXTIMEOUT_STATE and generates a PREAMBLE_INVALID interrupt.
Default: 0xff
Register View:

	MODEM_RSSI_THRESH
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x4a	RSSI_THRESH
	*Default*
	0xff

Field Details:

MODEM_RSSI_THRESH

RSSI_THRESH[7:0]

Description:

Selects threshold for Clear Channel Assessment and generation of the RSSI interrupt (based upon comparison with the Current RSSI value).

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

Default:

0xff

MODEM_RSSI_JUMP_THRESH

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x4b

Summary: Configures the RSSI Jump Detection threshold.
Purpose:
- The chip provides the ability to detect a jump change in RSSI, and to take action as a result. Please refer to MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL2 for more details regarding configuration of RSSI Jump Detection functionality.
- This property configures the threshold value for RSSI Jump Detection, in steps of 1dB. If the change in RSSI level (measured over a configurable amount of time) exceeds this threshold value, an RSSI Jump Detect interrupt event will be generated.
Default: 0x0c
Register View:

	MODEM_RSSI_JUMP_THRESH
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x4b	0	RSSIJMPTHD
	*Default*
	0x0	0xc

Field Details:

MODEM_RSSI_JUMP_THRESH

RSSIJMPTHD[6:0]

Description:

Sets the threshold value for RSSI Jump Detection, in steps of 1dB.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x7f

Default:

0xc

MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x4c

Summary: Control of the averaging modes and latching time for reporting RSSI value(s).
Purpose:
- Selects if the RSSI value is latched, and at what point in the packet it is latched. The Latched RSSI value may be read by a Fast Response Register, or returned by the GET_MODEM_STATUS command.
- o Selects the number of bit periods over which the RSSI value is measured or averaged.
- Selects if the Latched RSSI value is compared against the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH value, for the purpose of exiting to the RXTIMEOUT_STATE if below threshold.
Default: 0x01
Register View:

	MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x4c	0	0	CHECK_THRESH_AT_LATCH	AVERAGE		LATCH
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0		0x1

Field Details:

MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL

CHECK_THRESH_AT_LATCH

Description:

If this bit is enabled, the Latched RSSI value is compared against the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH value. If the Latched RSSI is below threshold, the chip will transition to the specified START_RX:RXTIMEOUT_STATE and the INVALID_PREAMBLE interrupt will be asserted. If the Latched RSSI is above threshold, the chip will continue reception.
The Latched RSSI exceeding the threshold will generate a Latched RSSI interrupt event.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLE	0	Disable RSSI threshold check after latch.
ENABLE	1	Enable RSSI threshold check after latch.

AVERAGE[1:0]

Description:

"Selects the number of bit periods over which the RSSI value is measured and averaged.
The setting of this bit affects both Current RSSI and Latched RSSI values.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
AVERAGE4	0	The RSSI value is updated at 1Tb bit period intervals but always reflects the average value over the previous 4Tb bit periods.
AVERAGE2	1	The RSSI value is updated at 1Tb bit period intervals but always reflects the average value over the previous 2Tb bit periods.
BIT1	2	The RSSI value is updated every 1*Tb bit period.
SAMPLE1	3	The RSSI value is updated every 1*Ts period (where Ts is the period of the RXDATA oversampling clock). When selected, the latching instant is no longer set by the LATCH field but instead specified by the MODEM_FAST_RSSI_DELAY.

LATCH[2:0]

Description:

Selects the time in the packet at which the Latched RSSI value is latched.
Certain latching instants are available only if averaging is enabled by setting AVERAGE = 0.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
DISABLED	0	Latch is disabled. The returned value of the Latched RSSI will always read 0.
PREAMBLE	1	Latches RSSI at Preamble detect.
SYNC	2	Latches RSSI at Sync Word detect.
RX_STATE1	3	Latches RSSI at 4Tb after RX is enabled (7Tb if AVERAGE = 0).
RX_STATE2	4	(only with AVERAGE=0) Latches RSSI at 11Tb after RX is enabled. (3Tb garbage + 8*Tb)
RX_STATE3	5	(only with AVERAGE=0) Latches RSSI at 15Tb after RX is enabled. (3Tb garbage + 12*Tb)
RX_STATE4	6	(only with AVERAGE=0) Latches RSSI at 19Tb after RX is enabled. (3Tb garbage + 16*Tb)
RX_STATE5	7	(only with AVERAGE=0) Latches RSSI at 23Tb after RX is enabled. (3Tb garbage + 20*Tb)

MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL2

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x4d

Summary: RSSI Jump Detection control.
Purpose:
- The chip provides the ability to detect a jump change in RSSI, and to take action as a result. This functionality may be useful in detection of interference or a "collision" from a secondary incoming packet.
- This property configures various aspects of RSSI Jump Detection. The chip is capable of detecting a jump change in RSSI in either direction (i.e., either a signal increase or a signal decrease). Both polarities of jump detection may be enabled simultaneously, resulting in detection of a Jump-Up or Jump-Down.
- The change in RSSI must exceed the threshold value set in MODEM_RSSI_JUMP_THRESH before being reported as an RSSI Jump event. The chip may be configured to reset the RX state machine upon detection of an RSSI Jump, and thus to automatically begin re-acquisition of the packet. The chip may also be configured to generate an interrupt, as enabled through the INT_CTL_MODEM_ENABLE:RSSI_JUMP_EN bit.
- This functionality is intended to detect an abrupt change in RSSI level, and to not respond to a slow gradual change in RSSI level. This is accomplished by comparing the difference in RSSI level over a programmable time period (selected by the JMPDLYLEN parameter). In this fashion, the chip effectively evaluates the slope of the change in RSSI level.
- The arrival of a desired packet (i.e., the transition from receiving noise to receiving a valid signal) will likely be detected as an RSSI Jump event. For this reason, it is recommended to enable this feature in mid-packet (i.e., after signal qualification such as PREAMBLE_VALID.)
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL2
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x4d	0	0	RSSIJMP_DWN	RSSIJMP_UP	ENRSSIJMP	JMPDLYLEN	ENJMPRX	0
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:
MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL2
RSSIJMP_DWN

Description:

Enables/disables detection of an RSSI jump in the downwards direction.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Detection of RSSI Jump-Down is disabled.

ENUM_1 1 Detection of RSSI Jump-Down is enabled.

RSSIJMP_UP

Description:

Enables/disables detection of an RSSI jump in the upwards direction

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Detection of RSSI Jump-Up is disabled.

ENUM_1 1 Detection of RSSI Jump-Up is enabled.

ENRSSIJMP

Description:

Enables/disables RSSI jump detection. This bit must be enabled before the jump direction bits (RSSIJMP_UP and RSSIJMP_DWN) have effect.

An RSSI Jump Detect interrupt event will be generated when the RSSI difference (measured between time intervals of 2*Tb or 4*Tb) exceeds the MODEM_RSSI_JUMP_THRESH value.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 RSSI Jump Detection is disabled.

ENUM_1 1 RSSI Jump Detection is enabled.

JMPDLYLEN

Description:

Selects the time period over which the difference in RSSI level is measured.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 RSSI Jump Detection is measured between time intervals of 2*Tb.

ENUM_1 1 RSSI Jump Detection is measured between time intervals of 4*Tb.

ENJMPRX

Description:

If set, RSSI jumping detection will force RX machine to reset.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 RX state machine will not be reset upon RSSI Jump Detect.

ENUM_1 1 RX state machine will be reset upon RSSI Jump Detect.

MODEM_RSSI_COMP

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x4e

Summary: RSSI compensation value.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for returning the Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) value through the GET_MODEM_STATUS command. The returned RSSI value is an 8-bit unsigned word whose value is proportional to the strength of the received signal. The RSSI value returned by the GET_MODEM_STATUS command is in increments of approximately 0.5 dB per bit.
- Silicon Labs cannot be aware of the exact RX matching topology and matching component values in use by all customers. Customer applications may vary in the presence or absence of preselection filtering, an external LNA, or RF switch. As a result, Silicon Labs does not guarantee that a given RSSI value corresponds to an exact RF input power level (in dBm).
- The chip provides for an RSSI compensation (or offset) value, in the event that the user desires to calibrate the returned RSSI value to an exact RF input level. The value of the MODEM_RSSI_COMP property is added to the internally measured RSSI level, and thus changes the RSSI value returned by the GET_MODEM_STATUS command. The MODEM_RSSI_COMP value is in increments of 1 dB, and thus changing the compensation value by 1 code will result in the RSSI value returned by the GET_MODEM_STATUS command changing by 2 codes. The returned RSSI value may be converted to an approximate RF input level (in dBm) by the following formula:
  
  $RF\_LEVEL\_dBm = \frac{RSSI\_VALUE}{2}-MODEM\_RSSI\_COMP-70 (150 DPI)$
- The default value of the MODEM_RSSI_COMP property is 0x40 = 64 decimal. This is a sufficient offset value such that the returned RSSI value for measuring noise (i.e., no signal) is slightly greater than zero. A larger compensation value will adjust the returned RSSI value upwards, and a lower value will adjust the RSSI value downwards.
Default: 0x40
Register View:

	MODEM_RSSI_COMP
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x4e	0	RSSI_COMP
	*Default*
	0x0	0x40

Field Details:

MODEM_RSSI_COMP

RSSI_COMP[6:0]

Description:

Compensation (or offset) to the measured RSSI value.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x7f

Default:

0x40

MODEM_RAW_SEARCH2

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x50

Summary: Defines and controls the search period length for the Moving Average and Min-Max detectors.
Purpose:
- The chip internally implements two different types of demodulator circuits: a synchronous demodulator and an asynchronous demodulator. The synchronous demodulator is typically used for reception of (G)FSK signals with a standard Preamble and packet structure, while the asynchronous demodulator is typically used for reception of (G)FSK signals with non-standard Preamble and packet structures, as well as for all OOK signals.
- Within the asynchronous demodulator, several different types of detectors may be selected to establish the voltage reference level for slicing the received data bits, including a moving average filter, a peak detector, and a min-max detector. The type of detector used in the asynchronous demodulator is selected in the MODEM_OOK_MISC property.
  The moving average filter and min-max detectors both establish the slicing threshold level based upon the values of the previous data bits. This property is used to configure the number of previous data bits (i.e., search window length) over which the moving average and min-max detectors establish the slicing threshold level.
- The search period length may be configured for different values before gear switching and after gear switching. A shorter search period window is typically selected prior to gear switching, as the Preamble field usually contains regular bit transitions and fast acquisition is desirable. A longer search period window is typically selected after gear switching, as the Payload fields may contain highly unbalanced data and irregular bit transitions; as a result, a longer search period may be required to capture both polarities of data bits for accurate establishment of the slicing threshold level.
- Alternatively, the slicing threshold search engine may be "frozen" upon gear switching, such that no further adjustments to the slicing threshold level are made across the remainder of the packet.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_RAW_SEARCH2
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x50	SCH_FRZEN	RAWFLT_SEL	SCHPRD_HI			SCHPRD_LOW
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0			0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_RAW_SEARCH2

SCH_FRZEN

Description:

Selects whether the Moving Average or Min-Max slicing threshold search engine is frozen upon gear switching.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Do not freeze the Moving Average or Min-Max slicing threshold search engine upon switching to low gear.
ENABLED	1	Freeze the Moving Average or Min-Max slicing threshold search engine upon switching to low gear.

RAWFLT_SEL

Description:

If set, enable 4-tap MA for raw data filter.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disable raw data filter to use the 4-tap MA filter..
ENABLED	1	Enable raw data filter to use the 4-tap MA filter..

SCHPRD_HI[2:0]

Description:

Selects the search period window length (in bit periods) over which the Moving Average filter or Min-Max detector establishes the slicing threshold level, prior to gear switching (i.e., during high gear).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
SEARCH_2TB	0	Search window period = 2*TB
SEARCH_3TB	1	Search window period = 3*TB
SEARCH_4TB	2	Search window period = 4*TB
SEARCH_5TB	3	Search window period = 5*TB
SEARCH_8TB	4	Search window period = 8*TB
SEARCH_12TB	5	Search window period = 12*TB
SEARCH_14TB	6	Search window period = 14*TB
SEARCH_16TB	7	Search window period = 16*TB

SCHPRD_LOW[2:0]

Description:

Selects the search period window length (in bit periods) over which the Moving Average filter or Min-Max detector establishes the slicing threshold level, after gear switching (i.e., during low gear).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
SEARCH_2TB	0	Search window period = 2*TB
SEARCH_3TB	1	Search window period = 3*TB
SEARCH_4TB	2	Search window period = 4*TB
SEARCH_5TB	3	Search window period = 5*TB
SEARCH_8TB	4	Search window period = 8*TB
SEARCH_12TB	5	Search window period = 12*TB
SEARCH_14TB	6	Search window period = 14*TB
SEARCH_16TB	7	Search window period = 16*TB

MODEM_CLKGEN_BAND

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x51

Summary: Select PLL Synthesizer output divider ratio as a function of frequency band.
Purpose:
- Selects the divide ratio of the configurable divider at the output of the PLL Synthesizer as a function of the desired operating frequency band.
- Configures the PLL Synthesizer for High Performance or Low Power operating mode, allowing a tradeoff between tuning resolution and current consumption.
Default: 0x08
Register View:

	MODEM_CLKGEN_BAND
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x51	0	0	0	FORCE_SY_RECAL	SY_SEL	BAND
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x1	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_CLKGEN_BAND

FORCE_SY_RECAL

Description:

Controls whether synthesizer recalibration is forced during state transitions if the frequency is not changed. e.g. RX to RX between packets on the same frequency.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
FORCE	0	Force Recalibration.
SKIP	1	Skip recalibration if frequency is not changed.

SY_SEL

Description:

Selects the value of the fixed prescaler modulus in the PLL divider feedback path, allowing a tradeoff between improved tuning resolution and synthesizer quantization noise at the expense of slightly increased current consumption. The published formula for calculating FREQ_CONTROL_INTE and FREQ_CONTROL_FRAC assumes this bit is set to '1'; contact Silicon Labs for assistance with frequency calculations when clearing this bit.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Low-power mode (fixed prescaler = Div-by-4). Approximately 200 uA less current than High Performance mode, but with coarser tuning resolution of the PLL Synthesizer.
ENUM_1	1	High Performance mode (fixed prescaler = Div-by-2).

BAND[2:0]

Description:

Selects the PLL Synthesizer output divider ratio appropriate for the desired frequency band. The VCO in the PLL Synthesizer operates at approximately 3.6 GHz; operation across a wide range of frequency bands is obtained by switching in a configurable divider (OUTDIV) at the output of the PLL Synthesizer, e.g., OUTDIV = Div-by-4 for 900 MHz band.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
FVCO_DIV_4	0	Output is FVCO/4.
FVCO_DIV_6	1	Output is FVCO/6.
FVCO_DIV_8	2	Output is FVCO/8.
FVCO_DIV_12	3	Output is FVCO/12.
FVCO_DIV_16	4	Output is FVCO/16.
FVCO_DIV_24	5	Output is FVCO/24.
FVCO_DIV_24_2	6	Output is FVCO/24.
FVCO_DIV_24_3	7	Output is FVCO/24.

MODEM_SPIKE_DET

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x54

Summary: Configures the threshold for (G)FSK Spike Detection.
Purpose:
- Refer to MODEM_DSA_CTRL1 for an overview of the Signal Arrival Detection (DSA) funciton.
- The DSA circuit contains a block that calculates the difference in phase between adjacent samples in the RX Modem; an excessive difference in the phase of adjacent samples is equivalent to a "spike" in the frequency domain and indicates a noisey or weak signal. This property is used to configure the threshold above which an excessive phase difference is considered a spike.
- The DSA algorithm counts the number of spikes over a programmable search period of time; the signal is considered to have arrived if the spike count value is less than a programmable tolerance limit. THe tolerance limit is set in MODEM_DSA_CTRL1:ADJ_SAMP_ERR_TOLERANCE, while the length and number of search period windows is set in MODEM_RAW_SEARCH:SCHPRD_HI and MODEM_DSA_CTRL2:ARRIVAL_THD.
- This property also allows for rmoval of such detected spikes from teh signal path. When enabled, the Modem replaces the "spike" frequency data sample with a value that is interpolated from the frequency samples on either side of the spike.
- This property is only applicable when receiving a (G)FSK signal and should not be used when receiving an OOK signal.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_SPIKE_DET
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x54	SPIKE_REMOVAL_EN	SPIKE_THRESHOLD
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_SPIKE_DET

SPIKE_REMOVAL_EN

Description:

Enable/Disable bit for the Sike Removal function for (G)FSK signals. When enabled, the RX Modem replaces the frequency sample for the detected "spike" with a value that is interpolated from data samples on either side of the spike.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

DISABLED 0 Disable (G)FSK Spike Removal Function.

ENABLED 1 Enable (G)FSK Spike Removal Function.

SPIKE_THRESHOLD[6:0]

Description:

This parameter sets the threshold of phase difference between adjacent samples in the RX Modem, above which the phase difference is considered excessive and to be a "spike". The required value for this parameter depends heavily on RX Modem parameters such as data rate, deviation, and over-sampling rate; Silicon Laboratories recommends use of the value suggested by WDS.

Default:

0x0

MODEM_ONE_SHOT_AFC

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x55

Summary: Configures parameters for th e One Shot AFC function and for BCR timing/acquisition.
Purpose:
- Refer to MODEM_DSA_CTRL1 for an overview of the Signal Arrival Detection (DSA) function.
- The chip provides a conventional method of Automatic Frequency Control (AFC) where the frequency error is estimated during Preamble. The estimated frequency error is used to iteratively adjust the frequency of the PLL Synthesizer in a feedback control loop, driving the error towards zero over several bit periods.
- This property provides for a faster AFC adjustement method, in that the frequency error is estimated once after detection of signal arrival. This "one-shot" frequency error estimate is used to provide a one-time adjustment to the PLL Synthesizer frequency, thus eliminating the need for iterative frequency adjustment cycles.
- This property also provides miscellaneous bits for control of Bit Clock Recovery (BCR) timing and acquisition functions.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_ONE_SHOT_AFC
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x55	ONESHOT_AFC_EN	BCR_ALIGN_EN	EST_OSR_EN	AFCMA_EN	ONESHOT_WAIT_CNT
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_ONE_SHOT_AFC

ONESHOT_AFC_EN

Description:

Conventional AFC methods require iterative adjustments of the PLL Synthesizer frequency over several bit periods until the frequency error is minimized. If this bit is enabled, a one-time estimate of the frequency error is obtained (using the Min-Max frequency detector) upon detection of signal arrival. This "one-shot" frequency error estimate is used to provide a one-time adjustmenet to the PLL Synthesizer frequency, thus eliminating the need for iterative frequency adjustmenet cycles.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disable One shot AFC function.
ENABLED	1	Enable One shot AFC function.

BCR_ALIGN_EN

Description:

When this bit is cleared, the BCR circuit operates continuously and thus attempts to acquire bit timing on the noise that is present prior to arrival of the packet. When this bit is set, the BCR circuit is not released to start tracking the data and acquiring bit timing until signal arrival is detected.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Allow BCR tracking prior to signal arrival.
ENABLED	1	Enable BCR tracking only after signal arrival.

EST_OSR_EN

Description:

The RX modem in th e chip contains a Numerically Controlled Oscillator (NCO) for the purpose of synchronizing a local bit clock to the received data stream. (Please refer to the text descrition for MODEM_BCR_NCO_OFFSET for more details regarding the BCR NCO.)
The free-running frequency of the NCO is normally set to a fixed value (appropriate for the selected data rate) and used throughout the entire packet. However, in the event of receiving a packet with a large error in the data rate, the BCR loop may not be able to maintain tracking without first obtaining a more accurate estimate of the actual received data rate. This compensation is typically needed only when the data rate error is greater than 1%.
The chip can compensate for data rate error by acquiring a new estimate for the NCO frequency from the received data itself. This new NCO frequency estimate is obtained during the Preamble field, and then used for the remainder of the packet.
The chip already provides a separate control bit MODEM_BCR_MISC1:RXNCOCOMP for obtaining the data rate error estimate upon detection of PREAMBLE_VALID. If the EST_OSR_EN bit is additionally set, the chip then obtains the data rate error estimate at the instant of signal arrival detection (i.e., much more quickly). If the RXNCOCOMP bit is cleared, no data rate error estimation is performed in any fashion.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disable data rate error measurement and compensation upon signal arrival detection.
ENABLED	1	Enable data rate error measurement and compensation upon signal arrival detection.

AFCMA_EN

Description:

This bit enables a Moving Average filter in the signal path used to obtain the estimate of frequency error for the AFC function. The tap length of the MA filter is 4 taps.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disable MA filter for frequency error estimator.
ENABLED	1	Enable MA filter for frequency error estimator.

ONESHOT_WAIT_CNT[3:0]

Description:: Adjustment of the PLL Synthesizer frequency by AFC algorithm may result in corruption of several data bits until the new signal frequency propagates completely through the RX signal chain. This parameter defines a programmable delay time, in bit periods. Upon expiration of this delay period, the RX Modem obtains one final estimate of the residual frequency error. This frequency error estimate is not used to further adjust the PLL Synthesizer frequency but is instead used to digitally compensate the BCR and Slicer functions in the RX Modem. AFC compensation is then frozen for the remainder of the packet.
Min:: 0x0
Max:: 0xf
Default:: 0x0

MODEM_RSSI_HYSTERESIS

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x56

Summary: Configures the amount of hysteresis on the RSSI threshold detection function.
Purpose:
- This chip is capable of generating an interrupt event and interrupt status indication when the received signal strength exceeds a threshold level, as configured in MODEM_RSSI_THRESH.
- The RSSI status bit in the GET_INT_STATUS:MODEM_STATUS response stream reflects the real-time condition of the received signal strength, relative to the programmed RSSI threshold. That is, the RSSI status bit will return a '1' if the RSSI is above the threshold at the time of GIT_INT_STATUS command is issued, but will return a '0' if the RSSI subsequenty drops below the threshold and the GET_INT_STATUS command is issued again.
- It is desirable for the RSSI comparator function to have some amount of hysteresis so that the RSSI status output bit does not "chatter" when receiving a signal very near the programmed threshold level.
- This property defines the amount of hysteresis for the RSSI level which is reflected in the GET_INT_STATUS:MODEM_STATUS:RSSI bit.
Default: 0xff
Register View:

	MODEM_RSSI_HYSTERESIS
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x56	RSSI_HYSTERESIS
	*Default*
	0xff

Field Details:

MODEM_RSSI_HYSTERESIS

RSSI_HYSTERESIS[7:0]

Description:

Defines the amount of hysteresis for the RSSI level which is reflected in the GET_INT_STATUS:MODEM_STATUS:RSSI bit (i.e., the amount by which the signal strength much drop before the RSSI status bit returns to 0). This parameter adjusts the RSSI hysteresis level in increments of 0.5 dB.

Min:

0x1

Max:

0xff

Default:

0xff

MODEM_RSSI_MUTE

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x57

Summary: Configures muting of the RSSI to avoid false RSSI interrupts.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for generating an RSSI interrupt event when the received signal strength exceeds the threshold level set in MODEM_RSSI_THRESH.
- It is sometimes possible to observe a false RSSI interrupt (i.e., an RSSI interrupt that indicates the presence of an on-channel signal when in fact no on-channel signal exists). This condition may be caused by enabling the receiver while a strong signal is present in an adjacent or nearby channel. While the undesired signal is not present on the tuned channel, its abrupt "burst-like" envelope (as viewed in the time domain) gives rise to spectral spallter (as viewed in the frequency domain). Sidebands of this spectral splatter can briefly appear as energy on the desired channel, possibly leading to a false RSSI interrupt indication.
- The chip provides a countermeasure against such false RSSI interrupts by only enabling the RSSI hardware after a programmable delay period has expired (i.e., after the transient energy has decayed).
- This property enables this RSSI delay feature, and configures the programmable delay period.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_RSSI_MUTE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x57	0	0	0	0	RSSI_DELAY	RSSI_DELAY_CNT
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_RSSI_MUTE

RSSI_DELAY

Description:

If this bit is set, the RSSI circuitry will not be enabled until expiration of the delay period configured in MODEM_RSSI_MUTE:RSSI_DELAY_CNT. If cleared, the RSSI circuitry will be enabled immediately upon entering RX mode.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

DISABLED 0 RSSI is enabled immediately upon entering RX mode.

ENABLED 1 Enable RSSI only after delay period expires.

RSSI_DELAY_CNT[2:0]

Description:

This parameter defines the delay period (in bit periods) before the RSSI circuitry is enabled, after entering RX mode.

Default:

0x0

MODEM_FAST_RSSI_DELAY

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x58

Summary: Configures the delay for fast RSSI Latching mode.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for latching the RSSI value at programmable points in time in the packet structure. The latching point is configured by the MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL:LATCH field, and allows latching upon certain events (e.g., Preamble Detection or Sync Word Detection) or upon expiration of certain timer periods (i.e., 'X' bit periods after entering RX mode).
- Applications that scan channels rapidly desire to assess the RSSI level as quickly as possible. The fastest option that may be selected by the MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL:LATCH field is latching at 4*Tb after entering RX mode.
- While it is not feasible to sample and latch the RSSI value immediately upon entering RX mode (due to the time required for the signal to propogate through the entire RX chain), it is possible to configure the chip to latch the RSSI somewhat faster than 4*Tb.
- To access this faster latching option, it is necessary to switch the latching delay timer from counting bit periods (i.e., 1*Tb increments) to counting RX data over-sampling clock periods (i.e., 1*Ts increments). This switch in clock source is accomplished by setting MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL:AVERAGE = 3 = enum SAMPLE1.
- When the oversampling clock source is selected by MODEM_RSSI_CONTROL:AVERAGE, this property defines the number of sample clocks (after entering RX mode before the RSSI is latched.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_FAST_RSSI_DELAY
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x58	FAST_RSSI_DELAY
	*Default*
	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_FAST_RSSI_DELAY

FAST_RSSI_DELAY[7:0]

Description:

Defines the number of RX data oversampling clock periods (1*Ts) before RSSI is latched, after entering RX mode.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

Default:

0x0

MODEM_PSM

Group: 0x20
Indexes: 0x59 ... 0x5a

Summary: Configures the Preamble Sense Mode feature
Purpose:
- Preamble Sense Mode duty cycles the receiver while the radio is searching for a preamble in order to save current consumption. For this feature to work, this property must be nonzero and START_RX:NEXT_STATE1:RX_TIMEOUT_STATE must be set to RX_IDLE.
Defaults: 0x00,0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_PSM
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x59	0	0	0	0	IDLE_TIME[11:8]
0x5a	IDLE_TIME[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x59	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0
0x5a	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_PSM

IDLE_TIME[11:0]

Description:

Putting a 0 in this field will disable the low power preamble search feature. Otherwise this field defines the amount of time to stay in RX_IDLE state when a signal is not detected in RX_STATE as determined by the formula:
$_{RX\_IDLE\_TIME\mathit{seconds}} = (\frac{256 \times IDLE\_TIME} {F_{XTAL}}) (150 DPI)$

Default:

0x0

MODEM_DSA_CTRL1

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x5b

Summary: Configures parameters for the Signal Arrival Detection circuit block and algorithm.
Purpose:
- The chip contains a circuit block called the Signal Arrival Detector (DSA) which provides alternate methods of qualifying the arrival of a valid signal, apart from the conventional methods of Preamble Detection and RSSI/Clear Channel Assessment.
- These new methods include: detection of the presence of absence of noise-like "spikes" in the demodulated FM signal, verification of the peak-to-peak demodulated FM deviation is within certain boundary limits, and the verification that the signal strength is above a certain programmable threshold.
- The advantage of the DSA is that it can provide validation of the presence of a signal more quickly than with conventional Preamble Detection, allowing operation with shorter Preamble fields.
- This property provides the master Enable/Disable control for the DSA algorithm, and is also used to select the source metric by which the signal is qualified.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_DSA_CTRL1
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x5b	QUAL_SOURCE		DSA_EN	ADJ_SAMP_ERR_TOLERANCE
	*Default*
	0x0		0x0	0x0

Field Details:
MODEM_DSA_CTRL1
QUAL_SOURCE[1:0]

Description:

This field selects the source metric by which the DSA algorithm will decide if the signal has arrived.

0 = Spike Detection qualifier. THe DSA algorithm calculates the difference in phase between adjacent samples in the RX Modem; an excessive difference in phase of adjacent samples is equivalent to a "spike" in the frequency domain and indicates a noisy or weak signal. The DSA algorithm counts the number of spikes over a programmable search period of time; the signal is considered to have arrived if the spike count value is less than a programmable threshold. This option is only applicable when receiving a (G)FSK signal and should not be used when receiving an OOK signal.

1 = Spike detection and Eye Opening Qualifier. This qualification method logically-ANDs the results from two different qualification methods; the signal is considered to have arrived if both are true. The Spike Detection qualification method is discussed above. The Eye Opening qualification measures the peak-to-peak deviation of the signal over a programmable search period of time, and the signal is considered valid if the deviation remains within a programmable limit window. This option is only applicable when receiving a (G)FSK signal and should not be used when receiving an OOK signal.

2 = RSSI qualifier. The signal is considered valid if the measured RSSI is above the threshold set in the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH property.

3 = Eye Opening and RSSI qualifier. This qualification method logicall-ANDs the results from the Eye Opening qualifier and the RSSI qualifier; the signal is considered to have arrived if both are true.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

SPIKE_QUAL 0 Spike Detection Qualifier

SPIKE_EYE_QUAL 1 Spike Detection and Eye Opening Qualifier

DSA_EN

Description:

Enable/Disable the Signal Arrival Detector. This bit provides the master Enable/Disable function for the DSA algorithm and OOK Squelch function. No DSA functions may be accessed unless this bit is enabled.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

DISABLED 0 Disable Signal Arrival Detection algorithm

ENABLED 1 Enable Signal Arrival Detection algorithm

ADJ_SAMP_ERR_TOLERANCE[4:0]

Description:

This parameter sets the number of error pulses (i.e., "spikes") from the adjacent sample differentiator block that can be tolerated within one search period window. The signal is considered to have arrived when the detected number of spikes remains below this tolerance limit for the number of consecutive search periods set by the MODEM_DSA_CTRL2:ARRIVAL_THD parameter.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1f

Default:

0x0

MODEM_DSA_CTRL2

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x5c

Summary: Configures parameters for the Signal Arrival Detection circuit block and algorithm.
Purpose:
- Refer to MODEM_DSA_CTRL1 for an overview of the Signal Arrival Detection (DSA) function.
- This property configures a parameter related to the Spike Detection qualification method.
- This property also provides for selecting a "middle gear" for gear shifting of the Bit Clock Recovery (BCR) circuit during bit timing acquisition.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_DSA_CTRL2
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x5c	0	SYNC_QUAL	BCR_GEAR_SHIFT	0	ARRIVAL_THD
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_DSA_CTRL2

SYNC_QUAL

Description:

Enable signal arrival detection block to qualify sync word detection

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

DISABLED 0 Disable Signal Arrival Detection algorithm to qualify sync word.

ENABLED 1 Enable Signal Arrival Detection algorithm to qualify sync word.

BCR_GEAR_SHIFT

Description:

The Bit Clock Recovery (BCR) circuitry normally acquires bit timing and synchronization in a fast tracking mode during the Preamble, and gear-shifts to a lower tracking speed (with reduced clock jitter) after signal qualification (e.g., Preamble Detection). However, certain link protocols contain very short Preambles and may not provide sufficient time for the chip to fully acquire bit timing before the Sync Word is encountered. For such protocols, it may be advantageous to gear shift to a medium speed tracking mode upon signal qualification, allowing the chip to continue to acquire bit timing during the Sync Word. When enabled, the chip will gear shift to a medium tracking mode upon DSA signal qualification, and will further gear shift to low speed tracking mode upon Sync Word detection.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

DISABLED 0 Disable BCR gear-shifting to middle gear upon DSA qualification.

ENABLED 1 Enable BCR gear-shifting to middle gear upon DSA qualification.

ARRIVAL_THD[3:0]

Description:

This proeprty relates to configuration of the Spike Detection qualification method. As discussed in MODEM_DSA_CTRL1, the number of spikes detected within a certain search period window must be less than the tolerance limit set by MODEM_DSA_CTRL1:ADJ_SAMP_ERR_TOLERANCE. The search period window length (in bit periods) is selected by MODEM_RAW_SEARCH2:SCHPRD_HI. However, it is not sufficient for the number of detected spikes to remain below the tolerance limit for a single search period; instead, the signal is only considered to have arrived when the spike tolerance limit is not exceeded for ARRIVAL_THD consecutive search periods.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xf

Default:

0x0

MODEM_DSA_QUAL

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x5d

Summary: Configures parameters for the Eye Opening qualification m ethod of the Signal Arrival Detection algorithm.
Purpose:
- Refer to MODEM_DSA_CTRL1 for an overview of the Signal Arrival Detection (DSA) function.
- The DSA circuit contains a block that measures peak-to-peak deviation of the signal over a programmable search period of time. The signal is considered valid if the peak-to-peak deviation remains within a programmable "window"(i.e., the deviation is above a minimum limit and below a maximum limit value).
- The MODEM_DSA_QUAL:ARRQUAL parameter defines the center value of this limit window; the minimum and maximum limits of the window are obtained by internally multiplying the ARRQUAL parameter by fixed scale factors.
- The period of time over which the DSA algorithm measures the peak-to-peak deviation is configured by the MODEM_RAW_SEARCH2:SCHPRD_HI parmeter.
- It is additionally possible to enable a Moving Average filter on the measured value of peak-to-peak deviation.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_DSA_QUAL
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x5d	EYE_QUAL_SEL	ARRQUAL
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_DSA_QUAL

EYE_QUAL_SEL

Description:

This bit enables/disables a moving average filter in the frequency demodulator path used in the Eye Opening qualifier for the DSA. This MA filter function helps "smooth out" noise-like spikes in the frequency domain when operating at weak or noisy signal levels. However suppression of these spikes may not be desirable when using Spike Detection as the qualification source for the DSA.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

DISABLED 0 Disable MA filter on Eye Qualifier signal path.

ENABLED 1 Enable MA filter on Eye Qualifier signal path.

ARRQUAL[6:0]

Description:

This parmeter configures the center value of the deviation limit window, against which the measured peak-to-peak deviation is compared. The measured deviation must remain within the limit window over the search period of time for the signal to be considered valid. The required value for this parameter depends heavily on RX Modem parameters such as data rate, deviation, and over-sampling rate. Silicon Laboratories recommends use of the value suggested by WDS.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x7f

Default:

0x0

MODEM_DSA_RSSI

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x5e

Summary: Signal Arrival Detect RSSI Qualifier Config
Purpose:
- Configures RSSI Qualifier options for the Signal Arrival Detection algorithm
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_DSA_RSSI
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x5e	SQUELCH_EN	DSA_RSSI_THRESHOLD
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_DSA_RSSI

SQUELCH_EN

Description:

Enable squelch function and replace RSSI above threshold interrupt

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disable squelch function which replaces RSSI above threshold interrupt.
ENABLED	1	Enable squelch function which replaces RSSI above threshold interrupt.

DSA_RSSI_THRESHOLD[6:0]

Description:: Signal Arrival RSSI Threshold
Min:: 0x0
Max:: 0x7f
Default:: 0x0

MODEM_DSA_MISC

Group: 0x20
Index: 0x5f

Summary: Miscellaneous detection of signal arrival bits.
Purpose:
- Miscellaneous detection of signal arrival bits.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_DSA_MISC
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x5f	CC_ASSESS_SEL	EYEXEST_EN	EYEXEST_FAST	0	0	LOW_DUTY
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_DSA_MISC

CC_ASSESS_SEL

Description:

DSA replaces above RSSI threshold detection interrupt

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disable DSA replacing RSSI above threshold detection interrupt for clear channel assessment..
ENABLED	1	Enable DSA replacing RSSI above threshold detection interrupt for clear channel assessment..

EYEXEST_EN

Description:

If enabled, include eye opening measurement in time domain in signal arrival detection

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disable eye opening measurement in time domain as a factor of signal arrival detection..
ENABLED	1	Enable eye opening measurement in time domain as a factor of signal arrival detection..

EYEXEST_FAST

Description:

Define the window for eye opening measurement in time domain.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
WINDOW4	0	Use a 4-bit observation window for eye-opening measurement in time domain.
WINDOW8	1	Use a 8-bit observation window for eye-opening measurement in time domain.

LOW_DUTY[2:0]

Description:: Used to accommodate filter propagation delay. During this time the signal arrival detector is ignored.
Default:: 0x0

MODEM_CHFLT

MODEM_CHFLT_RX1_CHFLT_COE

Group: 0x21
Indexes: 0x00 ... 0x11

Summary: Filter coefficients for the first set of RX filter coefficients.
Purpose:
- The chip implements the RX channel selection bandpass filtering in the digital domain as an FIR filter. The MODEM_CHFLT_RX1_CHFLT_COE property defines the values for the filter tap coefficients.
- The chip provides for two different sets of RX filter coefficients (MODEM_CHFLT_RX1 and MODEM_CHFLT_RX2). This property define the values for the first set of filter coefficients; see also the text description for the MODEM_CHFLT_RX2_CHFLT_COE property for a discussion of the second set of filter coefficients and use of adaptive RX filter bandwidth across the packet.
- By default, the digital filter is 27 taps in length. However, it is possible to configure the RX Modem for a channel selection filter with only 15 taps; the advantage of the 15-tap filter is a reduction in filter processing delay at the expense of reduced filtering performance (e.g., adjacent channel selectivity).
- The values of the tap coefficients are symmetrical; that is, the value of COEFF26=COEFF0, COEFF25=COEFF1, and so on. Thus it is only necessary to store 14 filter coefficients; the internal circuitry obtains the remaining coefficients through symmetry. The programmed values of coefficients are the same when operating in the reduced performance mode (i.e., 15-tap filter), but the lower six coefficients are not used.
- Each filter tap coefficient is a 10-bit signed value. The lower 8-bits of each coefficient are held in the properties at indexes 0x00 through 0x0D, while the top two bits are packed into the properties at indexes 0x0E through 0x11.
- Silicon Labs has pre-calculated 15 different sets of filter tap coefficients. The WDS Calculator will recommend one of these filter sets, based upon the RX filter bandwidth required to receive the desired signal. The filter bandwidth is a function of both the selected filter set, as well as the filter clock decimation ratio (see the MODEM_DECIMATION_CFG1/0 properties).
Defaults: 0xff,0xba,0x0f,0x51,0xcf,0xa9,0xc9,0xfc,0x1b,0x1e,0x0f,0x01,0xfc,0xfd,0x15,0xff,0x00,0x0f
Register View:

	MODEM_CHFLT_RX1_CHFLT_COE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	RX1_CHFLT_COE13[7:0]
0x01	RX1_CHFLT_COE12[7:0]
0x02	RX1_CHFLT_COE11[7:0]
0x03	RX1_CHFLT_COE10[7:0]
0x04	RX1_CHFLT_COE9[7:0]
0x05	RX1_CHFLT_COE8[7:0]
0x06	RX1_CHFLT_COE7[7:0]
0x07	RX1_CHFLT_COE6[7:0]
0x08	RX1_CHFLT_COE5[7:0]
0x09	RX1_CHFLT_COE4[7:0]
0x0a	RX1_CHFLT_COE3[7:0]
0x0b	RX1_CHFLT_COE2[7:0]
0x0c	RX1_CHFLT_COE1[7:0]
0x0d	RX1_CHFLT_COE0[7:0]
0x0e	RX1_CHFLT_COE10[9:8]		RX1_CHFLT_COE11[9:8]		RX1_CHFLT_COE12[9:8]		RX1_CHFLT_COE13[9:8]
0x0f	RX1_CHFLT_COE6[9:8]		RX1_CHFLT_COE7[9:8]		RX1_CHFLT_COE8[9:8]		RX1_CHFLT_COE9[9:8]
0x10	RX1_CHFLT_COE2[9:8]		RX1_CHFLT_COE3[9:8]		RX1_CHFLT_COE4[9:8]		RX1_CHFLT_COE5[9:8]
0x11	0	0	0	0	RX1_CHFLT_COE0[9:8]		RX1_CHFLT_COE1[9:8]
	*Defaults*
0x00	0xff
0x01	0xba
0x02	0xf
0x03	0x51
0x04	0xcf
0x05	0xa9
0x06	0xc9
0x07	0xfc
0x08	0x1b
0x09	0x1e
0x0a	0xf
0x0b	0x1
0x0c	0xfc
0x0d	0xfd
0x0e	0x0		0x1		0x1		0x1
0x0f	0x3		0x3		0x3		0x3
0x10	0x0		0x0		0x0		0x0
0x11	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x3		0x3

Field Details:

MODEM_CHFLT_RX1_CHFLT_COE

RX1_CHFLT_COE13[9:0]

Description:

rx1_chflt_coe13

Default:

0x1ff

RX1_CHFLT_COE12[9:0]

Description:

rx1_chflt_coe12

Default:

0x1ba

RX1_CHFLT_COE11[9:0]

Description:

rx1_chflt_coe11

Default:

0x10f

RX1_CHFLT_COE10[9:0]

Description:

rx1_chflt_coe10

Default:

0x51

RX1_CHFLT_COE9[9:0]

Description:

rx1_chflt_coe9

Default:

0x3cf

RX1_CHFLT_COE8[9:0]

Description:

rx1_chflt_coe8

Default:

0x3a9

RX1_CHFLT_COE7[9:0]

Description:

rx1_chflt_coe7

Default:

0x3c9

RX1_CHFLT_COE6[9:0]

Description:

rx1_chflt_coe6

Default:

0x3fc

RX1_CHFLT_COE5[9:0]

Description:

rx1_chflt_coe5

Default:

0x1b

RX1_CHFLT_COE4[9:0]

Description:

rx1_chflt_coe4

Default:

0x1e

RX1_CHFLT_COE3[9:0]

Description:

rx1_chflt_coe3

Default:

0xf

RX1_CHFLT_COE2[9:0]

Description:

rx1_chflt_coe2

Default:

0x1

RX1_CHFLT_COE1[9:0]

Description:

rx1_chflt_coe1

Default:

0x3fc

RX1_CHFLT_COE0[9:0]

Description:

rx1_chflt_coe0

Default:

0x3fd

MODEM_CHFLT_RX2_CHFLT_COE

Group: 0x21
Indexes: 0x12 ... 0x23

Summary: Filter coefficients for the second set of RX filter coefficients.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for two different sets of RX filter coefficients (MODEM_CHFLT_RX1 and MODEM_CHFLT_RX2). This property defines the values for the second set of filter coefficients; see also the text description for the MODEM_CHFLT_RX1_CHFLT_COE property for a general discussion of the configuration of filter tap coefficients.
- Two different sets of filter tap coefficients (i.e., filter bandwidths) are provided to allow narrowing the RX bandwidth after the PLL-based AFC algorithm has acquired the signal and centered it in the filter passband. With no residual frequency error, the filter bandwidth may be reduced to pass only the modulation bandwidth of the signal, thus improving sensitivity over the remainder of the packet.
- This adaptive RX bandwidth feature is only applicable when PLL AFC is enabled (by setting MODEM_AFC_MISC:ENFBPLL), and the adaptive RX bandwidth function is enabled (by setting MODEM_AFC_GAIN:AFCBD).
- When the adaptive RX bandwidth feature is enabled, the first set of filter coefficients (defined in the MODEM_CHFLT_RX1_CHFLT_COE property) is effective prior to gear-switching (e.g., detection of PREAMBLE_VALID) while the second set of filter coefficients (defined in the MODEM_CHFLT_RX2_CHFLT_COE property) is effective after gear-switching. When the adaptive RX bandwidth feature is disabled, the first set of filter coefficients is used for the entire packet.
Defaults: 0xff,0xc4,0x30,0x7f,0xf5,0xb5,0xb8,0xde,0x05,0x17,0x16,0x0c,0x03,0x00,0x15,0xff,0x00,0x00
Register View:

	MODEM_CHFLT_RX2_CHFLT_COE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x12	RX2_CHFLT_COE13[7:0]
0x13	RX2_CHFLT_COE12[7:0]
0x14	RX2_CHFLT_COE11[7:0]
0x15	RX2_CHFLT_COE10[7:0]
0x16	RX2_CHFLT_COE9[7:0]
0x17	RX2_CHFLT_COE8[7:0]
0x18	RX2_CHFLT_COE7[7:0]
0x19	RX2_CHFLT_COE6[7:0]
0x1a	RX2_CHFLT_COE5[7:0]
0x1b	RX2_CHFLT_COE4[7:0]
0x1c	RX2_CHFLT_COE3[7:0]
0x1d	RX2_CHFLT_COE2[7:0]
0x1e	RX2_CHFLT_COE1[7:0]
0x1f	RX2_CHFLT_COE0[7:0]
0x20	RX2_CHFLT_COE10[9:8]		RX2_CHFLT_COE11[9:8]		RX2_CHFLT_COE12[9:8]		RX2_CHFLT_COE13[9:8]
0x21	RX2_CHFLT_COE6[9:8]		RX2_CHFLT_COE7[9:8]		RX2_CHFLT_COE8[9:8]		RX2_CHFLT_COE9[9:8]
0x22	RX2_CHFLT_COE2[9:8]		RX2_CHFLT_COE3[9:8]		RX2_CHFLT_COE4[9:8]		RX2_CHFLT_COE5[9:8]
0x23	0	0	0	0	RX2_CHFLT_COE0[9:8]		RX2_CHFLT_COE1[9:8]
	*Defaults*
0x12	0xff
0x13	0xc4
0x14	0x30
0x15	0x7f
0x16	0xf5
0x17	0xb5
0x18	0xb8
0x19	0xde
0x1a	0x5
0x1b	0x17
0x1c	0x16
0x1d	0xc
0x1e	0x3
0x1f	0x0
0x20	0x0		0x1		0x1		0x1
0x21	0x3		0x3		0x3		0x3
0x22	0x0		0x0		0x0		0x0
0x23	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0		0x0

Field Details:

MODEM_CHFLT_RX2_CHFLT_COE

RX2_CHFLT_COE13[9:0]

Description:

rx2_chflt_coe13

Default:

0x1ff

RX2_CHFLT_COE12[9:0]

Description:

rx2_chflt_coe12

Default:

0x1c4

RX2_CHFLT_COE11[9:0]

Description:

rx2_chflt_coe11

Default:

0x130

RX2_CHFLT_COE10[9:0]

Description:

rx2_chflt_coe10

Default:

0x7f

RX2_CHFLT_COE9[9:0]

Description:

rx2_chflt_coe9

Default:

0x3f5

RX2_CHFLT_COE8[9:0]

Description:

rx2_chflt_coe8

Default:

0x3b5

RX2_CHFLT_COE7[9:0]

Description:

rx2_chflt_coe7

Default:

0x3b8

RX2_CHFLT_COE6[9:0]

Description:

rx2_chflt_coe6

Default:

0x3de

RX2_CHFLT_COE5[9:0]

Description:

rx2_chflt_coe5

Default:

0x5

RX2_CHFLT_COE4[9:0]

Description:

rx2_chflt_coe4

Default:

0x17

RX2_CHFLT_COE3[9:0]

Description:

rx2_chflt_coe3

Default:

0x16

RX2_CHFLT_COE2[9:0]

Description:

rx2_chflt_coe2

Default:

0xc

RX2_CHFLT_COE1[9:0]

Description:

rx2_chflt_coe1

Default:

0x3

RX2_CHFLT_COE0[9:0]

Description:

rx2_chflt_coe0

Default:

0x0

PA

PA_MODE

Group: 0x22
Index: 0x00

Summary: Selects the PA operating mode, and selects resolution of PA power adjustment (i.e., step size).
Purpose:
- The PA output circuit is designed to operate as either a switching-type amplifier, or as a switched programmable current source.
- This property selects the operating mode of the PA. A switching-type amplifier (matched for Class-E or Square Wave operation) will typically provide higher output power and better current efficiency, while a switched current amplifier will typically provide more linear control of output power and better power flatness over variations in VDD supply voltage.
- The output power level is configured through the PA_PWR_LVL property and (when operating in Switched Current mode) the PA_BIAS_CLKDUTY property.
- The chip provides a signal on the TXRAMP pin for ramping control of an external PA. This signal may be enabled/disabled through the EXT_PA_RAMP bit in this property; configuration of the external ramping signal itself is provided in the PA_RAMP_EX property.
- The different chips within the Si446x family (e.g., Si4460/61/63/64) contain a variety of sizes and groups of PA output devices. These are selected to obtain the desired output power level and power adjustment step size. This configuration is automatically handled inside the chip according to chip type; the PA_SEL field does not need to be configured to obtain proper operation of the PA. However, there is no harm in continuing to set this parameter to the value(s) suggested by WDS.
Default: 0x08
Register View:

	PA_MODE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	EXT_PA_RAMP	DIG_PWR_SEQ	PA_SEL				0	PA_MODE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x2				0x0	0x0

Field Details:

PA_MODE

EXT_PA_RAMP

Description:

When set, enables a signal on the TXRAMP pin for ramping control of an external PA.
The characteristics of the external ramping signal are configured through the PA_RAMP_EX property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Disable external TX ramp signal.
ENUM_1	1	Enable external TX ramp signal.

DIG_PWR_SEQ

Description:

Enable digital power sequencing. Step size and time delay is defined in PA_DIG_PWR_SEQ_CONFIG.
When set, provides for much slower ramp times of the internal PA by digitally sequencing the number of enabled PA output device fingers. The number of enabled output device fingers is stepped from 0 up to the value programmed in PA_PWR_LVL.
The number of device fingers enabled per step and the time delay between steps is configured in the PA_DIG_PWR_SEQ_CONFIG property.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLE	0	Disable digital power sequencing.
ENABLE	1	Enable digital power sequencing.

PA_SEL[3:0]

Description:

Selects the appropriate groups and sizes of PA output devices to obtain the desired output power level and power adjustment step size, according to chip type.
Use of enumerations other than those listed below are not recommended.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
HP_FINE	1	Si4463/64: lower maximum power but with finer step size (~2x).
HP_COARSE	2	Si4463/64: higher maximum power but with larger step size.
LP	6	Si4460: lower-power applications.
MP	8	Si4461: medium-power applications.

PA_MODE

Description:

Selects the operating mode of the PA.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
CLE	0	Switching-Amplifier Mode (for Class-E or Square Wave match).
SWC	1	Switched Current Mode.

PA_PWR_LVL

Group: 0x22
Index: 0x01

Summary: Configuration of PA output power level.
Purpose:
- The PA circuitry in the chip contains an output device whose size may be adjusted by enabling/disabling different numbers of device fingers. Selection of a higher value results in an increase in TX output power.
- The relationship between output power and the number of enabled device fingers is not necessarily linear, and is dependent upon the PA mode of operation (e.g., Class-E or Switched Current), the duty cycle of the drive signal to the output circuit, the VDD supply voltage, and the output match. As a result, there is no simple formula to relate the setting of the PA_PWR_LVL property to an absolute value of output power in dBm.
- The adjustment resolution of the TX output power is very fine (step size < 0.1 dB) when operating near the maximum power setting, but becomes coarser as the output power level is reduced.
Default: 0x7f
Register View:

	PA_PWR_LVL
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x01	0	DDAC
	*Default*
	0x0	0x7f

Field Details:

PA_PWR_LVL

DDAC[6:0]

Description:

Selects the number of enabled output device fingers, with a larger value resulting in increased output power.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x7f

Default:

0x7f

PA_BIAS_CLKDUTY

Group: 0x22
Index: 0x02

Summary: Configuration of the PA Bias and duty cycle of the TX clock source.
Purpose:
- The PA output circuit is designed to operate as either a switching-type amplifier, or as a switched programmable current source. The PA mode of operation is selected through the PA_MODE property; the bias current (when operated as a switched programmable current source) and the duty cycle of the driving TX clock source are selected through this property.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PA_BIAS_CLKDUTY
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x02	CLK_DUTY		OB
	*Default*
	0x0		0x0

Field Details:

PA_BIAS_CLKDUTY

CLK_DUTY[1:0]

Description:

This parameter adjusts the drive mode (single-ended or complementary) and duty cycle of the TX clock source to the PA output devices.
Silicon Labs recommends use of the modes listed below, as they have been optimized for the listed chips and associated output power levels.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DIFF_50	0	Complementary drive signals, 50% duty cycle. Recommended for use with Si4463/Si4464 high-power (e.g., +20dBm)applications, and as an option for Si4461 medium-power (e.g., +13 to +16 dBm) applications.
SINGLE_25	3	Single-ended drive signal, 25% duty cycle. Recommended for use with Si4460 low-power (e.g., +10 to +13 dBm, or lower) applications, and as an option for Si4461 medium-power (e.g., +13 to +16 dBm) applications.

OB[5:0]

Description:

When the PA is configured for the Switched Current mode of operation, the output devices act as programmable current sources. The current sources are switched ON and OFF at the RF frequency by the driving signal selected by the CLK_DUTY parameter, thus delivering pulses of programmable current to the load.
This parameter selects the amount of bias current per enabled output device finger. The total number of enabled output device fingers is selected by the PA_PWR_LVL property, and thus the total PA bias current is equal to Bias_Current_per_Finger * Number_Enabled_Fingers.
The step size of this parameter is in increments of 10 µA. There is a fixed 10 µA bias current added to the value selected by this field (e.g., OB = 0 = 10µA, OB = 1 = 20µA, etc.)
This parameter has no effect when PA_MODE = Switching Amplifier.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x3f

Default:

0x0

PA_TC

Group: 0x22
Index: 0x03

Summary: Configuration of PA ramping parameters.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for PA power ramping in order to minimize spectral splatter and switching transients.
- The TC value specifies the time constant for the ramping of both the rising and falling edges of the PA power. This time constant is applicable to both the rising and falling edges of the TX packet in (G)FSK mode, as well as to individual data bits in OOK mode. It is difficult to precisely define the ramp time as different measurement methods may be used (e.g., 10% to 90% rise time, to within 1dB of final value, etc.) However, the approximate ramp time is given by the following table:
- The FSK_MOD_DLY value specifies an additional delay period from the rising edge of the PA ramp to the first bit of the (G)FSK modulation. It is configurable over the range of 2 to 30 usec in increments of 4 usec, and is added to an intrinsic modulation delay of approximately 3 bits/symbols.
- The purpose of the FSK_MOD_DLY parameter is to ensure that the (G)FSK modulation does not begin before the PA power ramping has been completed. In (G)FSK mode, the value of FSK_MOD_DLY should be programmed to work well with the selected value of TC. The FSK_MOD_DLY parameter has no effect in OOK mode.
Default: 0x5d
Register View:

	PA_TC
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x03	FSK_MOD_DLY			TC
	*Default*
	0x2			0x1d

Field Details:

PA_TC

FSK_MOD_DLY[2:0]

Description:

In (G)FSK mode this specifies an additional delay from the rising edge of the PA ramp to the start of the (G)FSK modulation.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
2_US	0	Start of (G)FSK modulation is delayed by an additional 2µsec
6_US	1	Start of (G)FSK modulation is delayed by an additional 6µsec
10_US	2	Start of (G)FSK modulation is delayed by an additional 10µsec
14_US	3	Start of (G)FSK modulation is delayed by an additional 14µsec
18_US	4	Start of (G)FSK modulation is delayed by an additional 18µsec
22_US	5	Start of (G)FSK modulation is delayed by an additional 22µsec
26_US	6	Start of (G)FSK modulation is delayed by an additional 26µsec
30_US	7	Start of (G)FSK modulation is delayed by an additional 30µsec

TC[4:0]

Description:: Specifies the time constant for the ramping of both the rising and falling edges of the PA power.
Min:: 0x0
Max:: 0x1f
Default:: 0x1d

PA_RAMP_EX

Group: 0x22
Index: 0x04

Summary: Select the time constant of the external PA ramp signal.
Purpose:
- The chip provides a signal on the TXRAMP pin for ramping control of an external PA. This property selects the ramp time constant of the TXRAMP signal. The signal may be enabled/disabled through the EXT_PA_RAMP bit in the PA_MODE property.
- The time constant of the ramp signal is determined by the following formula:
  
  $Ramp Time = (\frac{20 \mu sec}{16 - TC}) (150 DPI)$
- The amplitude range of the TXRAMP signal is fixed at ramping from 0V to 3.0V. In the event the VDD supply voltage to the chip is reduced, the upper voltage limit of the TXRAMP signal will be approximately VDD - 0.1V.
- This property does not affect the ramp time constant of the internal PA.
Default: 0x80
Register View:

	PA_RAMP_EX
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x04	0000				TC
	*Default*
	0x8				0x0

Field Details:
PA_RAMP_EX
TC[3:0]

Description:

Selects the ramp time (both up and down) of the external PA ramp signal on the TXRAMP pin.

The ramp time is determined by the formula:

$Ramp Time = (\frac{20 \mu sec}{16 - TC}) (150 DPI)$

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xf

Default:

0x0

PA_RAMP_DOWN_DELAY

Group: 0x22
Index: 0x05

Summary: Delay from the start of the PA ramp down to disabling of the PA output.
Purpose:
- The ramp time constant selected by the PA_TC:TC field controls the ramping of an analog bias voltage applied to the PA output device(s). The RF drive signal to the PA output devices must remain active until the completion of the ramp-down process, else the ramp-down waveform would terminate abruptly. This property delays the complete shut-down of the PA block until the analog ramp-down is complete.
- The units of this parameter are in µsec. This delay time must be greater than or equal to the ramp time specified by PA_TC:TC, but must not be greater than RAMP_DOWN_DELAY = 0x28 = 40. For most applications, it is acceptable to leave this property at its default value.
- This property has no effect upon the ramp-up process.
Default: 0x23
Register View:

	PA_RAMP_DOWN_DELAY
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x05	RAMP_DOWN_DELAY
	*Default*
	0x23

Field Details:

PA_RAMP_DOWN_DELAY

RAMP_DOWN_DELAY[7:0]

Description:

Selects the delay time (in µsec) between the start of the ramp-down process and the disabling of the PA output.

Min:

0x1

Max:

0x28

Default:

0x23

PA_DIG_PWR_SEQ_CONFIG

Group: 0x22
Index: 0x06

Summary: Configuration for digital power sequencing.
Purpose:
- Configures the digital power sequencing delay and step size when DIG_PWR_SEQ in PA_MODE is enabled or during the TX_HOP command.
- The digital power sequencing step size is defaulted to a step of 1.
Default: 0x03
Register View:

	PA_DIG_PWR_SEQ_CONFIG
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x06	INC_STEP_SIZE	DIG_PWR_SEQ_DELAY
	*Default*
	0x0	0x3

Field Details:

PA_DIG_PWR_SEQ_CONFIG

INC_STEP_SIZE

Description:

Increase the digital power sequencing step size from 1 to 2. This allows for quicker digital power sequence times by incrementing the DDAC by 2 for every delay.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

STEP_SIZE_1 0 Digital power sequenecing step size of 1 DDAC level.

STEP_SIZE_2 1 Digital power sequencing step size of 2 DDAC levels.

DIG_PWR_SEQ_DELAY[6:0]

Description:

Digital power sequencing delay between PA steps defined in .1us.

Min:

0x3

Max:

0x7f

Default:

0x3

SYNTH

SYNTH_PFDCP_CPFF

Group: 0x23
Index: 0x00

Summary: Feed forward charge pump current selection.
Purpose:
- The charge pump and loop filter in the PLL Synthesizer have two paths: an integral path and a feed-forward path. This property adjusts the charge pump gain (i.e., current) for the feed-forward path.
- The coding of the MSB (bit 5) of the CP_FF_CUR field is inverted. As a result, the minimum charge pump gain setting is obtained for a value of CP_FF_CUR=0x20, while CP_FF_CUR=0x00 corresponds to a mid-range charge pump gain setting and 0x1F corresponds to the maximum charge pump gain setting.
- The step size or resolution of the charge pump feed-forward current is in increments of 5 uA. Thus the range of values provided by the CP_FF_CUR field is from 0 uA to 315 uA.
- CP_FF_CUR_TEST is a test bit and is not recommended for general customer applications. The CP_FF_CUR_TEST bit is not binary-weighted with the CP_FF_CUR field but instead provides an additional 160 uA, when set.
- NOTE: the primary purpose of the SYNTH group of properties is to adjust the PLL loop bandwidth to a value appropriate for the selected data rate. Silicon Labs does not recommend modifying these properties away from the values suggested by the WDS Calculator.
Default: 0x2c
Register View:

	SYNTH_PFDCP_CPFF
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	0	CP_FF_CUR_TEST	CP_FF_CUR
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x2c

Field Details:

SYNTH_PFDCP_CPFF

CP_FF_CUR_TEST

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Do not increase charge pump current. Use value defined in CP_FF_CUR.

ENUM_1 1 Increase charge pump current defined in CP_FF_CUR by 160 uA.

CP_FF_CUR[5:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_32 32 0 uA.

ENUM_33 33 5 uA.

ENUM_64 63 155 uA.

ENUM_0 0 160 uA.

ENUM_1 1 165 uA.

ENUM_31 31 315 uA.

SYNTH_PFDCP_CPINT

Group: 0x23
Index: 0x01

Summary: Integration charge pump current selection.
Purpose:
- The charge pump and loop filter in the PLL Synthesizer have two paths: an integral path and a feed-forward path. This property adjusts the charge pump gain (i.e., current) for the integral path.
- The coding of the MSB (bit 3) of the CP_INT_CUR field is inverted. As a result, the minimum charge pump gain setting is obtained for a value of CP_INT_CUR=0x08, while CP_INT_CUR=0x00 corresponds to a mid-range charge pump gain setting and 0x07 corresponds to the maximum charge pump gain setting.
- The step size or resolution of the charge pump feed-forward current is in increments of 5 uA. Thus the range of values provided by the CP_INT_CUR field is from 0 uA to 75 uA.
- NOTE: the primary purpose of the SYNTH group of properties is to adjust the PLL loop bandwidth to a value appropriate for the selected data rate. Silicon Labs does not recommend modifying these properties away from the values suggested by the WDS Calculator.
Default: 0x0e
Register View:

	SYNTH_PFDCP_CPINT
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x01	0	0	0	0	CP_INT_CUR
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0xe

Field Details:

SYNTH_PFDCP_CPINT

CP_INT_CUR[3:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_8	8	0 uA.
ENUM_9	9	5 uA.
ENUM_10	10	10 uA.
ENUM_11	11	15 uA.
ENUM_12	12	20 uA.
ENUM_13	13	25 uA.
ENUM_14	14	30 uA.
ENUM_15	15	35 uA.
ENUM_0	0	40 uA.
ENUM_1	1	45 uA.
ENUM_2	2	50 uA.
ENUM_3	3	55 uA.
ENUM_4	4	60 uA.
ENUM_5	5	65 uA.
ENUM_6	6	70 uA.
ENUM_7	7	Maximum 75 uA.

SYNTH_VCO_KV

Group: 0x23
Index: 0x02

Summary: Gain scaling factors (Kv) for the VCO tuning varactors on both the integrated-path and feed forward path.
Purpose:
- The charge pump, loop filter, and VCO tuning varactors in the PLL Synthesizer have two paths: an integral path and a feed-forward path. This property adjusts the gain scaling factors (Kv) for the tuning varactors in both the integral path and the feed-forward path. The adjustment of the gain factors is accomplished internally by switching in different number of varactor devices.
- NOTE: the primary purpose of the SYNTH group of properties is to adjust the PLL loop bandwidth to a value appropriate for the selected data rate. Silicon Labs does not recommend modifying these properties away from the values suggested by the WDS Calculator.
Default: 0x0b
Register View:

	SYNTH_VCO_KV
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x02	0	0	0	RESERVED	KV_DIR		KV_INT
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x2		0x3

Field Details:

SYNTH_VCO_KV

RESERVED

Description:: Reserved. Always write 0.
Default:: 0x0

KV_DIR[1:0]

Description:

Sets the scaling factor on the tuning varactor gain (Kv_dir) in the feed-forward path (i.e., direct path).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
GND	0	Sets the feed-forward (i.e., direct) path tuning varactor input port of the VCO to GND (used only for testing purposes).
HALF	1	Sets kv_dir to 1/2 of its maximum value.
MAX	2	Sets kv_dir to its maximum value.
ENUM_3	3	Sets kv_dir to its maximum value (same as kv_dir = 2).

KV_INT[1:0]

Description:

Sets the scaling factor on the tuning varactor gain (Kv_int) in the integral path.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
GND	0	Sets the integral path tuning varactor input port of the VCO to GND (used only for testing purposes).
33PERCENT	1	Sets kv_int to 1/3 of its maximum value.
66PENCENT	2	Sets kv_int to 2/3 of its maximum value.
MAX	3	Sets kv_int to its maximum value.

SYNTH_LPFILT3

Group: 0x23
Index: 0x03

Summary: Value of resistor R2 in feed-forward path of loop filter.
Purpose:
- The loop filter in the feed-forward path contains three lowpass filter poles: R1-C1, R2-C2, and R3-C3.
- The LPF_FF_R2 field adjusts the value of resistor R2, and thus adjusts the cutoff frequency of the R2-C2 lowpass filter pole.
- Additionally, the resistor R2 affects the DC gain of the transistor Gm stage in the feed-forward path. Increasing the value of R2 has the effect of increasing the feed-forward path gain.
- The value of R2 is in increments of 18 kΩ, ranging from a minimum value of 18 kΩ to a maximum of 144 kΩ.
- NOTE: the primary purpose of the SYNTH group of properties is to adjust the PLL loop bandwidth to a value appropriate for the selected data rate. Silicon Labs does not recommend modifying these properties away from the values suggested by the WDS Calculator.
Default: 0x04
Register View:

	SYNTH_LPFILT3
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x03	0	0	0	0	0	LPF_FF_R2
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x4

Field Details:

SYNTH_LPFILT3

LPF_FF_R2[2:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	R2 = 18 kΩ
ENUM_1	1	R2 = 36 kΩ
ENUM_2	2	R2 = 54 kΩ
ENUM_3	3	R2 = 72 kΩ
ENUM_4	4	R2 = 90 kΩ
ENUM_5	5	R2 = 108 kΩ
ENUM_6	6	R2 = 126 kΩ
ENUM_7	7	R2 = 144 kΩ

SYNTH_LPFILT2

Group: 0x23
Index: 0x04

Summary: Value of capacitor C2 in feed-forward path of loop filter.
Purpose:
- The loop filter in the feed-forward path contains three lowpass filter poles: R1-C1, R2-C2, and R3-C3.
- The LPF_FF_C2 field adjusts the value of capacitor C2, and thus adjusts the cutoff frequency of the R2-C2 lowpass filter pole.
- The value of C2 is in increments of 335 fF, ranging from a minimum value of 877 fF to a maximum of 11.25 pF.
- NOTE: the primary purpose of the SYNTH group of properties is to adjust the PLL loop bandwidth to a value appropriate for the selected data rate. Silicon Labs does not recommend modifying these properties away from the values suggested by the WDS Calculator.
Default: 0x0c
Register View:

	SYNTH_LPFILT2
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x04	0	0	0	LPF_FF_C2
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0xc

Field Details:

SYNTH_LPFILT2

LPF_FF_C2[4:0]

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 C2 = 877 fF.

ENUM_1 31 C2 = 11.25 pF.

SYNTH_LPFILT1

Group: 0x23
Index: 0x05

Summary: Value of capacitors C1 and C3 in feed-forward path of loop filter.
Purpose:
- The loop filter in the feed-forward path contains three lowpass filter poles: R1-C1, R2-C2, and R3-C3.
- The LPF_FF_C3 field adjusts the value of capacitor C3, and thus adjusts the cutoff frequency of the R3-C3 lowpass filter pole. The value of resistor R3 is not adjustable and is fixed at R3=2 kΩ.
- The value of C3 is in increments of 1 pF, ranging from a minimum value of 9 pF to a maximum of 12 pF.
- The total value of capacitor C1 is determined by a 3-bit binary-weighted field LPF_FF_C1 in increments of 380 fF, and a 2-bit offset field LPF_FF_C1_CODE in increments of 1 pF, plus an additional fixed capacitance of 4.55 pF. Thus the total value of capacitor C1 may be described by the following equation:
- C1 = 4.55pF + 380fF*LPF_FF_C1 + 1pF*LPF_FF_C1_CODE
- The value of resistor R1 is not adjustable and is fixed at R1=9.86 kΩ.
- NOTE: the primary purpose of the SYNTH group of properties is to adjust the PLL loop bandwidth to a value appropriate for the selected data rate. Silicon Labs does not recommend modifying these properties away from the values suggested by the WDS Calculator.
Default: 0x73
Register View:

	SYNTH_LPFILT1
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x05	0	LPF_FF_C1			LPF_FF_C1_CODE		LPF_FF_C3
	*Default*
	0x0	0x7			0x0		0x3

Field Details:

SYNTH_LPFILT1

LPF_FF_C1[2:0]

Description:

Sets the fine-tune value of C1 in increments of 380 fF, with a range from 4.55 pF to 7.21 pF.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	C1 = 4.55 pF.
ENUM_1	1	C1 = 4.93 pF.
ENUM_2	2	C1 = 5.31 pF.
ENUM_3	3	C1 = 5.69 pF.
ENUM_4	4	C1 = 6.07 pF.
ENUM_5	5	C1 = 6.45 pF.
ENUM_6	6	C1 = 6.83 pF.
ENUM_7	7	C1 = 7.21 pF.

LPF_FF_C1_CODE[1:0]

Description:

Offsets the value of C1 in increments of 1pF, with a range of 0pF to 3pF.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	delta C1 = 0 pF.
ENUM_1	1	delta C1 = 1 pF.
ENUM_2	2	delta C1 = 2 pF.
ENUM_3	3	delta C1 = 3 pF.

LPF_FF_C3[1:0]

Description:

Sets the value of C3 in increments of 1pF, with a range of 9pF to 12pF.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	C3 = 9 pF.
ENUM_1	1	C3 = 10 pF.
ENUM_2	2	C3 = 11 pF.
ENUM_3	3	C3 = 12 pF.

SYNTH_LPFILT0

Group: 0x23
Index: 0x06

Summary: Bias current of the active amplifier in the feed-forward loop filter.
Purpose:
- The loop filter in the PLL Synthesizer consists of an integrator path and a feed-forward path. The feed-forward path consists of an active amplifier (a single transistor Gm stage) with three lowpass filter poles and one right-half plane zero.
- This property selects the bias current of the active amplifier. Adjusting the bias current has the additional effect of changing the DC gain of the amplifier which in turn affects the PLL loop bandwidth and loop dynamics. The suggested settings for all other properties within the SYNTH group assume the default value of SYNTH_LPFILT0 = 0x03 = 100µA. In the event a different value of bias current is selected, it would become necessary to modify all other SYNTH properties in order to maintain the desired PLL loop bandwidth. For this reason, Silicon Labs recommends leaving this property at its default value.
Default: 0x03
Register View:

	SYNTH_LPFILT0
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x06	0	0	0	0	0	0	LPF_FF_BIAS
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x3

Field Details:

SYNTH_LPFILT0

LPF_FF_BIAS[1:0]

Description:

Selects the bias current of the amplifier in the feed-forward loop filter path.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 25 uA.

ENUM_1 1 34 uA.

ENUM_2 2 50 uA.

ENUM_3 3 100 uA.

SYNTH_VCO_KVCAL

Group: 0x23
Index: 0x07

Summary: Scaling entire KV of VCO.
Purpose:
- Scaling on VCO KV for all parameters.
Default: 0x05
Register View:

	SYNTH_VCO_KVCAL
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x07	0	0	0	LADR_SELECT	KVCAL
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x5

Field Details:

SYNTH_VCO_KVCAL

LADR_SELECT

Description:

Enable VCO ladder.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Disable VCO ladder.

ENUM_1 1 Enable VCO ladder.

KVCAL[3:0]

Description:

Sets the scaling on the VCO ladder where 0 is the max voltage setting and 15 is the min voltage setting.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xf

Default:

0x5

MATCH

MATCH_VALUE_1

Group: 0x30
Index: 0x00

Summary: Match value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 1 value with the received Match 1 byte.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for Matching functionality on up to 4 bytes in the Data field(s). This is typically used to implement a Header Check or Broadcast Check capability.
- The Match functionality consists of taking the received value of a specified data byte, logically AND-ing it with a programmed Mask value, and then comparing the result with a programmed target Match value. The logical result of this comparison (TRUE or FALSE) can be logically combined with the results of comparisons for the remaining Match bytes; the final logical result determines whether or not the overall packet is considered to match.
- This property defines the target Match 1 value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 1 value with the received Match 1 byte.
- Please refer to the text description for MATCH_MASK_1 and MATCH_CTRL_1 for more details regarding the Match byte functionality.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MATCH_VALUE_1
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	VALUE_1
	*Default*
	0x0

Field Details:

MATCH_VALUE_1

VALUE_1[7:0]

Description:

Match 1 value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 1 value with the received Match 1 byte.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

Default:

0x0

MATCH_MASK_1

Group: 0x30
Index: 0x01

Summary: Mask value to be logically AND-ed (bit-wise) with the Match 1 byte.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for Matching functionality on up to 4 bytes in the Data field(s). This is typically used to implement a Header Check or Broadcast Check capability.
- The Match functionality consists of taking the received value of a specified data byte, logically AND-ing it with a programmed Mask value, and then comparing the result with a programmed target Match value. The logical result of this comparison (TRUE or FALSE) can be logically combined with the results of comparisons for the remaining Match bytes; the final logical result determines whether or not the overall packet is considered to match.
- This property defines the Mask 1 value to be logically AND-ed (bit-wise) with the Match 1 byte, prior to comparison with the target Match 1 value. Example: if it is desired to match only the top 4 bits of the Match 1 byte, it would be necessary to set MATCH_MASK_1[7:0] = 0xF0.
- Please refer to the text description for MATCH_VALUE_1 and MATCH_CTRL_1 for more details regarding the Match byte functionality.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MATCH_MASK_1
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x01	MASK_1
	*Default*
	0x0

Field Details:

MATCH_MASK_1

MASK_1[7:0]

Description:

Mask value to be logicalled AND-ed with the Match 1 byte.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

Default:

0x0

MATCH_CTRL_1

Group: 0x30
Index: 0x02

Summary: Enable for Packet Match functionality, and configuration of Match Byte 1.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for Matching functionality on up to 4 bytes in the Data field(s). This is typically used to implement a Header Check or Broadcast Check capability.
- The Match functionality consists of taking the received value of a specified data byte, logically AND-ing it with a programmed Mask value, and then comparing the result with a programmed target Match value. The logical result of this comparison (TRUE or FALSE) can be logically combined with the results of comparisons for the remaining Match bytes; the final logical result determines whether or not the overall packet is considered to match.
- The location of the corresponding Match byte is specified by the OFFSET[4:0] field within each MATCH_CTRL_X property. This value represents the offset (in number of bytes) of the location of the received data byte to match, relative to the end of the Sync Word. Setting OFFSET = 0 would result in matching the first byte immediately following the Sync Word, OFFSET = 1 would match the second byte, etc.
- The offset(s) of the Match bytes must be in non-descending order; that is, the offset location of Match 1 byte must be less than or equal to the location of Match 2 byte, the location of Match 2 byte must be less than or equal to the location of Match 3 byte, and so on. Two (or more) Match bytes may have the same offset location. All Match bytes must be located within the first 32 bytes following the Sync Word, but need not be adjacent to each other. The default value for all Match bytes is OFFSET=0; if the OFFSET value of any Match byte is set to a non-zero value, the OFFSET values of the higher Match bytes must also be set to equal (or higher) offset locations, else the non-descending requirement will be violated.
- The MATCH_EN bit (found only within the MATCH_CTRL_1 property) is used to enable/disable the Match functionality across all Match bytes. If this bit is cleared, the Match functionality is disabled regardless of the contents of all other properties within the MATCH property group.
- The POLARITY bit is used to configure the polarity of the logical result of the comparison on the Match byte. If POLARITY = 0, the logical result is TRUE if the comparison matches. If POLARITY = 1, the logical result is TRUE if the comparison does not match.
- The LOGIC bit (found only within the MATCH_CTRL_2/3/4 properties) determines how the logical result of comparison on the specified Match byte will be combined with the logical result from the previous match(es). If LOGIC=0, the result from the specified Match byte is AND'ed with the logical result from previous MATCH field(s). If LOGIC=1, the result is OR'ed with the logical result from the previous MATCH field(s).
- This flexibility in logic allows construction of a match function such as: Match_1 OR !Match_2 AND Match_3 AND !Match_4.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MATCH_CTRL_1
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x02	POLARITY	MATCH_EN	0	OFFSET
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MATCH_CTRL_1

POLARITY

Description:

Configures the polarity of the logical result of the comparison on the Match byte.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENUM_0 0 Logical result is TRUE if the comparison matches.

ENUM_1 1 Logical result is TRUE if the comparison does not match.

MATCH_EN

Description:

This bit provides the overall enable/disable functionality for the Packet Match capability.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

MATCH_DISABLE 1 Disable packet match functionality.

MATCH_ENABLE 1 Enable packet match functionality.

OFFSET[4:0]

Description:

Offset location of the Match byte, relative to the end of the Sync Word.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x1f

Default:

0x0

MATCH_VALUE_2

Group: 0x30
Index: 0x03

Summary: Match value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 2 value with the received Match 2 byte.
Purpose:
- This property defines the target Match 2 value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 2 value with the received Match 2 byte. Please refer to the text description for MATCH_VALUE_1, MATCH_MASK_1, and MATCH_CTRL_1 for more details regarding the Match byte functionality.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MATCH_VALUE_2
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x03	VALUE_2
	*Default*
	0x0

Field Details:

MATCH_VALUE_2

VALUE_2[7:0]

Description:

Match 2 value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 2 value with the received Match 2 byte.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

Default:

0x0

MATCH_MASK_2

Group: 0x30
Index: 0x04

Summary: Mask value to be logically AND-ed (bit-wise) with the Match 2 byte.
Purpose:
- This property defines the Mask 2 value to be logically AND-ed (bit-wise) with the Match 2 byte, prior to comparison with the target Match 2 value.
- Please refer to the text description for MATCH_VALUE_1, MATCH_MASK_1, and MATCH_CTRL_1 for more details regarding the Match byte functionality.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MATCH_MASK_2
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x04	MASK_2
	*Default*
	0x0

Field Details:

MATCH_MASK_2

MASK_2[7:0]

Description:

Mask value to be logicalled AND-ed with the Match 2 byte.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

Default:

0x0

MATCH_CTRL_2

Group: 0x30
Index: 0x05

Summary: Configuration of Match Byte 2.
Purpose:
- This property contains the configuration bits for the Match 2 byte.
- Please refer to the text description for MATCH_VALUE_1, MATCH_MASK_1, and MATCH_CTRL_1 for more details regarding the Match byte functionality.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MATCH_CTRL_2
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x05	POLARITY	LOGIC	0	OFFSET
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MATCH_CTRL_2

POLARITY

Description:

Configures the polarity of the logical result of the comparison on the Match byte.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Logical result is TRUE if the comparison matches.
ENUM_1	1	Logical result is TRUE if the comparison does not match.

LOGIC

Description:

Configures how the logical result from the comparison of this Match byte is combined with the logical results from the previous MATCH field(s).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Logical result from this Match byte is AND'ed with the logical result from previous MATCH field(s).
ENUM_1	1	Logical result from this Match byte is OR'ed with the logical result from previous MATCH field(s).

OFFSET[4:0]

Description:: Offset location of the Match byte, relative to the end of the Sync Word.
Min:: 0x0
Max:: 0x1f
Default:: 0x0

MATCH_VALUE_3

Group: 0x30
Index: 0x06

Summary: Match value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 3 value with the received Match 3 byte.
Purpose:
- This property defines the target Match 3 value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 3 value with the received Match 3 byte. Please refer to the text description for MATCH_VALUE_1, MATCH_MASK_1, and MATCH_CTRL_1 for more details regarding the Match byte functionality.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MATCH_VALUE_3
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x06	VALUE_3
	*Default*
	0x0

Field Details:

MATCH_VALUE_3

VALUE_3[7:0]

Description:

Match 3 value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 3 value with the received Match 3 byte.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

Default:

0x0

MATCH_MASK_3

Group: 0x30
Index: 0x07

Summary: Mask value to be logically AND-ed (bit-wise) with the Match 3 byte.
Purpose:
- This property defines the Mask 3 value to be logically AND-ed (bit-wise) with the Match 3 byte, prior to comparison with the target Match 3 value.
- Please refer to the text description for MATCH_VALUE_1, MATCH_MASK_1, and MATCH_CTRL_1 for more details regarding the Match byte functionality.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MATCH_MASK_3
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x07	MASK_3
	*Default*
	0x0

Field Details:

MATCH_MASK_3

MASK_3[7:0]

Description:

Mask value to be logicalled AND-ed with the Match 3 byte.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

Default:

0x0

MATCH_CTRL_3

Group: 0x30
Index: 0x08

Summary: Configuration of Match Byte 3.
Purpose:
- This property contains the configuration bits for the Match 3 byte.
- Please refer to the text description for MATCH_VALUE_1, MATCH_MASK_1, and MATCH_CTRL_1 for more details regarding the Match byte functionality.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MATCH_CTRL_3
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x08	POLARITY	LOGIC	0	OFFSET
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MATCH_CTRL_3

POLARITY

Description:

Configures the polarity of the logical result of the comparison on the Match byte.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Logical result is TRUE if the comparison matches.
ENUM_1	1	Logical result is TRUE if the comparison does not match.

LOGIC

Description:

Configures how the logical result from the comparison of this Match byte is combined with the logical results from the previous MATCH field(s).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Logical result from this Match byte is AND'ed with the logical result from previous MATCH field(s).
ENUM_1	1	Logical result from this Match byte is OR'ed with the logical result from previous MATCH field(s).

OFFSET[4:0]

Description:: Offset location of the Match byte, relative to the end of the Sync Word.
Min:: 0x0
Max:: 0x1f
Default:: 0x0

MATCH_VALUE_4

Group: 0x30
Index: 0x09

Summary: Match value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 4 value with the received Match 4 byte.
Purpose:
- This property defines the target Match 4 value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 4 value with the received Match 4 byte. Please refer to the text description for MATCH_VALUE_1, MATCH_MASK_1, and MATCH_CTRL_1 for more details regarding the Match byte functionality.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MATCH_VALUE_4
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x09	VALUE_4
	*Default*
	0x0

Field Details:

MATCH_VALUE_4

VALUE_4[7:0]

Description:

Match 4 value to be compared with the result of logically AND-ing (bit-wise) the Mask 4 value with the received Match 4 byte.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

Default:

0x0

MATCH_MASK_4

Group: 0x30
Index: 0x0a

Summary: Mask value to be logically AND-ed (bit-wise) with the Match 4 byte.
Purpose:
- This property defines the Mask 4 value to be logically AND-ed (bit-wise) with the Match 4 byte, prior to comparison with the target Match 4 value.
- Please refer to the text description for MATCH_VALUE_1, MATCH_MASK_1, and MATCH_CTRL_1 for more details regarding the Match byte functionality.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MATCH_MASK_4
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x0a	MASK_4
	*Default*
	0x0

Field Details:

MATCH_MASK_4

MASK_4[7:0]

Description:

Mask value to be logicalled AND-ed with the Match 4 byte.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

Default:

0x0

MATCH_CTRL_4

Group: 0x30
Index: 0x0b

Summary: Configuration of Match Byte 4.
Purpose:
- This property contains the configuration bits for the Match 4 byte.
- Please refer to the text description for MATCH_VALUE_1, MATCH_MASK_1, and MATCH_CTRL_1 for more details regarding the Match byte functionality.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	MATCH_CTRL_4
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x0b	POLARITY	LOGIC	0	OFFSET
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

MATCH_CTRL_4

POLARITY

Description:

Configures the polarity of the logical result of the comparison on the Match byte.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Logical result is TRUE if the comparison matches.
ENUM_1	1	Logical result is TRUE if the comparison does not match.

LOGIC

Description:

Configures how the logical result from the comparison of this Match byte is combined with the logical results from the previous MATCH field(s).

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Logical result from this Match byte is AND'ed with the logical result from previous MATCH field(s).
ENUM_1	1	Logical result from this Match byte is OR'ed with the logical result from previous MATCH field(s).

OFFSET[4:0]

Description:: Offset location of the Match byte, relative to the end of the Sync Word.
Min:: 0x0
Max:: 0x1f
Default:: 0x0

FREQ_CONTROL

FREQ_CONTROL_INTE

Group: 0x40
Index: 0x00

Summary: Frac-N PLL Synthesizer integer divide number.
Purpose:
- The total divide ratio for the Fractional-N PLL Synthesizer consists of an integer portion and a fractional portion. This property defines the integer divide number; the fractional divide value is specified in property FREQ_CONTROL_FRAC.
- The formula for calculating RF channel frequency as a function of integer and fractional divide values is as follows:
  
  $RF_{Channel_{Hz}}=\left(fc_{inte}+\frac{fc_{frac}}{2^{19}}\right) \times \left(\frac{N_{PRESC} \times freq\_xo}{outdiv}\right) (150 DPI)$
- The output divider value OUTDIV is configured as a function of the desired frequency band, and is specified in property MODEM_CLKGEN_BAND:BAND.
- The prescaler divider value N_PRESC is configured as a function of the selected synthesizer performance mode and may take on the values NPRESC=2 or NPRESC=4, as specified in property MODEM_CLKGEN_BAND:SY_SEL.
- The entire fc_frac word is 20-bits in length, but the MSB should always be set to 1, and thus the term fc_frac/2¹⁹ will always be between 1 and 2 in value. As a result, the integer term fc_inte should be reduced by 1. Example: a total desired divide ratio of N = 60.135 should be implemented as fc_inte = 59, fc_frac/2¹⁹ = 1.135.
- Modifying this property will have no effect until the chip exits from TX or RX state, and then re-enters the state.
Default: 0x3c
Register View:

	FREQ_CONTROL_INTE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	0	INTE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x3c

Field Details:

FREQ_CONTROL_INTE

INTE[6:0]

Min:

0x0

Max:

0x7f

Default:

0x3c

FREQ_CONTROL_FRAC

Group: 0x40
Indexes: 0x01 ... 0x03

Summary: Frac-N PLL fraction number.
Purpose:
- Please refer to the text description for FREQ_CONTROL_INTE for more details regarding frequency calculation.
Defaults: 0x08,0x00,0x00
Register View:

	FREQ_CONTROL_FRAC
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x01	0	0	0	0	FRAC[19:16]
0x02	FRAC[15:8]
0x03	FRAC[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x01	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x8
0x02	0x0
0x03	0x0

Field Details:

FREQ_CONTROL_FRAC

FRAC[19:0]

Description:

Frequency control fractional part

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xfffff

Default:

0x80000

FREQ_CONTROL_CHANNEL_STEP_SIZE

Group: 0x40
Indexes: 0x04 ... 0x05

Summary: EZ Frequency Programming channel step size.
Purpose:
- The EZ Frequency Programming method allows the user to control the frequency by selecting a desired channel number, given a base frequency and a channel step size. This property defines the unsigned 16-bit channel step size value.
- The units of the FREQ_CONTROL_CHANNEL_STEP_SIZE property are in increments of the LSB tuning resolution of the PLL Synthesizer, and are therefore a function of the crystal reference frequency and output frequency band. The formula for calculating the value of the FREQ_CONTROL_CHANNEL_STEP_SIZE property is given by the following equation:
  
  $FREQ\_CTRL\_CHAN\_STEP\_SIZE=\frac{2^{19} \times outdiv \times Desired\_Stepsize\_Hz}{N_{PRESC} \times freq\_xo} (150 DPI)$
- The output divider value OUTDIV is configured as a function of the desired frequency band, and is specified in property MODEM_CLKGEN_BAND:BAND.
- The prescaler divider value N_PRESC is configured as a function of the selected synthesizer performance mode and may take on the values NPRESC=2 or NPRESC=4, as specified in property MODEM_CLKGEN_BAND:SY_SEL.
- The base frequency is specified by the FREQ_CONTROL_INTE and FREQ_CONTROL_FRAC properties.
- The channel number is specified by the CHANNEL parameter byte passed to the START_TX or START_RX commands.
- The commanded channel frequency is given by the formula:
  
  $Center\_Freq=Base\_Freq+Channel\_Number \times Desired\_Step\_Size\_Hz (150 DPI)$
Defaults: 0x00,0x00
Register View:

	FREQ_CONTROL_CHANNEL_STEP_SIZE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x04	CHANNEL_STEP_SIZE[15:8]
0x05	CHANNEL_STEP_SIZE[7:0]
	*Defaults*
0x04	0x0
0x05	0x0

Field Details:

FREQ_CONTROL_CHANNEL_STEP_SIZE

CHANNEL_STEP_SIZE[15:0]

Description:

Channel step size

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xffff

Default:

0x0

FREQ_CONTROL_W_SIZE

Group: 0x40
Index: 0x06

Summary: Set window gating period (in number of crystal reference clock cycles) for counting VCO frequency during calibration.
Purpose:
- The chip performs a calibration of the VCO at each new commanded frequency. This is accomplished by counting cycles of the VCO frequency and comparing to an expected target count value.
- The length of the window during which cycles of the VCO frequency are counted is specified by this property. The units are in cycles of the crystal reference frequency (e.g., 30 MHz clock periods).
- This property does not need to change as a function of crystal reference frequency; the chip automatically calculates the target VCO count value as a function of crystal reference frequency and thus this property may remain constant. Silicon Labs recommends setting this property always to 0x20.
Default: 0x20
Register View:

	FREQ_CONTROL_W_SIZE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x06	W_SIZE
	*Default*
	0x20

Field Details:

FREQ_CONTROL_W_SIZE

W_SIZE[7:0]

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xff

Default:

0x20

FREQ_CONTROL_VCOCNT_RX_ADJ

Group: 0x40
Index: 0x07

Summary: Adjust target count for VCO calibration in RX mode.
Purpose:
- The chip performs a calibration of the VCO at each new commanded frequency. This is accomplished by counting cycles of the VCO frequency and comparing to an expected target count value. As the chip's default mode of operation uses a low-IF architecture with low-side Mixer injection, the RX LO must shift downwards in frequency during RX mode. The expected target count value changes as a result of this shift in frequency.
- This field is a signed value that represents the amount by which the target count value must be adjusted in RX mode.
Default: 0xff
Register View:

	FREQ_CONTROL_VCOCNT_RX_ADJ
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x07	VCOCNT_RX_ADJ
	*Default*
	0xff

Field Details:

FREQ_CONTROL_VCOCNT_RX_ADJ

VCOCNT_RX_ADJ[7:0]

Type:

S8

Min:

-0x80

Max:

0x7f

Default:

0xff

RX_HOP

RX_HOP_CONTROL

Group: 0x50
Index: 0x00

Summary: Configuration options for the automatic RX Hop functionality.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for automatic frequency hopping from one RX channel to another when certain conditions are met. This reduces the amount of control from the host MCU required to manage such a channel scanning application.
- This property selects the condition under which the chip will automatically hop, and sets the RSSI timeout value for that hopping option.
- Please refer to the text description for RX_HOP_TABLE_SIZE and RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY_X for details regarding the configuration of the RX Hop Table.
Default: 0x04
Register View:

	RX_HOP_CONTROL
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	0	HOP_EN			RSSI_TIMEOUT
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0			0x4

Field Details:

RX_HOP_CONTROL

HOP_EN[2:0]

Description:

Enables automatic RX hopping, and selects the condition(s) under which an RX hop will occur.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description
HOP_DISABLE	0	Hop disabled.
HOP_PM_TO	1	Hop on INVALID_PREAMBLE event (i.e., RX Preamble timeout) The possible actions of the chip are: a)Hop if no PREAMBLE_VALID signal is detected before expiration of the RX Preamble Timeout period (set in the PREAMBLE_CONFIG_STD_2 property). b)Remain on the channel if PREAMBLE_VALID signal is detected before expiration of the RX Preamble Timeout period.
HOP_RSSI_PM_TO	2	Hop on INVALID_PREAMBLE or RSSI Timeout event(s). The possible actions of the chip are: a)Hop if no PREAMBLE_VALID signal is detected before expiration of the RX Preamble Timeout period, or if the measured Current RSSI level does not exceed the RSSI threshold value (set in the MODEM_RSSI_THRESH property) before expiration of the RSSI Timeout period (whichever occurs first). b)Remain on the channel if PREAMBLE_VALID signal is detected before expiration of the RX Preamble Timeout period, and the Current RSSI level exceeds the RSSI threshold level before expiration of the RSSI Timeout period.
HOP_PM_SYNC_TO	3	Hop on INVALID_PREAMBLE or invalid Sync Word event(s). The possible actions of the chip are: a)Hop if no PREAMBLE_VALID signal is detected before expiration of the RX Preamble Timeout period, or if a valid Sync Word is not detected. b)Remain on the channel if PREAMBLE_VALID signal is detected before expiration of the RX Preamble Timeout period, and a valid Sync Word is detected.
HOP_RSSI_PM_SYNC_TO	4	Hop on INVALID_PREAMBLE or RSSI Timeout or invalid Sync Word event(s). The possible actions of the chip are: a)Hop if no PREAMBLE_VALID signal is detected before expiration of the RX Preamble Timeout period, or if the measured Current RSSI level does not exceed the RSSI threshold value before expiration of the RSSI Timeout period, or if a valid Sync Word is not detected. b)Remain on the channel if PREAMBLE_VALID signal is detected before expiration of the RX Preamble Timeout period, and the Current RSSI level exceeds the RSSI threshold level before expiration of the RSSI Timeout period, and a valid Sync Word is detected.

RSSI_TIMEOUT[3:0]

Description:

The chip may be configured to hop if the measured Current RSSI level does not exceed a threshold level within a certain timeout period.
This field sets the RSSI Timeout period, expressed in nibbles.

Min:

0x0

Max:

0xf

Default:

0x4

RX_HOP_TABLE_SIZE

Group: 0x50
Index: 0x01

Summary: Specifies the number of entries (channels) in the RX Hop table.
Purpose:
- The chip provides for automatic frequency hopping from one RX channel to another when certain conditions are met.
- This property specifies the number of entries (channels) in the RX Hop Table. The RX Hop Table may be up to 64 channels in length.
- Please refer to the text description for RX_HOP_CONTROL for more details regarding the configuration of the RX Hop functionality.
Default: 0x01
Register View:

	RX_HOP_TABLE_SIZE
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x01	0	RX_HOP_TABLE_SIZE
	*Default*
	0x0	0x1

Field Details:

RX_HOP_TABLE_SIZE

RX_HOP_TABLE_SIZE[6:0]

Description:

Specifies the number of entries in the RX Hop table.

Min:

0x1

Max:

0x40

Default:

0x1

RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[0...63]

Group: 0x50
Index: 0x02 ... 0x41

Summary: Defines entries in the RX Hopping Table (N=0 to 63)
Purpose:
- The chip provides for automatic frequency hopping from one RX channel to another when certain conditions are met.
- The desired frequency hopping or channel scanning sequence is specified by a table of channel numbers.
  This property specifies the channel number for the No.N entry in the RX Hop Table.
- An entry in the RX Hop Table is skipped if its value is CHANNEL_NUM = 0xFF.
- The channel number values in the RX Hop Table may be entered in random fashion, and need not be in ascending or sorted order. However, the START_RX command should be invoked with a CHANNEL parameter byte value equal to the CHANNEL_NUM in the first entry in the RX Hop Table.
- Duplicate channel number values are allowed in the table.
- Please refer to the text description for RX_HOP_CONTROL for more details regarding the configuration of the RX Hop functionality.
Default: See summary table.
Register View:

	RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[N]
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
N	CHANNEL_NUM

Field Details:

RX_HOP_TABLE_ENTRY[N]

CHANNEL_NUM[7:0]

Description:

This property specifies the channel number for the N^th entry in the RX Hop Table.

Default:

N

PTI

PTI_CTL

Group: 0xf0
Index: 0x00

Summary: Packet Trace Interface control fields.
Purpose:
- The chip contains packet trace interface for debugging network protocols. This property controls the behavior of this interface.
Default: 0x80
Register View:

	PTI_CTL
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x00	PTI_EN	0	0	0	0	0	0	0
	*Default*
	0x1	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

PTI_CTL

PTI_EN

Description:

Controls global enable of the PTI functionality.

Format:

Enumeration

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENABLE	1	Enable PTI signal to GPIO. GPIO must be configured using GPIO_PIN_CFG.
DISABLE	0	Disable PTI signal to GPIO. GPIO must be configured using GPIO_PIN_CFG.

PTI_BAUD

Group: 0xf0
Indexes: 0x01 ... 0x02

Summary: Desired baud rate for the PTI interface.
Purpose:
- The chip contains a packet trace interface for network debugging. This data is transmitted to host debugger using a UART connection on a GPIO pin (selected using GPIO_PIN_CFG). This property sets the
  baud rate of the packet trace data in 100 baud steps.
Defaults: 0x13,0x88
Register View:

	PTI_BAUD
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x01	00000000
0x02	00000000
	*Defaults*
0x01	0x13
0x02	0x88

Field Details:

PTI_BAUD

PTI_LOG_EN

Group: 0xf0
Index: 0x03

Summary: Enables what the PTI logs.
Purpose:
- The chip contains packet trace interface for debugging network protocols. This property controls messages that
  get logged by this interface.
Default: 0x00
Register View:

	PTI_LOG_EN
Index	7	6	5	4	3	2	1	0
0x03	0	RX_EN	TX_EN	0	0	0	0	0
	*Default*
	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0	0x0

Field Details:

PTI_LOG_EN

RX_EN

Description:

Controls logging of data packets received over the air. Note that status information about each received packet is always logged regardless of this setting.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENABLE 1 Enable Logging to the packet trace interface.

DISABLE 0 Disable Logging to the packet trace interface.

TX_EN

Description:

Controls logging of data packets sent over the air. Note that status information about each sent packet is always logged regardless of this setting.

Format:

Enumeration

Name Value Description Feature Available

ENABLE 1 Enable Logging to the packet trace interface.

DISABLE 0 Disable Logging to the packet trace interface.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
FALSE	0	Do not reset the RX data FIFO.	revB1A
TRUE	1	Reset the RX data FIFO.	revB1A

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
FALSE	0	Do not reset the TX data FIFO.	revB1A
TRUE	1	Reset the TX data FIFO.	revB1A

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	1	Use zero for phase and amplitude values as starting values.
ENUM_1	0	Use previous calibration values as starting values.

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	1 measurement.
ENUM_1	1	2 measurements.
ENUM_2	2	4 measurements.
ENUM_3	3	8 measurements.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Open LNA input shunt switch.
ENUM_1	1	Close Open LNA input shunt switch.

Name	Value	Description
ENUM_0	0	6 dB.
ENUM_1	1	9 dB.
ENUM_2	2	12 dB.
ENUM_3	3	6 dB.
ENUM_4	4	6 dB.
ENUM_5	5	6 dB.
ENUM_6	6	0 dB.
ENUM_7	7	3 dB.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
APPLY	0	Apply amplitude calibration value.
SKIP	1	Do not apply amplitude calibration value.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
POS	0	Positive calibration value.
NEG	1	Negative calibration value.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
APPLY	0	Apply phase calibration value.
SKIP	1	Do not apply phase calibration value.

Name	Value	Description
DISABLE_LDC	0	Disable LDC operation.
RX_LDC	1	LDC RX Mode.
TX_LDC	2	LDC TX Mode.

Name	Value	Description
1_SEC	0	1 sec.
2_SEC	1	2 sec.
4_SEC	2	4 sec.
8_SEC	3	8 sec.
16_SEC	4	16 sec.
32_SEC	5	32 sec.
64_SEC	6	64 sec.
128_SEC	7	128 sec.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLE_LBD	0	Disable the LBD functionality.
ENABLE_LBD	1	Enable the LBD functionality.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLE_WUT	0	Disable wake up timer.
ENABLE_WUT	1	Enable wake up timer.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLE_CAL	0	Disable the 32K R-C Oscillator calibration timer.
ENABLE_CAL	1	Enable the 32K R-C Oscillator calibration timer.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	1	Continue PN generation using last state from previous packet.
ENUM_1	1	Load PN engine with the seed value at the start of Field 1.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Disable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.
ENUM_1	1	Enable data whitening/de-whitening on this field.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Disable manchester encoding/decoding on this field.
ENUM_1	1	Enable manchester encoding/decoding on this field.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Disable Manchester decoding on this field.
ENUM_1	1	Enable Manchester decoding on this field.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Do not adjust Sync Word timeout for Manchester coding.
ENUM_1	1	Adjust Sync Word timeout for Manchester coding.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Do not invert RX data bits.
ENUM_1	1	Invert RX data bits.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Do not invert TX data bits.
ENUM_1	1	Invert TX data bits.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Do not invert the polarity of the frequency deviation.
ENUM_1	1	Invert the polarity of the frequency deviation.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Input from phase computer output.
ENUM_1	1	Input from detector's output.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Normal mode (27 tap filter)
ENUM_1	1	Low power mode with reduced performance (15 tap filter)

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Enables the droop compensation filter.
ENUM_1	1	Bypass the droop compensation filter.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Enables the decimate-by-3 polyphase filter
ENUM_1	1	Bypass the decimate-by-3 polyphase filter.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Select the decimate-by-2 polyphase filter.
ENUM_1	1	Bypass the decimate-by-2 polyphase filter.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
ENUM_0	0	Normal decimate-by-8 filter gain.
ENUM_1	1	Doubel the decimate-by-8 filter gain

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLE	0	Disable direct reset by modem.
ENABLE	1	Enable direct reset by modem.

Name	Value	Description	Feature Available
DISABLED	0	Disable phase compenstation for 2fsk..
ENABLED	1	Enable phase compenstation for 2fsk..